TV [' 
 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 KiU<e |2.5 
 
 |U 11.6 
 
 III 
 
 .{ 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 w 
 
 / 
 
 
 7 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 a>^ 
 
 
 ««v. 
 
 
 '^'^'^u ^ 
 
 ^^.v^ 
 
 ;\ 
 
 23 WIST MAIN STRIET 
 
 WESSliR.N.Y. MSM 
 
 (716) 873-4903 
 
 <'■'' 
 
CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHIVI/ICIVIH 
 Coilection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical MIcroreproductlons / Instltut Canadian de microreproductlons historlques 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notes touhniques at bibliographlques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 n 
 
 D 
 D 
 
 n 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 D 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 Covers damaged/ 
 Couverture endommagda 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaur^e et/ou peliicul6e 
 
 Cover title missing/ 
 
 La titre de couverture manque 
 
 Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cartes gdographiques en couleur 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Sound with other material/ 
 Relid avec d'autres documents 
 
 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 La reliure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distortion le long de la marge intdrieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout^es 
 lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, lorsque cela dtait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas 6t6 filmdes. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires suppl6mentaires; 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les ddtaiis 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la mdthode normale de filmage 
 sont indiqu6s ci-dessous. 
 
 I I Coloured pages/ 
 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommag6es 
 
 Pages restored and/oi 
 
 Pages restaurdes et/ou pelliculdes 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxe( 
 Pages d6color6es, tachetdes ou piqu6es 
 
 I I Pages damaged/ 
 
 I I Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 
 rri^ Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 
 □ Pages detached/ 
 Pages ddtachdes 
 
 I y Showthrough/ 
 LLd Transparence 
 
 I I Quality of print varies/ 
 
 Quality in^gale de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplementary material/ 
 Comprend du materiel supplementaire 
 
 D 
 D 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been rofilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont 6t6 film^es i nouveau de fa^on d 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est U\m6 au taux de reduction indiqu^ ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 
 
 
 
 
 14X 
 
 
 
 
 18X 
 
 
 
 
 22X 
 
 
 
 
 26X 
 
 
 
 
 30X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 12X 
 
 
 
 
 16X 
 
 
 
 
 20X 
 
 
 
 
 24X 
 
 
 
 
 28X 
 
 
 
 
 32X 
 
 
re 
 
 I6taijs 
 >s du 
 nodifier 
 ir une 
 ilmage 
 
 )S 
 
 The copy filmed here hes been reproduced thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 National Library of Canada 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering tho condition and legibility 
 ot the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover end ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 ether original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 The last recorded frpme on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol — »■ (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 IVIaps, plates, crarts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reductiion ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 L'exemplaire fiimd f ut reproduit grfice d la 
 g6n6rosit6 de: 
 
 Bibliothdque nationale du Canada 
 
 Les images suivantes ont 6X6 reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettet6 de l'exemplaire filmd, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprimde sont film6s en commenpant 
 par le pren.er plat et en terminant soit par la 
 dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'iilustration, soit par le second 
 plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont film<is en commenpant par la 
 premidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'i!iustration et en terminant par 
 la dernidre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaitrs sur !a 
 dernlAre image de cheque microfiche, selon lu 
 cas: le symbols — ^ signifie "A SUIVRE", le 
 symbols V signifie "FIN". 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 filmfo d des taux de reduction diffdrents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre 
 reproduit en un seul cliche, il est fiimd d partir 
 de I'angle sup^rieur gauche, de gauche t droite, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images n6cessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 iilustrent la mithode. 
 
 irrata 
 to 
 
 pelure, 
 n A 
 
 3 
 
 32X 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
:ji'. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ftj 
 
 r*i 
 
 
 
 ^} 
 
 I 
 
 I ! 
 
 "§ 
 
 Urt* 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 h^^*>^2^ 
 
 
 
 ^4 — <f-"Y^~^--^ sa 
 
 
 It 
 
 a 
 
 
 
n: 
 
 __si.. 
 
 sf 
 
 s 
 
 g|! 
 
 
 
 ■r 8 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 3 
 ^ ^ 
 
 
 CO 
 
 ^ J^ 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
f 
 
 ..■hi'. 
 4' 
 
 ill; 
 
 hi 
 
 / I 
 
 --■ i!'i 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 48 
 
 i 
 
 I i 
 
 H^ 
 
 THE 
 
 WSCOVEEY OF AMERICA 
 
 BY THE NORTHMEN, 
 
 WITH 
 
 NOTICES OP THE EARLY SETTLEMENTS OF THE IRISH 
 IN THE WESTERN HEMISPHERE. 
 
 BY 
 
 NORTH LUDLOW BEAMISH, 
 
 FBI.LOW OP THB ROYAL SOCrETY, AND MEMBER OP THE ROYAL DANISH SOCIETY Ot' 
 NORTHERN ANTIQUARIES, 
 
 AUTHOR OP THE "HISTORY OP THE GERMAN LKGION,"BTO. 
 
 " Der ar flagga p& mast och den visar it Norr !" — Tbgner, 
 
 LONDON : 
 
 T. AND W. BOONE, NEW BOND STREET. 
 
 1841. 
 
 :m 
 
t fos 
 
 ^ f} /i 
 
 
 n 
 
 68452 
 
12 
 
 TO 
 
 CIIARLRS CHRISTIAN IIAFN, 
 
 KNIOIIT OP THE KOYAL DANIHII OKDKK OV I)ANNKU«00, Ol' TI, U 
 ROYAL SWEDISH OKDER OV TUB NOllTH 8TAH, 
 
 COUNSELlOn OP STATK TO IMS MA.,l:8IV Till; KINO OP np.NMAIlK, 
 
 PUOFESSOIl OF NORTH liRN LITKRATUIM2, 
 
 I-ELtOW OP THE HOVAL ANTIQUAKIAN SOCIETY OP LONDON, 
 
 AND 
 
 SBCHETARY TO THE ROYAT, SOCIETY OP NOKTHEHN 
 
 €f)t folloluing; l^aQti 
 
 ANTIQUARIES 
 
 ARE 
 
 MOST RESPECTFUTLY INSCRIBED 
 
 BY 
 
 THE AUTHOR, 
 
1 
 
 t 
 r 
 t 
 
 r 
 I 
 f 
 
 T 
 I 
 
 r 
 t 
 c 
 h 
 
 d 
 
 P 
 li 
 
 g 
 tl 
 
P R E F A C: K. 
 
 i 
 
 Amonost the various, valuable, and important publica- 
 tions of the Royal Danish Society of Northern Antiquaries, 
 that which has created the greatest general interest in the 
 literary world is the able and elaborate work of Professor 
 Hafn, which rnnie out at Copenhagen in the year 1837, 
 under the title of Antiquitates AMEuiCANiT:, she 
 ScripUns Sejttentrionates rerum Anti-Coltimbianarutn in 
 America. 
 
 This interesting publication, the fruit of great literary 
 labour, and extensive research, clearly shews that the 
 eastern coast of North America was discovered and colo- 
 nized by the Northmen more than jioe-huTtdred years before 
 the reputed discovery of Columbus. 
 
 These facts rest upon the authority of antient Icelandic 
 manuscripts preserved in the Royal and University Li- 
 braries of Copenhagen, and which have" now been, for the 
 first time, translated and made public. Fac-similes of the 
 most important of these documents are given in Professor 
 liafn's work, together with maps and delineations of antient 
 monuments illustrative of the subject ; a Danish and Latin 
 translation follows the Icelandic text, and the whole is ac- 
 companied by introductory observations, philological and 
 historical remarks, as well as archaeological and geographical 
 disquisitions of high interest and value. 
 
 The design of the writer of the following pages is to put 
 before the public in a cheap and compendious form, those 
 parts of Professor Rafn's work, which he considered were 
 likely to prove most interesting to British readers, the 
 greater part of whom, from the expense and language of 
 the original publication, must necessarily be debarred from 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 ii: 
 
 its perusal. The translations of the Sagas and other Ice- 
 landic manuscripts, which embrace the whole detail of the dis- 
 coveries and settlements in America, are made substantially 
 from the Danish version, of the correctness of which, coming 
 fro.n the pen of the learned Editor, there could be no doubt ; 
 but in some cases, where the style of this version appeared to 
 the translator to depart too much from the quaint and simple 
 phraseology of the original, the Icelandic text has been 
 specially referred to, and an effort has been made through- 
 out, to give to the English narrative, the homely and un- 
 pretending character of the Icelandic Saga. In all cases 
 where it was thought possible that doubts might arise, or 
 where it was considered necessary to impress some par- 
 ticular fact or statement upon the mind of the reader, the 
 original Icelandic word or expression is given ; and free 
 use has been made of the copious and lucid notes and com- 
 mentaries of the learned Editor, to explain or illustrate 
 the various etymological, historical, and geographii.il points 
 which call for observation : as an appropriate introduction 
 to the whole, is prefixed a sketch of the rise, eminence, and 
 extinction of Icelandic historical literature, founded upon 
 the able Danish Essay of Dr. Erasmus M' -iir. Bishop of 
 Zealand. 
 
 The eminent historian Dr. Robertson appears to have 
 been totally unacquainted with the early voyages of the 
 Northmen to the western hemisphere, and hence it is pre- 
 sumed, that the present summary of their discoveries may 
 be received as an acceptable introduction to his celebrated 
 History of America. 
 
 The incidental allusions to the voyages and settlements of 
 the Irish, which are contained in the Minor Narratives, 
 are more likely to excite than satisfy enquiry ; mr 'h still 
 remains to be unravelled on this interesting subject, and 
 it is to be regretted that no competent hands have yet been 
 applied to this neglected portion of Irish history. It has 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 been too much the practice to decry as fabulous, all state- 
 ments claiming for the earlier inhabitants of Ireland, a 
 comparatively high degree of advancement and civilization- 
 and notwithstanding the many valuable publications con- 
 nected with the history and antiquities of that country, which 
 have from time to time, come forth, and the more recent 
 candid, learned, and eloquent production of Mr. Moore,* 
 there are not wanting, (even among her sons) those who, 
 with the anti-Irish feeling of the bigotted Cambrensis, 
 would sink Ireland in the scale o^' national distinction, and 
 deny her claims to that early eminence in religion, learning, 
 and the arts, which unquestionable records so fully testify. 
 
 And yet a very little unprejudiced enquiry would be 
 sufficient to satisfy the candid mind, that Erin had good 
 claims to be called the "School of the West," and her 
 
 sons : — 
 
 Inclyta gens hominum, Milite, Pace, Fide.''t 
 
 Thus much, at least, will the following pages clearly shew : 
 that sixty- five years previous to the discovery of Iceland by 
 the Northmen in the ninth century, iiish emigrants had 
 visited and inhabited that island; — that about the year 
 725, Irish ecclesiastics had sought seclusion upon the Faroe 
 islands; — that in the tenth century, voyages between Ice- 
 land and Ireland were of ordinary occurrence ; and that 
 in the eleventh century, a country west from Ireland, and 
 south of that part of the American continent, which was 
 discovered by the adventurous Northmen in the preceding 
 age, was known to them under the name of White Man's 
 Land or Great Ireland. 
 
 Cork, April, 1841. 
 
 • History of Ireland, by Thomas Moore, " a work "u which," says Hallum, 
 " the claims of his country are stated favourably, and with much Ica^nin^ 
 uud industry, but not with extravagant partiality." See Introduc. to 1 iter, 
 of Europe in the Middle Ages, by Henry Hallaui, F.R.A.S. Vol. I. p. 7, nolo. 
 
 f Donutus, Bii«liop of Fie!<oli. See p. 222. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 RISE, EMINENCE, AND EXTINCTION OF ICELANDIC 
 HISTORICAL LITERATURE. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Eminent position of Icelandic literature— Iceland the seat of religion 
 and learning in tVie dark ages of Europe — Recollection of events 
 preserved by the Slcalds and Sagamen — Investigation of the causes 
 of this mental advancement -Emigration from Norway to Iceland 
 in tlic ninth century— Manner of fixing the locality of the settlers — 
 Setstolilmr — Arbitrary appropriation of land— A Republic is formed 
 —Held together by moral laws— Origin of the situation of Chief- 
 Norwegian customs followed by th-^ settlers— Hcrredsthing— Althing 
 —Income of the chief— Hofgode — Powerful individuals rival the 
 chief— General tranquillity— Holmgang— Few Icelanders engage in 
 sea roving — Peaceful pursuits lead to recollections and stories of 
 the past— Sagas— Songs of the Skalds— Tliey pass orally through 
 many generation?— The memory aided by Runes— Anecdotes of 
 Egil Slialagrimsson— Of Olaf the Saint — The two Eddas- The 
 soldiers' whetstone— Historical knowledge of the Skalds — Landnu- 
 mtibok— The Skalds ro'-cmble the Troubadours— Of goodly lineage 
 and the confidants of Kings— Their historical songs considered true 
 — Tlie Heiuiskriugia — Drapus and single strophes — Enigmatical and 
 antithetical stylo— Cause of these records being preserved in Iceland 
 —Heroic age terminates earlier in Denmark and Sweden than in 
 Norway and Iceland . . 
 
 SECOND PERIOD. 
 
 Cause of tlie Icelanders becoming historians — Feuds and lawless pro- 
 ceedings — The time of feud a time of re-union — Skalds thus stimu- 
 lated to composition— Satirical songs — They become the subject 
 of legal enactment by tlie King of Denmark— Climate, and mode 
 of living favourable to the taste fur poetry— Domestic meetings- 
 Public amusements— The Altliiug— Hestething— Illustration from 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 VA«iE 
 
 Tegner's Frithlof — Anecdote of Holle BoUeson — Accuracy of per- 
 sonal description in tliu Sagns— Copiousness of Iceiundie language 
 in expressing shades of character— Helge Hardbeinscn identities some 
 chiefs whom he had never seen — Simplicity of the Saga — Delight of 
 the people in hearing them — Oral tradition ends with the fabulous 
 — Intercourse with Norway and Ireland — Arrival of a mer- 
 chant described — Piratical expeditions are replaced by trading voy- 
 ages—Large building timber imporied for the construction of the 
 Drinking Hall — Illustration from Frlthiof — Adventurous youth 
 sometim^^s engage in sea-roving — Northern maxim relative to home 
 — Tlie Icelandic Skalds ob'ain reprtation abroad — Exceed all their 
 competitors of the North — Extraordinary instance of memory- 
 Anecdote of the Sagaman Thorstein — Brief account of the eminent 
 Archaeologist Arnas Magnussen — Feast of Yule — Northern origin of 
 Picts — Icelanders despise trading voyages in the nth century — 
 They visit Rome — But always return to Iceland — Saying of King 
 ITakon on this peculiarity — Curiosity of Icelanders on the arrival of 
 a sliip— First duty of a stranger — Anecdote of Bishop Magnus 
 
 XV 
 
 THIRD PERIOD. 
 
 How traditions become committed to writing — Snorri Sturleson — Ari 
 Frode — Sasmund Frode— Historical writing the fruit of Christianity 
 — Period of this important event — Not propagated, as in Norway, 
 by force — First Bishop consecrated in 1056 — Oligarchy checks the 
 growth of hierarchy — Bells, books, and breviaries — First school 
 established — Previous state of society caused a greater taste for lite- 
 rature in Iceland than in the rest of the North — People apply them- 
 selves to literature- -Chiefs so learned that they often become priests 
 — Literature at first limited to religious subjects — Latin acquired, 
 and thus knowledge extended — Icelanders begin to compile annals 
 — Chronological difficulties — Genealogies the only guide — Ari Frode 
 llic first historian — his Islandingabok — Construction of a Saga — 
 Tiie greater number anonymous— Saomund Frode — The Landnama- 
 bok — Lives of the Olafs —Records of the achievements of Harald 
 llaarfager— Royal Sagas — No claim to authorship set up by the 
 Saga writers— Mythic Sagas — Erik Oddson the f?rst compiler of a 
 book — Carl Johnson— -Styrmer — Comparative literary eminence of 
 Iceland in the 12th century — Advancement in the next century — 
 Snorri Sturleson — Kis manner of writing history — Sturlc Thordson 
 — Jarls Snga — Orkiieyinua Saga — Decline of learning in the 16lh 
 century — Industry of copyidts — The Krlstni Saga — The Flato- 
 bogen . . , xxviii 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 LAST PliRIOD. 
 
 PAUE 
 
 Change in the social condition of Iceland — Its effects on historical 
 literature — Rise of an oligarchy — Field of narrative reduced — All 
 power divided amongst the sons of Sturle — Their feuds — Tlie Sturlun- 
 gatiden — Honourable feeling replaced by treachery, and the power 
 of numbers — No distinguished individual appears — Character of the 
 Sturlungcra — Hakon Ilakonson avails himself of the intestine discord, 
 and secures the allegiance of the inhabitants — The fate of Iceland 
 compared to that of Ireland — No theme left for the muse or historian 
 — Sagas cease to be written — Romances introduced by Hakon — Tiieir 
 injurious tendency — Tlie island sinks into insignificance — Observa- 
 tion of TorfiEus upon llakon's policy — Icelandic voyages cease in 
 the 16th century — Tlie old language, corrupted in Scandinavia, is 
 preserved pure in Iceland — Icelandic genealogists — ^The Reformation 
 operates against Saga writing — The attention of Danish and Swedish 
 literati drawn to Icelandic literature — Arngrim Johnson and Bishop 
 Brynjulf Svensson collect MSS. for the kings of Denmark, and Rug- 
 man for the King of Sweden — Prohibition by Christian V. of Den- 
 mark in 1G85— Remaining MSS. collected by Arnas Magnussen in 
 1702-1712, and lodged in the libraries of Copenhagen . xxxvii 
 
 SAGA OF ERIK THE RED. 
 
 Description of the MSS. — Tlie object of the writer — Discovery and 
 colonization of Greenland in 982—985 — Erik the Red removes from 
 Norway to Iceland in consequence of murder — Period of first settle- 
 ment by Ingolf, and previous visits of Gardar and Naddod — Botli 
 preceded by Irish monks — Erik's sons — He is outlawed, and resolves 
 to seek the land seen by Gunnbjiirn in a former voyage — Discovers 
 Greenland — Origin of the name — Erik colonizes tlie newly-dis- 
 covered country — Names of the first settlers and their residences — 
 An incidental statement in the Saga fixes with accuracy, the period 
 of the colonization . . .47 
 
 BJARNI HERJULFSON DISCOVERS AMERICA. 
 
 Genealogy of Bjarni Herjulfson — His pursuits and reputation — Hyrnn 
 of a Christian from the Hebrides — Family of Erik the Red— Bjarni 
 finding his father had accompanied Erik to Greenland, resolves to 
 follow him thither — He sails for several days without seeing land, 
 — at last sees a country covered with wood — He leaves this and 
 sailing for two 'lays, discovers aiiotlier land, which was flat— The 
 sailors want to land, but he continues at sea, and finds a thinl 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 J 
 
 ■i 
 
 PAGE 
 
 laiiil— This proves to be un island, and uninviting— At length they 
 reach Greenland, and njarni repairs to his father's— Observations 
 on the preceding— Calculations founded on the knowledge of a day's 
 sail, and the courses steered— Result shews the land discovered by 
 Hjarni to be the coast of North America— Date determined by pre- 
 ceding narrative— Comparison with the discovery of Columbus . 60 
 
 VOYAGE OF LEIF ERIKSON IN 994. 
 
 Bjarni Ilerjulfson visits Erik Jarl— Tells of his voyage to America- 
 Is reproached for not examining the country — Leif Erikson resolves 
 to explore the land, and buys Bjarni's ship — Wishes his father Erik 
 to lead the party — Erik consents, but is deterred by a fall from his 
 horse— Leif sets sail with thirty-five men — A German named Tyrker 
 accompanies him — They find the land first which Bjarni had found 
 last — Description of the country — They call it Ilelluland — This 
 shewn to be Newfounhland— They put to sea and find another 
 land— The features described— Leif gives it the name of Markland— 
 Shewn to be NovA Scotia — Again they put lo sea and come to an 
 island, — which appears to have been Nantucket — They cross the 
 mouth of Buzzard's Bay, and sail up the Pocasset River to Mount 
 Hope Bay — They resolve to remain here for the winter — Produc- 
 tions of the country — Mildness of the climate— Length of the day — 
 Determination of the latitude of the place — Explanation of the Ice- 
 landic terms upon which this observation is founded — agree- 
 ment of the description of modern travellers with the locality thus 
 dete;mine(' . • • .69 
 
 47 
 
 ADVENTURE OF LEIF THE LUCKY. 
 
 The German is missing — A party selected to seek him — He is met in a 
 state of great excitement from the discovery of vines — Incredulity of 
 Leif— The settlers gather grapes and fell trees to load their ship — 
 Leif names the country Vinlanu — Passage in Adam of Bremen 
 corroborative of this discovery — Tlie settlers sail for Greenland in 
 the spring— Leif saves some people from a rock, and is hence called 
 the Lucky — Erik the Red dies 
 
 CG 
 
 EXPEDITION OF THORVALD ERIKSON IN 1002. 
 
 Thorvald takes his brother Leif's ship to Greenland— They spend a 
 pleasant winter — They explore the laud and find no habitations — 
 Thorvald goes to the eastward— The ship is driven on a ness and 
 the keel broken— The place hence called Keclness— Thorvald finds 
 part of the country very beautiful— Canoes seen on the beach— Tlicy 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 I'Afii; 
 
 liiui nine men and kill eight of tlieni—DwullingH tiuen tnoiiluu I'rilli 
 — A ilrowsineiia coini-H upun tiirni — Tlioy are uttackfd by tliu 
 Skru'lini^tt, iinil Tliorvnld h killtMl — lie is Imiiedat Kro»9am'«H,Hnj)- 
 poHcd to bo I'oiNT Aldkiiton— lliii foUowLTs return to (iruunlund 70 
 
 VOYAGE OF T110U8TE1N ElllKSON, 1()0.>. 
 
 Tborsfoin ninriii-s tJudrid the daiigbter of Tliorbjiirn— Sails to brlnjj; 
 back tlio body of Tliorvald — Driven about tlu' wholu summer, and 
 returns to Oreenland — Invited to the lioiise of Thorstein the black — 
 Cluiractcrof (hidrid — Pestilential diaeaBO attaeks th(! crew— O rim - 
 liild dies— Thorstein Eriksou is attacked — His last conversation with 
 (iudrid — ll()3i)itality and friendly oilices of Thorstein the black — 
 (iudrid repairs to Leif in Itrattahlid — These superstitious incidents 
 corroborative of the authenticity of the Saga— Testimony of Sir 
 Walti Scott . . .74 
 
 EXTRACT FROM THE HEIMSKRINGLA. 
 
 Corroborative of the preceding narrative 
 
 . 71) 
 
 EXTRACT FROM THE HISTORY OF OLAE TRYQGVASON. 
 
 Corroborative of the same . . , .80 
 
 SAGA OF THORFINN KARLSEFNE. 
 
 The hero of this Saga a distinguished individual — His high descent — 
 Description of the MSS, from which the narrative is taken — The 
 nature of its contents — Value of the discrepancies and niisnomera — 
 Their existence accounted for — Torfseus imagined this Saga to be 
 lost — Genealogy of Kurlsefne — He Hts out a ship for Greenland in 
 1000 — Bjurni Grimolfson and Thorhall Gandason tit out another — 
 They pass the winter with I.eif at Hrattahlid — Leif becomes dejected 
 towards Yule — Karlsefne informed of the cause, relieves him by sup- 
 plies from his ship— Splendour of the festival — Karlsefne obtains 
 G ml rid in marriage 
 
 82 
 
 THORFIXiV KARLSEFNE'S EXPEDITION TO AND SETTLEMENT 
 IN VINLAND, A.D. 1007. 
 
 Karlsefne and Snorri Thorbraiulson make ready their ship for a voyage 
 to Greenland — Bjarni and Thorhall prepare also their vessel — Thor- 
 hall the hunter accompanies them — His appearance and qualifications 
 — The whole number of men amounts to IGO— They visit llelluland, 
 Alarklaud. and Keelness, and give the name of Furdustrands to the 
 shores of Uarnstable — Two Scotch people sent on .liore — Their 
 
CONTKNTS. 
 
 I'AIIU 
 
 I'lolliirin (IcBcrlbiil — Tlioy hi'lii^f buck ^rape« tiiid wild miiizc — 
 Struunifjonl itml Straiitiioy, or Hij/./.akd'h Hay niul MAiiTiiA'rt 
 ViNKYAiiu — I'n'purntiojis for rciimiiiinf? the winter— The ilsliing 
 •It'diiios and tlicy iin; in want of prnviHions — Tliorliull found lying on 
 a rock— I)af?r and Dwgr — A wlialo is found antl prepared for food — 
 IllneHsin consequence of partaking of it— Tliorliall ascribes tbc ar- 
 rival of the wliale to his versos in praise of the god TI»or — Tliey cast 
 the remainder into the sea in consot|uence — Tlie weatlier improves, 
 and provisions are again olttained — Snorri Karlsefneson born 
 
 87 
 
 74 
 
 80 
 
 I 
 
 
 KXPLORATIONS OF KARLSKFNK AND THOUIIALL. 
 
 Tborliall goes northward with nine men, and Ivarlsefne takes the rest 
 round the coast to the southward— 'I'horliall is driven by westerly Rales 
 to Ireland— ^arlsefne sails up to Mount IIovk Bay — He finds 
 wild maize, and qinintitios of fish- The Ilclgir Fisknr, or Ilolibut — 
 Number of wild boasts — They remain liero a fortnight — Visit of the 
 Skroclings — Their identity with the Esquimaux — Mildness of the 
 winter— Second visit of the Skrnjlings — They begin to barter — Their 
 passion for red cloth, and meal porridge — Frightened away by a bull 
 — Hostile return of the Skrajlings — An engagement takes place — 
 Consterni'.tion produced amongst the settlers by a peculiar missile of 
 their assailants — Rallied by Freydis — Her courage and reproaches 
 — The Northmen retire to Hicir dwellings — Tlie Skrajlings find an 
 axe, and throw it away on finding that it will not cut stone — Karl- 
 sefne deems it expedient to abandon the country — They sail north- 
 wards, supposed towards Cbippinoxot point— Doubtful passage in 
 the MS.— A Uniped — Another version of the death of Thorvald 
 Erikson— Blue hills of Norfolk — The third winter is passed at 
 Straumfjord — Dissension caused by the women — They leave Vinland 
 in spring — Find five Skruellngs in Markland— Take two of them and 
 teach them their language — Description of their dwellings and chiefs 
 — White Man's Land or Gukat Iueland— Bjarni Grimolfson is 
 driven into the Irish ocean— The vessel attacked by the teredo navalis 
 — Part of the crew saved in a boat — Magnanimity of Bjarni Grimolf- 
 son . . . 
 
 Descendants of Karlsefne and Gudrid 
 
 101 
 105 
 
 VOYAGE OF FREVDIS, HELGI, AND FINNBOGI, 
 A.D. 1011. 
 
 This narrative contained in the Saga of Erik tlie Red— Freydis the 
 daughter of Erik, induces the brothers Ilelgi and Finnbogi to un- 
 dertake a voyage to Vinland with her— Leif agrees to lend her his 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 I'AOK 
 
 houBCB there — Tlilrty men agreod on for each ship— Freydis breaks 
 the agreement and takes flvc more — The brothers arrive flrst, and 
 take up thoir eiTccts to Leifs houses — Freydis ol)ject8 and they erect 
 a separate building — Winter begins and amusements ore set on foot 
 — Clicckcd by discord, ending in a cessation of intercourse — Freydis 
 adopts a stratagem to arouse her husband's anger against the bro- 
 thers — Tliey are fallen upon sleeping and killed — Barbarity of 
 Freydis — She threatens to murder any who disclose her misdeeds, 
 and returns to Greenland in the spring . . • 100 
 
 FURTHER PARTICULARS RESPECTING KARLSEFNE AND 
 
 QUDRID. 
 
 Discovery of the crimes of Freydis — Kurlsefne sails with a rich cargo 
 to Norway — Both he and his wife are held in great honour there- 
 He prepares to return to Iceland — The Husasnotrutr^ — Half a mark 
 of gold given for it by a German — supposed to be the bird's-eye 
 maple, found in Massachusetts — Karlsefne buys the GlaumbiB 
 estate in Iceland — A numerous and distinguished race spring from 
 him and Gudrid — His death — Snorri, their son, builds a church— 
 Gudrid becomes a nun — Posterity of Snorri Karlsefneson — Bishop 
 Thorlak Runolfson, a descendant of Ka**' ^fne,and the probable com- 
 piler of these voyages . .110 
 
 GEOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. 
 
 Fragment of Vellum Codex, No. 102, describing the situation of Hellu- 
 land, Marklaud, and Vlnland — Remarkable fragment called Gripla, 
 from the celebrated collection of Bjom Johnson . .113 
 
 PART II. 
 
 m 
 
 MONUMENTS AND INSCRIPTIONS. 
 
 The Dighton Writing Rock — Runic stone at Kingiktorsoak, shewing 
 discoveries in the Arctic regions — Astronomical knowledge of the 
 Northmen in the 11th century — Mistake of supposing them to be 
 pirates — Proof of their civilization and attainments — Arguments 
 founded on their extended intercourse — The state of Ireland in the 
 8th century favourable to their improvement — The Icelandic North- 
 men differ from those of Scandinavia — Kakortok church — Rimic 
 stones at Igaliko and Igikeit — Icelandic Annals — Communication 
 with Markland to the middle of the 14th century— Fate of the 
 Greenland settlements — Re-discovery in the 18th century — Hans 
 Egede — Present condition of Greenland .... 
 
 117 
 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PART III. 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Locality of Thule — The Irish Papas — Irish called Wcstmen by the 
 Icelanders— Their residence in Iceland in 70o and in Faroe in 725 — 
 Extract from Dicuil — Ari Marson's voyage to Great Ireland — Rafn 
 the Limerick merchant — Intercourse of the Northmen with Ireland 
 — Geographical Fragment— Voyage of Bjiirn Asbrandson to Great 
 Ireland — His ij.evious history — Observations of Bishop Miiller on 
 the Eyrbyggja Saga — Voyage of Gudlcif Gudlaugson to Great Ire- 
 land— Arguments in proof of an early Irish settlement on the East 
 coast of America — Affinity between the Celtic and American Indian 
 languages — Nautical means and knowledge of the Irish— The Cur- 
 rach — Phoenician and Celtibcrian intercourse — Druidism — The Og- 
 ham character — Value of the arguments founded on the absence of 
 Irish MSS — Evidence which these enquiries offer in support of the 
 Mosaic records— Conclusion . . . . .173 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Complete Dial of the Antient Northmen 
 
 Genealogical Tables 
 
 234 
 240 
 
 MAPS AND PLATES. 
 
 113 
 
 Plate I. Map of Vinland 
 
 Plate II. General Chart 
 
 Plate III. The Assonet, or Dighton Writing Rock 
 
 to face the Title 
 
 to face Part III. 
 
 to face Part II. 
 
1 I 
 
 " Der iir flagga pa mast och den vlsar i\t Norr, 
 Och i Norr iir den illskado jord ; 
 Jag vill folja de liimmclska vindariias gfing, 
 Jag vill styra tillbaka mot Nord." 
 
 FniTiiiop's Saga ai>. Tecnbr. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 SKETCH OF THE RISF, EMINENCE, AND EXTINCTION 
 OF ICELANDIC HISTORICAL LITEIIATUIIE. 
 
 " Tlicre's tl -^ flag oi the mast, nnd it points to tlio North, 
 
 And tlic North holds tlic land tlmt I love; 
 I will steer back to northward, the heavenly course 
 
 Of the winds, guidint;' sure from above!" 
 
 Teonbk— sec ante. 
 
 TiiK national literature of Iceland holds a distinct and 
 eminent position in the literature of Europe. In that 
 remote and cheerless isle, separated by a wide and stormy 
 ocean, from the more genial climates of southern lands, reli- 
 gion and learning took up their tranquil abode, before the 
 south of Europe had yet emerged from the mental darkness, 
 which followed the fall of the Roman Empire. There the 
 unerring memories of the Skalds and Sagamen were the 
 depositories of past events, which, handed down, from age 
 to age, in one unbroken line of historical t radition, were 
 committed to writing on the introduction of Christianity, 
 and now come before us with an internal evidence of their 
 truth, which places them amongst the highest order of his- 
 torical records. 
 
 To investigate the origin of this remarkable advance- 
 ment in mental culture, and trace the progressive steps by 
 which Icelandic literature attained an eminence, which 
 even now imparts a lust -e to that barren land, is an object 
 of interesting and instructive inquiry, and will, it is pre- 
 sumed, form an acceptable introduction to the perusal of 
 the ancient Icelandic manuscripts, which constitute the text 
 of the present volume. 
 
 m 
 
ii 
 
 INTUOHUCTION. 
 
 Tho nutlior lias, lln'ivf(>n», availr«l liiins(>li' of nn nhU' 
 t'ssay by Hislidp Miilirr on this iiilorcsfiii}^' siihuHt,* to put 
 lu'loro Ills roa<l'.'i's, in a coiuist* lorm, \hc Ifadinj^ rharac- 
 tcM-istics of that |u'ciiliar stato of socii»ty, which ^onoratod 
 tht'so ovidtMict'rt of |H'aecful and civilized pursuits, and ^avo 
 birth to pnxhictions, which, like their own Aurora, stood 
 forth the Northmen's meteor in the shades of night! 
 
 Aiuon^ no other peoph* of Kurope can the conception 
 and birth of historical literature be more clearly trace<l, 
 than amongst the people of Iceland, lien' it can be shewn 
 how memory took root, and gave birth to narrative ; how 
 narrative multiplied and increased until it was committed 
 to writing ; how the written relation became (>vontnally 
 sifted and arranged in chronological order, until at length, 
 in the withering course of time, the breath which had given 
 life aud character to the whole, fled hence, and only the 
 dead letter remained behind. 
 
 Hut why was it Icelanders, in particular, who kindled 
 *ho torch of history in the North ? How came its light to 
 spread so far from this remote and unimportant islaud ? 
 What cause led Icelanders more than any other people, to 
 a minute observation of both the present and the past ? 
 How came they to clothe these recollections in connected 
 narratives, and eventually to commit them to writing? — 
 are questions which first naturally present themselves, and 
 the true solution of which, can alone lead to a correct 
 estimate of the value of Icelandic annals. 
 
 It is well known that, when towwds the end of the ninth 
 century, Iceland had been discovered by the roving 
 northern Vikings, the imperious sway of Harald Haarfager, 
 
 • Om den islandskc Ilistorio-skrifnings Oprindelse, Flor og Undergnng, 
 of Dr. Peter Erasmus Miillcr, Biskop over Sicellands Stift, published in tlio 
 Nordisk Tidskrift for Oldkyndiglicd, 1 B. 1 H. Kjcibenhavn, 1832. For 
 the authorities on which this Essay is founded, the reader is referred to the 
 publication itself, of wliich the present sketch, in all its historical features, 
 may be considered an epitome. 
 
and 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 
 INTnoniTTIOV. 
 
 iii 
 
 lod mnny Norwo^ians to sook Hiiffty ami iinlciMMulciiro in 
 that distant islainl. Hut it.s n-nioto position rrndcrt'd tho 
 voya^o t! hUvr both dillicnlt and dan^'orous; not on(< nnlon^st 
 hun<lruds of fii^itivos, — Hcarct'ly thi' chiol's thinnsolvos, who 
 possessed largo ships, — con!*! provide the nect'ssury outfit 
 for a voyage, which often histed for half i\w year; and tho {, 
 colonization of the new cotuitry was nocessarily slow and 
 progressive, and confined, at first, to tho high-minded and 
 more wealthy chieftains of the western coast. Hut tho 
 intelligence was soon abroad that bravo and daring men 
 had established themselves in a new country, where the 
 cattle could provide for themselves in winter, where 
 tho waters were full of fish, and tho land abounding in 
 wood ; and many therefore determined upon removing to 
 this favoured region. The tide of emigration from Norway 
 progressively increased, and soon became so great, that 
 liarald, fearing that his kingdom would, eventually, bo left 
 desolate, prohibited it altogether, and laid a tax upon 
 every voyager to Iceland. 
 
 Tho chiefs took their families, servants, slaves, and 
 cattle ; and many kinsmen and relatives, who were accus- 
 tomed to follow the fortunes of the chief, accompanied 
 him also on this new venture. The particular locality of 
 their future residence, was detennined by tlio wind and 
 weather, united with an implicit faith in the superintending 
 guidance of the tutelary idol, under whose invocation the 
 seat-posts * were cast into the sea, and wherever thes(^ 
 happened to be washed ashore, was the dwelling raised. 
 
 * Ondvcgissulur, or Sctstokkar. These were tull carved wooden jjillurs, 
 attached to the scat of the chief, and ornamented at the top with tlic figures 
 of his tutelary deities, generally Thor or Odin ; the superstitious preference 
 given to that particular part of the coast, upon which they happened to be 
 cast, was so great, that Ingolf, the first Norwegian settler in Iceland, after 
 a residence of three years at Ingulfshbfdi, where he first landed, removed to 
 the unfavourable situation of the present capital, Reykjavik, on finding that 
 his Setstokka hud drifted to that point. Anti((. Amcr. p. 9, note ii. ; Islanils 
 
 B 2 
 
I « i 
 
 IV 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 In the course of sixty years, the whole island had become 
 tiuis colonized. Meantime the first settlers had acquired 
 no means of circumscribing the movements of the last, who 
 with the same independent spirit as their predecessors, 
 took posses^sion of that particular tract of country, which 
 appeared to them most eligible ; and the extent of the land, 
 the diiKculties of the voyage, and the limited number of the 
 population, admitted, for some time, the continuance of 
 this arbitrary appropriation. x\micable restrictions were 
 the only checks that could be at first opposed to such un- 
 constrained and uncertain movements, and these were all 
 either of Norwegian origin, or brought dii'ectly from Nor- 
 way. For many of the settlers were related by ties of 
 blood; the greater number had made common cause 
 against Harald ; in their native land, they had been accus- 
 tomed to meet together at the Court (Thing), in the 
 temple, at the great feast of Yule, at the periodical offerings 
 to their idols — and thus, naturally, and with one accord, 
 they were led to establish a form of self-government some- 
 what similar to that uni'^r which they had lived in Norway. 
 TJK absence of any despotic ruler gave, however, the new 
 community a great advantage over the parent state, and 
 hence arose a constitution more free than the model upon 
 which it had been formed. 
 
 This little republic was held together solely by moral 
 
 Oixlagelsc og Bebyggclse af N. M. Pctorson, Nord. Tidsk. for Oldkyn. B. 1. 
 p. 258-9. Tcgncr thus describes the Setstokka in the banqiictting hull of 
 
 Frithiof: 
 
 h(')g siitcspc'lamc bS'ida 
 
 Stodo fiir imdau dcraf, tvii Gudar skurna af almtrild ; 
 Odeii med herrskareblick, och Frcj med solen pa hattch." 
 
 Frithiofs Saga III. p. 18. 
 
 the high seat pillars both 
 
 Stood there, two Gods of fairest elm-wood carved 
 Gdiii with lordly mein, and brilliant Frey, 
 Around whose head the radiant sunshine pinys. 
 
 ,,.*^ 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 
 laws. Somo of the richer cmigraiits had slaves, which 
 after putting to cultivate some particular lands, they libe- 
 rated : all others were free ; the sturdy yeoman was the 
 unrestricted lord of his own soil ; if he came into collision 
 with his neighbour, and thought himself more powerful, 
 he slew him without scruple, but thereupon immediately 
 endeavoured either through the intercession of the chief of 
 the district, or some other influential person, to screen 
 himse'i from reproach, or effect a reconciliation with the 
 friends of the deceased, by the payment of a fine. 
 
 The situation of chief generally arose from the relative 
 position of the ship's-company in the mother country, 
 which led to one particular individual among the crew, 
 taking possession of the ne^v district in his own name; but 
 it oftener depended ui)jn property or personal bravery. 
 Was he a gallant warrior, or could afford to keep more 
 servants and slaves than his neighbours, his assistance 
 became of importance in settling disputes : and the same 
 cause produced a reciprocal feeling in support of the chief, 
 on the part of those whom he assisted . 
 
 Befox'e a certain number of statutes had been collected 
 and formally established, the people followed the eld cus- 
 toms of their native land, the parties themselves naming 
 their judges from amongst the neighbouring yeomen ; but 
 although there was no want of legal forms, to which they 
 could appeal, or chicanery, by which justice could be 
 evaded, the result more often depended upon the relative 
 strength and influence of the party, than upon the merits of 
 the case. At the district courts (Herredsthinget), the in- 
 fluence of the Chief was considerable, but not altogether 
 paramount ; many of the more wealthy yeomen could offer 
 him effective resistance : his influence at the superior court 
 (Althinget), depended upon his personal reputation, the 
 power of his friends, and the number of his followers. 
 
 The income of the Chief was principally derived from 
 
VI 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 the tract of land, of which he had taken possession on his 
 arrival ; he was also, in most cases, the Hofgode, or priest 
 of the temple ; and for the duties of this office, in which 
 providing the altar with offerings was included, he received 
 a small contribution (hoftoUr) from every farm in the 
 neighbourhood. To this was afterwards added compen- 
 sation for journeys to the Althing, and he also received 
 fees from those whose causes he conducted, as well as a 
 small payment from the ships which landed their cargoes 
 on his ground. But all these various sources, did not 
 furnish him with any considerable income, and his land 
 remained his principal means of support. ITie office was 
 hereditary, as in Norway, but it could also be sold or re- 
 signed, and sometimes was lost by being appropriated to the 
 payment of a judicial fine. 
 
 Notwithstanding this elevated position of the Chief, it 
 not unfrequently happened that a powerful individual in 
 the province, acquired a higher reputation, and obtained 
 more clients than his superior. Thus after Olaf Paa had 
 returned from his celebrated expedition to Ireland, married 
 the daughter of the powerful Egil Skalagrim, and became 
 possessed of his father-in-law's property, many people 
 flocked around him, and he became a great chief, without 
 being actually a Godordsman, or pontiff*. 
 
 So long as the colonization continued, the extent of the 
 island secured internal peace ; the Landnamsmen, as the 
 first settlers were called, had few disputes amongst tb- m- 
 selvcs, for every one was taketi up with his own affairs 
 and although it might sometimes happen, that a quarrelsome 
 individual by single combat (Holmgang*) or the threat of 
 personal encounter, would drive another from his farm, 
 di sputes and contests were of rare occurrence. Another 
 
 * From holm, a small islaiul. So called in consequence of these duels ge- 
 nerally taking place upon one of tlie small neigliboming islands, from whence 
 the combatants could not so easily escape. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 VU 
 
 local circumstance of no inconsiderabl*' importance as con- 
 nected with the tranquillity of the country, was the diminu- 
 tive character of the forests in Iceland. These consisted of 
 dwarf trees, ill suited to ship building, -nd therefore only 
 small vessels could be built upon the island; whoever 
 wished io trade to Norway, entered into partnership with 
 some Norwegian merchant, or bought a vessel which had 
 been already Irought out from the parent state. Such 
 vessels could not, however, be used for piratical expeditions, 
 and those who wished to tugage in such adventures, were 
 obliged to join some kindred spirits in Norway who pos- 
 sessed what was called a long ship (Langskip). These dif- 
 ficulties of outfit, connected with the want of sufficient 
 hands for warlike purposes, and the long distance from the 
 coasts, where they were accustomed to carry on their 
 piratical proceedings, was doubtless the cause of so few of 
 the new settlers being concerned in sea-roving, while, in all 
 other matters, they followed the customs of their ancestors. 
 
 Thus did this remote and compai'atively barren island, 
 give freedom and peace to many of Norway's bravest sons, 
 far from their native land. Instead of participating in the 
 dangers of the perilous voyage, or aiding in the obstinate 
 encounter, or sharing in the lawless spoil, when plunder 
 conferred upon the Sea-king both a fortune and a name, 
 they now sat down peacefully in their tranquil homes, or 
 directed the agricultural labours of their servants and de- 
 pendants. And now did faithful memory carry them back 
 in imagination to the old and warlike time, whose features 
 appeared the more brilliant when contrasted with the tran- 
 (juillity of their present pursuits ; personal deeds led to the 
 remembrance of those of the father, for it was often in 
 avenging his death, that their prowess had been first called 
 forth, or from his kinsmea or associates that they had re- 
 ceived the first assistance. The colonists were, besides, 
 men of high family ; the Scandinavians were accustomed 
 to set great weight upon this circumstance ; the fewer were 
 
\111 
 
 rNTHODlICTION. 
 
 tlu» outward distinctions tluit cluiriictcrizod tlio individual, 
 tlio more important was that prerogative considered which 
 promised magnanimity and valour. The stranger was 
 therefore minutely (piestioned about his family, and even 
 the peasant girl despised the suitor whose lineage was un- 
 known. In the mother country the remembrance of the 
 old families lived amongst the people of the district ; they 
 had travelled together to the national assembly; the pa- 
 ternal barrow, and the ai.tient hall bore testimony to their 
 noble birth, — but of this, nothing save the relation could 
 accompany them to Iceland, and therefore, was the new 
 settler so careful in detailing to his sons and posterity, the 
 history and achievenunits of their kinsmen in Norway. 
 'I'he son equally tenacious of ancestral fame, failed not to 
 propagate the sat ic minute details amongst his immediate 
 descendants, and thus was insensibly formed, among the 
 Icelanders, connected oral narratives of the families, for- 
 tunes, and actions of their ancestors. 
 
 These Sagas or traditions, did not generally go further 
 back than the time of the father and grandfather ; but the 
 recollections preserved in the songs of the Skalds, were of 
 much older date, and a number of historical songs can be 
 pointed out, which the Icelanders must have brought with 
 them to the new country. Others were historical in a more 
 limited sense, being thrown into rhyme for the occasion, to 
 flatter the vanity of some powerful chief, by a poetical 
 representation of his genealogy; but the more numerous 
 were those in which all the achievements of a hero were 
 specifically enumerated. 
 
 These compositions bore little evidence of Brage's* 
 
 * nrage, the fourth son of Odin and Fiiggn, was the Apollo of the Northern 
 Mythology; he chuuntcd the exploits of the Gods and heroes to the tones 
 of a golden harp, and was represented by the figure of an old man, with u 
 snow-white beard. Runes were said to be upon his tongue, he was rather 
 given to strong drinks, and not very celebrated for courage. — See Manual 
 of Scandinavian Mythology, by Grcnville I'igott, p. UO. 
 
INTKODl'CTION. 
 
 IX 
 
 for- 
 
 favour. Under the jinj^le of ni(l(5 rhymes and alliforatlon, 
 a pictorial expression was given to sword-cuts and slaughter, 
 which brought to remembrance the order in which the 
 several achievements had succeeded each other. The poet- 
 ical form is more visible in the earlier songs, such as : 
 Ilornklove's Ode on Harald Haarfager, |)articularly his de- 
 scription of the battle of Hafurcfjord* than in the later, 
 such as Ottar Svartes Ode on the combats of Olaf the 
 Saint ; and those compositions have still more poetical 
 wort)., in which, like Eyvind Skialdespilders Ode in praise 
 of the fallen king Ilakon Adelsteen, the writers express 
 the feeling which the events call forth. 
 
 It may be readily supposed that heroic verses, sung by 
 the Skalds themselves in the courts of heroes, were com- 
 mitted to memory, and that at a time when this was the 
 only means of recording their achievements, such verses 
 would pass orally through many generations. The memory 
 was also sometimes aided by carving the verses in Runic 
 letters I upon a staff. The dying Ilalmund is introduced 
 in Gretter's Saga, saying to his daughter: — " Thou shalt 
 now listen whilst I relate my deedr, and sing thereof a song, 
 which thou shalt afterwards cut upon a staff." In Egils 
 Saga, also, Thorgerd, addressing her father I'^gil Skalagrim- 
 sen, whose grief for the loss of his son Biidvar, had made 
 him resolve on putting an end to his existence, says : — " I 
 wish, father, that we might live long enough for you to sing 
 a funeral song upon Bodvar, and for me to cut it upon a 
 staff." 
 
 * The famous iiavul engagement in the Bay of Ilafursfjord, now called 
 Stavangcrfjord, (A. D. 875,) made Ilarald Haarfager master of the entire 
 kingdom of Norway. 
 
 t The word llune is said to be derived from ryn a furrow or channel j the 
 invention is attributed to Odin and his Aser or Godsj the alphabet conaists 
 of sixteen letters, wliieh lilie the Hiberno-Celtic, claims l»ha;nician origin. 
 See Leitfaden fur Nordischcn Alterthumskunde, herausgegeben von der 
 Koniglichen Gescllschaft fUr Nordische Alterthumskunde. Coiicnhagcu 
 1837, p. 75, et scq. Moore's History of Ireland, Vol. I. p. 54. 
 
X INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Sometimes verses were iiiinicdiatcly committed to me- 
 mory by a number of persons. When King Oluf the Saint 
 drew up his anny for the battle of Stikklestad (10»30), he 
 directed the Skalds to stand within the circle (Skioldborg), 
 which the bravest men had formed around the king. *' Ye 
 shall," said he, *' stand here, and see what passes, and thus 
 will ye not require to depend on the Sagas of others for 
 what ye afterwards relate and sing." The Skalds now 
 consulted with each other, and said that it would be fitting 
 to indite some memorial of that which was about to hapi)en, 
 upon which each improvised a strophe, and the historian* 
 adds: "these verses the people immediately learned." 
 In the same manner, nmch older songs were held in re- 
 membrance, and there is still extant in that part of Snorros 
 Edda,f called Kenningar, a fragment of Brage the Skalds 
 ode on Ragnor Lodbrok, by means of which he, in the 
 7th century, moderated the anger of Bjorn Jernside, against 
 himself. In the same poem are fragments of an old ode on 
 the fall of llolf Krake, which St. Olaf directed the Skald, 
 Thonnod Kolbran, to sing, when the battle of Stikklestad 
 was to conunence. The whole army, says the Saga, was 
 
 * Siiorro Stuilcson, in the Ilcimskriugla or History of tlic Norwegian 
 Kings. 
 
 t Tlicre arc two worlis wliich bear the title of Edda ; the one called tho El- 
 der Edda in verse, and the other the Younger Edda in prose. Tho first may 
 be considered a symbolical \.'ork on the Scandinavian Mythology, tho latter 
 a kind of commentary on the former. The Elder or Poetic Edda was com- 
 piled by the eminent Icelander Sa;mund, snrnamed Erode, or the Learned ; 
 the Younger or Prose Edda by Snorro Sturlcson. The latter is composed of 
 three parts, namely : 1st. Mythological Fables; 2nd. The Kenningar, being 
 a collection of epithets and metaphors employed by the Skalds, and illus- 
 trated by fragments from their compositions, and from the Elder Edda ; 
 3rd. The Scalda, or Poet's Book, containing three treatises; the first being 
 a treatise on the Icelandic characters and alphabets; the second on 
 grammatical, rhetorical, and poetical figures ; and the third on prosody. 
 See Pigott's Manual of Scaudinuvian Mythology, Introduction, p. xlii. 
 
 Ct 8C(I. 
 

 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 XI 
 
 was 
 
 pleased at hearing this old song, which they called the 
 Soldier's Whetstone, and the king thanked the bard, and 
 gave him a gold ring that weighed half a mark. 
 
 But it was more particularly, the Skalds themselves who 
 preserved the older songs in rem em- ance. By hearing 
 these, their own poetical character had been formed, their 
 memories sharpened ; and a knowledge of the past was 
 necessary for the acquisition of those mythic and historical 
 allusions, which were considered indispensable to jwetical 
 expression. An instance of their historical knowledge is 
 thus mentioned in the Landnamabok :* when King Ilarald 
 Haardraade lay with his army in Holland, two large bar- 
 rows were observed on the edge of the strand, but no one 
 knew who was interred there ; however, on the return of the 
 army to Norway, Kare the black, a kinsman of the famous 
 Skald Theodolf af Hvine, was enabled to state that the 
 graves contained the bodies of Snial and Iliald, the two 
 warlike sons of the old Norwegian King Vatnar. This 
 historical knowledge of the Skalds led to their being held 
 in high respect thoughout Scandinavia, and we find them 
 allotted the first place at the courts of Kings. Plarald 
 Haarfager is stated to have had more respect for the Skalds, 
 than for all the rest of his courtiers, and, more than a cen- 
 tury later, they appear to have been held in equal estima- 
 
 * Tho Landnamabok or Book of the first Norwegian settlers in Iceland, is 
 the most complete national record that has, perhaps, ever been compiled. 
 It contains the names of about 3UUU persons, and 14U0 places, and forms a 
 minute genealogical register of tlie colonists, their properties, kinsmen, and 
 descendants, together witli short notices of their achievements. The com- 
 pilation was the work of several authors, beginning witli Are, surnamcd 
 hinns Frode, or the learned, (b. 1007, d. 1148) continued by Kolsteg, 
 Stynner, and Thordsen, and ending with Uauk Erlendson, for many years 
 Lagman, or Governor of Iceland, who died A.D. 1334. The Landnamabok 
 is considered the first authority in all matters connected with the early 
 history of the island, and will be often found (juotcd in the present 
 volume. 
 
xii 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 i 
 - 1 
 
 tion by the Swedish King, Olaf .Skiiidlionuing, who is 
 stated to have taken great dehght in their freedom of 
 speech. 
 
 The northern pagan Skalds must not however be looked 
 upon as the Grecian Aonides, whose only province was to 
 sing ; they bear a nearer resemblance to the Proven<^'al 
 Knights, were were also Troubadours. The Scandinavian 
 bards were besides of goodly lineage, for only the higher, 
 and more independent conditions of life could call forth 
 Brage's favour ; they were also well versed in warlike ex- 
 ercises; the song was the accompaniment to the combat, 
 and we have nearly as many records of their heroic deeds 
 as of their poetical eflFusions. They were, also, at times, the 
 favourites or confidants of kings, like Theodolf af Ilvine, 
 who was the bosom friend of Harald Haarfager, and Flein, 
 to whom the Danish King, Eisteen, gave his daughter in 
 marriage. 
 
 Thus were the Skalds well furnished with knowledge 
 of both the present and the past, and, therefore, has the 
 sagacious Snorro Sturleson truly said, in the I'leface to his 
 work :* — " The principal foundation is taken from the songs 
 that were sung before the chiefs, or their children, and we 
 hold all that to be true, which is there stated, of their deeds 
 and combats. It was, no doubt, the practice of the Skalds 
 to praise those the most, in whose presence they stood, but 
 no one, even so circumstanced, would venture to tell of 
 action?, which both he, and all those who heard him. 
 
 • The Heimskringla, or historyo the Kings of Norway, being a complete 
 history of Scandinavia for 300 years. "To this worli,'' says an eloquent 
 and learned writer, " we are indebted for our cliief knowledge of those 
 Norman chiefs, whose names made the Kings of Europe tremble in their 
 palaces, and whose descendants now sit on the mightiest of their thrones." 
 Historical and descriptive account of Iceland, Greenland, and the Faroe 
 islands (Ed. Cab. Lib. XXVIII. p. 148), a little work, which, with its 
 companion, " Scandinavia," by Drs. Crichton and Wheaton, forms an 
 admirable compendium of northern history. 
 
INTnODUCTION. 
 
 xiii 
 
 '"J 
 in 
 
 i 
 
 know to bo false, for that would bo an affront, instead of a 
 compliment." 
 
 Besides heroic songs, or Drapas, single Strophes were 
 often improvised, not only by Skalds, but by many other 
 individuals, of both sexes, in a critical moment ; and these, 
 by being committed to memory, preserved the remendjrancc 
 of the occasion which called them forth. Like the Orien- 
 talists, the Northmen loved to shew their wit by an enig- 
 matical and antithetical mode of speaking, and from thence, 
 the ear having been once accustomed to the simple mea- 
 sure, the transition was easy to the formation of a strophe, 
 by means of alliteration or rhyme. 
 
 The means of preserving the recollections of past events, 
 which have been here pointed out, were, for the most part, 
 common both to those who remained in Norway, and those 
 who emigrated to the new country ; but in the parent state, 
 the stream of present events, carried away and obscured 
 the recollections of the past. The changes which came 
 upon the whole nation from Harald Haarfager's time, were 
 naturally looked upon by the Norwegians, as more impor- 
 tant than the events in which only individual persons or 
 families had been previously concerned. The Icelanders, 
 on the other hand, viewed the one as affecting their home, 
 while the other appeared to be the transactions of a foreign 
 country, and thus the recollections which up to the time of 
 the aigration had been preserved in the several detached 
 districts of Norway, were transferred to, and became united 
 in Iceland, as the one settler enumerated to the other, the 
 valorous deeds and achievements of his forefathers. 
 
 Besides, it was amongst the families of high birth, that 
 these antient traditions were best preserved. Such families 
 maintained an unbroken succession in Iceland, whereas in 
 Norway they became extinct, first, in consequence of the 
 many events under the immediate successors ot Harald 
 Haarfager, and next, from the furious zeal of Olaf ri the 
 
 ■a. 
 
 
XIV 
 
 IVTllODUCTION. 
 
 propftgation of Christianity, which bi'Dught niin to the more 
 tenacious adherents of the old faith, and these were just the 
 individuals, amon^fst whom the ancient Sagas were best pre- 
 served. Not less destructive to the old families was the 
 unfortunate expedition to England and Ireland, under Ha- 
 rald Ilaardraade and Magnus IJarfod, in the 11th cen- 
 tury,* as also the long civil wars in the 12th century, which 
 ended with the fall of the Optimists. 
 
 The other parts of Scandinavia also produced okalds, 
 and several, both Danish and Swedish, are mentioned in 
 the antient Sagas ; but these countries were of much 
 greater extent, and ruled by much more powerful monarchs, 
 than Norway, previous to the 9th century ; and thus did 
 the heroic age terminate, and the songs of the Skalds be- 
 come silent at an earlier period there than in the neigh- 
 bouring kingdom. 
 
 • ** According to our annals," says Moore, " it was not till A.D. 1 102, 
 tlint this prince commenced his operations by a hostile descent upon 
 Dublin ;" a paciPc arrangement was then entered into, but having been 
 violated, as allegcii, by the Irish monarch Murkertacli, Magnus invaded 
 the country in the following year, with a fleet of fifteen ships ; when being 
 inveigled into an ambuscade by the natives, he was attacked by them in 
 great numbers, his retreat to his ships cut off, and himself killed in the 
 action. — Hist. Ireland, Vol. II. p. 165. 
 
'^ 
 
 SECOND PERIOD. 
 
 :1 
 
 We have thus seen how the desire to tell of old times 
 arose and was i)ropagated amongst the inhabitants of the 
 new colony. Hut the remembrance and relation of indivi- 
 dual exploits, and the transmission of these records from one 
 generation to the other, would, perhaps, have never led to the 
 Icelanders becoming historians, had not such habits been 
 united with a strong feeling for poetry, a desire for fame, 
 and that peculiar state of society, which had been formed 
 amongst them. 
 
 The island had been colonized in peace; each enter- 
 prising navigator, as he touched its shore, took possession 
 of a tract of land, without impediment, and became the 
 independent proprietor of his small estate ; but now these 
 settlements approached each other ; interests began to clash ; 
 individual demeanour to become developed. — The social 
 bonds had been too loosely att-iched, to keep within due 
 limits the wild self will of so many impetuous Northmen. 
 True, their ancient Norwegian customs had been sponta- 
 neously resumed on their arrival, and fifty years later (A. D. 
 928), the laws of Ulfliot had given a form and consistency 
 to the moral code ; but these checks had little weight 
 when individual power or interest were enabled to oppose 
 them. Personal strength was necessary for personal safety ; 
 and the many narratives which have been preserved, de- 
 tailing the untimely fate of the most respectable families, 
 in the course of the first two centuries, exhibit a long list of 
 feuds, and deeds of violence, unche jked by the laws, or the 
 judicial authority of the land. 
 
 U 
 
XVI 
 
 INTIloni'f'TION. 
 
 Those civil broils wore not, liowcvor, in gonoral, of a very 
 sanguinary character, and often consisted of indivichml en- 
 counters, where courage and })resence of mind were equally 
 exhibited on both sides, and the contest was obstinate : in a 
 more general fray, the his was looked upon as considerable, 
 if ten men fell. 
 
 The time of feud was also a time of re-union : the object 
 of the individual was spread abroad ; discussion was created, 
 sympathy was awakened ; the relative merits of the con- 
 tending parties became the theme of conversation, and the 
 Skaids were stimulated to the com})osition of new speci- 
 mens of their inspiring art. On particular occasions they 
 improvised. Hate as well as love formed the theme of 
 these effusions, and the same means were employed to give 
 a graceful form to satire, in which style of composition 
 these antient poets were remarkably successful : in fact, so 
 cutting were these sallies, and of so much weight among a 
 people peculiarly under the influence of public opinion, 
 that they often became the causes of bloodshed, and were 
 looked upon as a ground of complaint before the Courts.* 
 For the most part, however, the songs were of an historical 
 character ; sometimes the Skald sang of his own exploits, 
 sometimes of those of his friends, who, upon such occasions, 
 were accustomed to present him with costly gifts : After 
 the Norwegian Skald Eyvind Skialdespilder had sung a 
 Drapa, or ode in praise of the Icelanders, every peasant in 
 the island contributed three pieces of silver, which were 
 
 * " As an instance of the effect produced by these satirical songs, it is 
 related that Harold Blaatand, King of Denniarl<, was so incensed at some 
 severe lines, wliicli the Icelanders had made upon him, for seizing one of 
 tlieir ships, that he sent a fleet to ravage the island, wliich occurrence led 
 them to make a law, subjecting any one to capital punishment, who should 
 indulge in satire against the Sovereigns of Norway, Sweden, and Denmark !" 
 — Mallet's Northern Antiquities, up. Iceland, Greenland, &c. — Ed. Cab. 
 Lib. XXVIII. p. 153. 
 
 i 
 
INTHOnUCTION, 
 
 XV n 
 
 applied to tho purchase of a clasp or ornament for a mantel, 
 that weighed 50 marks, and this they sent to tho bard, as 
 an acknowledgement of his poetic powers. 
 
 The climate and mode of living contributed to keep alive 
 this taste for poetry, which tho Icelanders had inherited 
 from their Norwegian ancestors. Agriculture was almost 
 entirely confined to the care of pasture and meadow land ; 
 fishing could only be carried on at certain seasons, and the 
 feeding of cattle required little attention. Their hostile 
 proceedings were, also, soon concluded ; but was a reprisal 
 apprehended, it became necessary for tho chief to retain 
 his followers at the farm, until a reconciliation was brought 
 about, and these assembling in tho common room, during 
 the long winter evenings, contributed to increase tho social 
 union, and reciprocal communication of past events. 
 Public amusements, also, brought the people frequently 
 together : besides the great feasts, which lasted from eight 
 to fourteen days, sports and games, such as bowis ui 
 wrestling, were carried on in the several districts for many 
 weeks in succession ; and still more attractive was the 
 Heste-thing, where horses were excited against each other, 
 to the great amusement of both old and young. To these 
 reunions must be added those caused by attendance at the 
 different courts, and particularly at the Althing* or general 
 Assizes, where all the first men of the island met annually, 
 with great pomp and parade. It was looked upon as a 
 disgrace to be absent from this meeting, which was held in 
 the open air on the banks of tho Thingvalla Vatn, the 
 largest lake in Iceland, a natural hill or mount forming the 
 court. 
 
 * Ting or Thing signifies in tlic old Scandinavian tongue, to speak, and 
 hence a popular assembly, or court of justice. Tho national assembly of 
 Norway still retains the name of Stor-thing, or great meeting, and is divided 
 into two chambers called the Lag-thing, and Odela- thing. 
 
 C 
 
XVlll 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 " t'iist by the burrow 
 
 Round whose f^rcen siilco, shield touchhiR slilehl, 
 And sword in band, tlie gallant Northmen stood 
 Rings in each other circling, till they reached 
 Up to the summit."* 
 
 To figure here with a display and retinue that drew upon 
 him the eyes of all beholders, was the great ambition of the 
 Chief, whose power and influence depended much upon 
 the number of friends and foil )wers he could produce on 
 such occasions. These were again determined by the 
 degree of support and assistance, which they could calculate 
 on obtaining from him, in the hour of need ; and hence the 
 anxiety on the part of the Icelandic yeoman, to be fully 
 acquainted with the character and circumstances of his 
 chief, to which cause may be more immediately attributed, 
 the interest which he took in all new Sajias or narratives of 
 remarkable individuals. 
 
 In the Laxdffila Saga,f it is related that, after a brave 
 Icelander, named Bolle Bolleson, had gallantly defeated an 
 assailant, by whom he had been attacked, iii the course of 
 a journey through the island, his exploit became the sub- 
 ject of a new Saga, which quickly spread over the district, 
 and added considerably to his reputation. In Gisle Sur- 
 sens Saga, a stranger is introduced, saying to his neigh- 
 bours at the court — " Shew me the men of great deeds, 
 those from whom the Sagas proceed." 
 
 The greater number of the remaining Sagas, bear what 
 
 * uppii ilttehogen, 
 
 Och kring dess grijna sidor, skiild vld bkiild, 
 
 Och sviird i handen, stodo Nordcns niiin, 
 
 Den ena riiigen itiniin fir den andra. 
 
 Upp cmot toppcn !''— Frithiof'a Sagii, VIII. p. ,V), 
 
 t The annals of a particular family, as the Eyrbiggia Saga is of a particular 
 district in Iceland. Tlie former has been translated into Latin by Mr. Repp, 
 and Sir Walter Scott has given a brief account of the other. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 XIX 
 
 may be called a political stamp ; they contain a detail of 
 the most important disputes bc-Lween individual families, 
 or districts, painted in tho most minute manner, and fol- 
 lowed by a general description of the most important per- 
 sonages in the narrative. How iT^uch weight was attached 
 to these personal descriptions is shewn by the nature of the 
 Icelandic language, which is richer than any other Euro- 
 pean tongue in words, that express those various qualities 
 and shades of character which are of the most importance in 
 society. The exterior of the chief person in the Saga 
 is also painted with equal accuracy, especially his fea- 
 tures, in which the richness of the language is also ob- 
 servable; and even the particulars of the dress are not 
 omitted. This was of importance in a country where it was 
 not always easy to determine, whether tho stranger who 
 made his appearance was friend or foe, and a remarkable 
 instance is mentioned in the Laxdaila Saga of a chief named 
 Helge Hardbeinsen identifying some stranger knights, whom 
 he had never seen, solely from the accurate desci-iption of 
 their personal appearance, which was brought to him by the 
 messenger, who communicated the intelligence of their 
 approach. 
 
 The same characteristics are imprinted on the Sagas. 
 The peculiarities of the narrator never appear ; it is as if 
 one only heard the simple echo of an old tradition ; no in- 
 troductory remarks are made, but the history begins at 
 once abruptly with: — "There was a man called so and so, 
 son of so and so," &c. : no judgment is pronounced upon the 
 transaction, but it is merely added that this deed increased 
 the hero's reputation, or that was considered bad. In 
 most Sagas the dialogistic form prevails, particularly in 
 those of more antient date, for this form was natural to the 
 people, who insensibly threw their narratives into dialogue, 
 and thus they acquired a more poetical colouring ; for not oi ily 
 were the conversations related which had actually taken 
 
 c 2 
 
 
 
XX 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 IT 
 
 place, but also, those which, from the nature of the subject, 
 it might have been concluded had been held ; aiid the ge- 
 neral mode of expression being simple, and nearly uniform, 
 and the character being best developed in this definite form, 
 those imaginary conversations were, for the most part, not 
 inconsistent with truth. 
 
 The talent for narrating was naturally generated by the 
 desire of hearing these narratives. Those Skalds who 
 remembered the old Sagas, and whose imagination was 
 lively, were best enabled to adopt the dramatic form, and 
 now, independent of their local or political interest, the nar- 
 ratives became interesting on their own account. Scarce 
 a century after the colonization of the country, we find that 
 the people took great pleasure in this amusement. "Is no 
 one come," asks Thorvard, at a meeting of the people 
 mentioned in Viga Glums Saga, " who can amuse us with 
 a new story ?" They answered him : " There is always 
 sport and amusement when thou art present." Ho replied : 
 " I can think of nothing better than Glum's songs," upon 
 which he sung one of those which he had learned. In the 
 Sturlunga Saga, a certain priest, named Ingemund, is 
 mentioned as a man rich in knowledge, who told good 
 stories, afforded nmch amusement, and indited good songs, 
 for which he obtained payment abroad. Such a narrator 
 was called a Sagaman. 
 
 Thus did oral tradition, beginning with the mythic, pro- 
 ceed thence to the historical, and end witii the fabulous. We 
 have now come to the period when books were written and 
 collected in the island ; but in order to trace the cause of 
 that peculiar fondness for their own history, which led the 
 Icelanders, not only to become the historians of Iceland, 
 but of the whole North, it is necessary to go back to the 
 earlier condition of the couni,ry and the people. 
 
 It may at first sight appeav that Uie local portion of this 
 remote island would be alone sufficient to prevent the in- 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 XXI 
 
 i 
 
 in- 
 
 habitants from taking any interest in the affairs of other 
 countries ; but the communication witli Norway continued ; 
 the migration from thence lasted for ma* ly generations, even 
 after the island was colonized, and many merchant ships 
 passed annually between Iceland and the parent state.* 
 They brought with them meal, building timber, leather, fine 
 cloth, and tapestry, taking in exchange silver, skins, coarse 
 cloth (Vadmel), and other kinds of woollens, as well as 
 dried fish. 
 
 As soon as it was known that a merchant had brought a 
 cargo to the Icelandic coast, the chief of the temple, and in 
 later times, the governor of the province, rode down imme- 
 diately to the ship, and asked for news ; he then fixed the 
 price at which the various goods were to be sold to the 
 people of the district, chose what he wanted for himself, 
 and invited the captain of the vessel to stop at his house for 
 the winter. The visitor was now looked upon as one of the 
 family, he entered into their amusements, and disputes, 
 entertained them at Yule with his stories, and presented 
 his host, at parting, with a piece of English tapestry, or 
 some other costly gift, in return for the hospitality which he 
 had received. Piratical expeditions had at this time, given 
 place to trading voyages, and the merchant, or ship's captain 
 was often a person of good family ; sometimes attached to 
 the Norwegian Court, and hence well acquainted with all 
 that was passing there. How much this intercourse tended 
 to the increase of historical material is shewn by an old MS. 
 
 * Although no mention is made by Bishop Miillcr of any communicution 
 between Iceland and Ireland at tliis period, it seems yet highly probable that 
 such intercourse did cxi?t, as also between Iceland aid the British isles. 
 Mr. Moore, notwithstandini^ an evident dispositiou to depreciate the value 
 of Icelandic authorities, admits as a *^ known fact," founded on these very 
 documents, the early settlement of the Iri!>h in Iceland, " to which island," 
 he says, " inaccessible us it miglit seem to liavc been to the rude navigation 
 of those days, it is certain that a number of Irish missionaries of the seventh 
 and eighth centuries contrived to find their way." — History of Ireland, Vol. 
 H. p. 3. 
 
h 
 
 XXll 
 
 INTUODUCTION. 
 
 \' ! 
 
 f. I 
 
 I 
 
 of St. Olafs Saga, wherein is stated that: — "In the time of 
 Harald Haarfager, there was much sailing from Norway to 
 Iceland ; every summer was news communicated between 
 the two countries, and this was afterwards remembered, and 
 became the subject of narratives." 
 
 The Icelanders not only received intelligence from Nor- 
 way, but brought it away themselves. They were led to un- 
 dertake these voyages as well from the desire to see their 
 relations, and claim inheritances, as for the purpose of pro- 
 curing more valuable building timber than the merchant 
 could bring them. The '^•hief considered that his reputation 
 depended much upon the number of persons he could enter- 
 tain, and for this purpose a spacious hall was required. 
 This formed a separate building, in the midst of which the 
 cheerful wood fire bla/ed upwards to an aperture in the 
 roof, unchecked by ceilings or partition walls: — 
 
 The (Irinliing hall, ii separate house, was built 
 Of lieart of fir ; not twice three huudrcd men 
 C'oulil HU that liall, when gather'd there at Yule. 
 
 The cliecrfiil faggot on the straw strewn floor 
 Unceasing blazed, gladdening its stony hearth, 
 While downwards through the dense smoke shot the stars, 
 Those heavenly friends, upon the guests below.* 
 
 The adventurous stripling, on the other hand, sailed to 
 Norway for the purpose of there engaging in a sea-roving 
 expedition, or seeking advancement amongst his influential 
 kinsmen ; and thus many earned renown at the courts of 
 the Norwegian kings, or entered into mercantile pursuits in 
 
 * '■ Uryckesalen, ett hus tor sig sjelf, var timrad af kiirufur 
 Ei femhundradc miin (till tio tolftcpii hundrat) 
 
 Fyllde den rymliga sal, niir de samlats att dricka om Julen." 
 
 »■»**•♦ 
 
 " Alidt iii'i golfvet (mcd halm var dct striult) brann li'tgan hcstiindigt, 
 (iladt pii sin muradc hiill ; och igcnom det hiftiga rokf i'lng 
 iJlickadc stjernorna in, de himmclska viinncr, i salen." 
 
 Fritiiiofs Saga, III. p. 18, I'J. 
 
 ■i 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 XXlll 
 
 order to obUvin wealth, or experience and consideration. 
 For the old Northern maxim of " a fool is the home-bred 
 child,"* also held good in Iceland, and therefore do we 
 find Bolle BoUesen saying to his father-in-law Snorro Gode, 
 who wished to dissuade him from going abroad : " Little 
 do I think he knows, who knows no more than Iceland." 
 Trading was often undertaken by young men solely as the 
 means of acquiring knowledge, which being accomplished, 
 the pursuit was given up. 
 
 After the lapse of a few centuries, this passion for travel- 
 ling was increased by a new cause, which had more imme- 
 diate influence upon the collection of historical materials. 
 The Skalds passed over to England, the Orkneys, and the 
 Norwegian courts, seeking rewards and reputation. They 
 neither required the aid of friends or money for such ex- 
 peditions, but boldly entering the drinking hall of the 
 kings, craved permission to sing a drapa in praise of the 
 monarch, which was always granted, and the bard received 
 handsome presents, such as weapons, clothes, gold rings, 
 together with an honourable reception at the court, in re- 
 turn for his exertions. 
 
 The Icelandic Skalds, favoured by the independent posi- 
 tion of their country, and a superior knowledge of the 
 Scandinavian mythology, acquired a marked pre-eminence 
 over their competitors in other parts of the North. The 
 praises of a stranger bard, from a free country, were more 
 flattering to a king or chieftain than the more servile adu- 
 lation of his own laureate ; and it was but reasonable, as 
 well as politic, to reward him well who had come from so 
 great a distance, and who, travelling from land to land, 
 could sound the king's praise, and tell of the royal bounty. 
 I'he odes thus sung, were all of an historical character ; and 
 it was, therefore, necessary for the Skald to be well ac- 
 (piainted with the deeds of the monarch and his ancestors. 
 * " Ilciinskr cr hcimalit barn." 
 
 /^.^! 
 
 :|l 
 
 ' ■« 
 
XXIV 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 i^l 
 
 It was also required of him that he should be able to repeat 
 the national ballads ; and the extraordinary power of the 
 Skalds in this particular, is shewn in the saga of the blind 
 Skald Stuf, who, one evening, sung sixty songs before 
 Harald Haardraade, and could repeat four times as many 
 longer poems ! 
 
 13ut if a knowledge of history was of importance to the 
 Skald, it was absolutely indispensable to the Sagaman. A 
 remarkable anecdote of one of these narrators, is contained in 
 the Saga of Thorstein Frode, preserved in the Arne-Mag- 
 najan collection of Icelandic MSS. :* a certain Sagaman, 
 called Thorstein, repaired to King Harald, to Norway. The 
 king asked him " whether he knew anything that would 
 amuse." He replied, that he knew a few sagas. "I will re- 
 ceive thee," said the king, " and thou shult entertain whoever 
 requires it of thee." Thorstein became favoured by the 
 courtiers, and obtained clothes from them : the king also gave 
 him a good sword. 
 
 • Arniis Magmigsen, a Icnriicd Icelander and ardent patriot, devoted his 
 time, talents, and fortune to the national literature of his country. Filling 
 the situation of Professor of Northern Antiquaries at the University of 
 Copenhagen, in the beginning of the 18th century, he amassed the largest 
 collection of books and manuscripts that has, perhaps, ever been brought 
 together by one individual. Amongst those arc the rarest and most ancient 
 vellum MSS. in the old northern tongue, relating to the history, laws, man- 
 ners, and customs of the ancient Scandinavians. The great fire of Copen- 
 hagen, in 1728, robbed the devoted antiquary of many of these often dearly- 
 purchiised treasures ; but he recommenced his labours witli undiminished zeal, 
 and although then in his Oiith year, was enabled to leave to his country, at 
 his death (A.D. 1730), nearly 2000 Icelandic MSS., together with a fund of 
 10,000 rix dollars for their publication. Little progress was made towards 
 carrying the testator's wishes into cft'ect until a commission, called the 
 Arne-Magnrean commission, was instituted l)y the King of Denmark, in 
 1772, soon after which the publication commenced, and all the most impor- 
 tant MSS. have been given to the public by this society. The collection is 
 called the Arnc-Magna^an collection, and is preserved in the University 
 Library of Copenhagen.} See liiographiske Eftcrrctningor oni Arnc-Mng- 
 nussen, af E. C. Werhiuf ap. Nord. Tid. f. Oldk. 1 li. 1 II. Kjbbcnhavn, 
 1835. 
 
 i 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 XXV 
 
 Towards Yule* he became sorrowful ; the king guessed 
 the cause, namely, that his Sagas were at an end, and that he 
 had nothing for Yule. He answered, that so it was ; he had 
 one remaining, and that he durst not tell, for it was about the 
 king's journeys. The king said that he should begin with 
 that the first day of Yule, and he (the king) would take care 
 that it should last to the end of the festival. The thirteenth 
 day, Thorstein's Saga came to an end, and now he looked 
 anxiously for the judgment of the king, who said, smiling: 
 " It is not the worse told because thou hast a talent there- 
 for, but where didst thou get it ?" Thorstein answered : 
 " It is my custom to repair every summer to the Althing 
 in our land, and there I learn the sagas which Haldor 
 Snorreson relates." The king said: " then it is no wonder 
 thou knowest them so well," and upon this, gave him a good 
 ship load ; and now Thorstein passed often between Norway 
 and Iceland. 
 
 1 o comprehend how such a narrative could have lasted 
 thirteen days, we must presume that the dialogistic form 
 was freely used, and that the story was interrupted and 
 decorated with verses and poetical allusions to a consider- 
 able extent. The anecdote also shews that while Sagamen 
 
 * Yule was apagan festival, celebrated in honour of Thor, at the begin- 
 ning of February, when the Northmen's year commenced, and they offered 
 sacrifices for peace and fruitful seasons to this deity, who presided over the 
 air, launched the thunder, and guarded mankind from giants and genii : it 
 lasted 14 days. Etymologists differ as to tlie derivation of the name, but 
 tlio most probable seems to be the supposition that it was so called from 
 Joiner, one of the many names for Odin, the father of Thor. After the in- 
 troduction of Cliristianity, the anniversary of Yule was transferred to Christ- 
 mas, which is still culled by that name throughout Scandinavia. The word 
 YuIc is also used in many parts of Scotland to denote the same festive 
 period, shewing thejearly connection of the Caledonians with their more 
 northern neighbours, and tending to confirm the conjecture of Tacitus, as 
 well as the accounts of ancient English chroniclers, that the Picts were of 
 northern descent, or ns Moore expressively says, " from the same hive of 
 northern adventurers, who were then pouring forth their predatory swarms 
 over Europe."— Hist. Ireland, vol. i. p. 00. 
 
 :'%% 
 
\X\ I 
 
 INTItOOIMilON. 
 
 wiMV o\' IntiM- origin than Skalds, llu»y also htotxl in lowri- 
 I'slunation : llir Skahl was jMirolli'il aiuim^st llic court it'rs; 
 tlu> Sn^auian was only looked upon as an anuisiii^ visitor. 
 
 In llu' llth ivnluiy, tlu' li'i'lai\»lois coast'd to i'n<j;ajj;o in 
 piratical oxpoditions ; tlio clnol's, whoso powor and riches 
 had increased, looked with eonlenjpt on trailing voyages; 
 but on the «)lher hand, it was often a result of their feuds, 
 that «>ne of the parties was obliired t(» leave the country for 
 a few years. So)netinies also they eni^aged in a voluntary 
 pilyriniaire to Honn*. Such a; expeilition went lirst to 
 Denmark, where it was always well received hy the Danish 
 kings, and more particularly in the I;Uh centin-y, we (ind 
 the Icelandic chiefs drawing forth expressions of respect, and 
 esteeuA at the court of N'ahlemar II. 
 
 All these travellers were sure to rctiu'n home after a few 
 years, and establish themselves in Iceland, nor could the 
 most llattering reception at foreign courts abate their iidie- 
 rent love of country. Thus King llarald (u»ruisen could not 
 prevail upon (uutuar of lllitlareude to remain at his court, 
 although he held out the temptations of a wife and fortune; 
 and henc says llakon to Finboge Haunne, "That is just 
 the way with you Icelanders ! the nunnent you are valued 
 and favoureil by princes, you want to get away." When 
 the travelled man came home, he was received with the 
 greatest attention : he was instantly sought out at the Al- 
 thing, ami now he nuist make a public statement of his 
 travels and adventures. The curiosity of Icelanders is 
 proverbial, and seems to be in proportion to their distance 
 from the continent. If a ship arrived, the people instantly 
 ran down to the shore to ask for new s, unless the chief of the 
 district (Herredsforstanderen) had ruled that he should be 
 the first. Thorstein Ingemundson, a hospitable man, who 
 lived in the 10th century, looked upon it as the duty of 
 every stranger to visit him first : and he was once highly 
 exasperated with some strangers, who neglected this cour- 
 
 .) 
 
 ■1 
 
iNiiionurTioN. 
 
 XXV 
 
 |,(«sy. Wlu'ii Kiiiiliin, nu'iilioncd in llir liiHlory ol' Olfif 
 'IVyf^'j^vcson, Inwl icIiinu'M fnnn Norway, mid vvuh ^niovinj,' 
 over Ww inCidrlily of liis lM'li(»tluul, liis rather was iiiohI. dis- 
 ircsscd at llic \m>\)Ui l.liiis loHiiif,' \\\v iHinofil. ol" Iiih sloruis; 
 and wlu'ii \w was aiY(frwar<lH niarnc*!, and u spUMnlid wcd- 
 dinj^' look plan' on tlio island, nothing' aiinised tlic! ^Mu^sfs 
 nioro than Iho l)ridef,'ro()ni'H narralivos of Iiis sdrviccfs undor 
 Iho ^'reat Kin},' Ohd" 'IVy^'^'veson. Ilowovcr (Uisirous tJu; 
 n»-w coTncr nii^dit ho lo ii^arn what had happonod (hiring' 
 his absiMU'c from home, ho was always first ol)li};ed to tell 
 his connlrymen the news from ahroad. A remarkalde iilua- 
 tration of this is f^'iven in the life of Jiishop Magnus, who 
 returned from t^axony by Norway (A.D. 1 1:J5), just as the 
 people were assendded at the Althinj,', and were loudly 
 contending,' upon a nuitter, res|)ectin{^ which no unanimity 
 c(mld he obtained. A nu!sseng<!r suddenly ap )ears among 
 the crowd, and states that tlu^ Bishop is ridin.,' up. Upon 
 this they all become so pleased that they inst uilly leave the 
 court, and the Bishop is obliged to parade on a height near 
 the church, and tell all the peoplt^ what hud hapi)ened in 
 Norway whilst he was abroad ! 
 
 Such a narrative, told by a person of veracity, went from 
 mouth to nu)uth, under tlio name of the first narrator, 
 which was looked upon as a security for the truth of the 
 
 
 Satra. 
 
Til 111 J) PERIOD. 
 
 f I 
 
 It has thus been shown how tho niiiterials for history had 
 boon c()llo(;to{l in Ici'land, and how those niatorials wore 
 moulded Into tho form of narrative by oral tradition : it 
 now ronialns to be scon how tho traditions bocanic 
 tho subjocts of written doeunients, and historical literature 
 assumed a definite and permanent fonn. 
 
 Snorro Sturleson says in the preface to the Iloim- 
 skringla, that Are Vrode (b. 10G7, d. 1148) was tho first 
 who committed to writing, in tho northern tongue, his- 
 torical narrations botii of the present and tho past. Soon 
 afterwards Svvmund Frode wrote of the Norwegian kings. 
 Both those authors finished their works at a kite period 
 of life, and after the year ll'JO : licnce it has been in- 
 ferred tiiat no liistory was written in Iceland before the 
 time of Are Frode, and consequently that such historical 
 writing was the fruit of a taste for literature generated by 
 the introduction of Christianity. 
 
 This important event occurred in the year 1000. New 
 ideas and new writings were now, doubtless, introduced, 
 but a considerable time must have elapsed before these 
 civilizing effects became general. Christianity was not 
 propagated in Iceland by force, but was the result of the 
 example of the mother country, the adhesion of individual 
 chiefs to the new religion, and the indifference of many to 
 the old. No violent persecution was awakened against 
 the followers of the old idolatry, nor was the influence of 
 the new religion upon morals and customs very visible at 
 first. Sixteen years had elapsed from the introduction 
 of Christianity, before an injunction from Olaf the Saint, 
 forbad the Icelanders to expose their children, and eat 
 
INTUODIK.'TION. 
 
 XXIX 
 
 horsc-flosli. Tl 10 first, IJlsltop (IhI**!!") was cojisccratcil in 
 105(5, but tlu5 itilliUMioi! of tlu; prui.stly character (1(>[umi(K!(J, 
 liku that of the Ilof^odo in former times, on his personal 
 (jiialitics, and the power of his kinsmen. Tlio oli^'archy 
 chocked the growth and influenco of the hierarcliy, J^vcn 
 in the bo'^innin^ of the lOth century, interdicts wcm'o little 
 attended to, and wo find tho Archbishop of Trondhjem 
 so late as A.D. 121.*), oblij^ed to shew great indulgence to 
 the chiefs, who had cruelly maltreated Hishop Judmund 
 Aresen. With Christian worship came also frankincense, 
 clerical robes, bells and books. Previous to this, the Ice- 
 landers were only acquainted with Runes, Runic stones, 
 and Staves, and such small articles, upon which single 
 words or sentences were inscribed. Individuals may, 
 doubtless, have mot with books, u[)on or near the island, 
 just as Irish books were found there by tho first settlors,* 
 but so long as Roman letters and tho language in which 
 they wore written wore unknown, such books could only 
 have been looked upon as foreign novelties. Now tho 
 priests brought Latin breviaries, and the now alphabet 
 could not bo found very difficult after the use of Runes. 
 Fifty years after the introduction of Christianity, Bishop 
 Isleif established the first school, which was soon followed 
 by many others. Tho previous state of society had 
 awakened a greater taste for reading and knowledge in 
 Iceland, than in tho rest of tho North, and the trancjuil 
 habits of the people being favourable to tho cultivation of 
 letters, it was not long before many of them applied them- 
 selves ardently to literature. Tho Kristni Saga relates 
 that towards the end of the 11th century, there were many 
 chiefs so learned that they might have been priests, and 
 many were actually appointed to the sacred office. In 
 the beginning of the 12th century, Ovid's Epistles and 
 Amoves were read in the schools, and in the course of the 
 * See Minor Narratives, Part III. 
 
 
 M 
 
XXX 
 
 INTHODITfTION. 
 
 <■ i 
 
 "i 
 
 samo century, wo find mention niiule of many who pos- 
 sessed coUoctions of books. 
 
 For some time reading and literature were closely con- 
 nected with the now religion. A knowledge of Latin 
 letters was acquired in order to ;iing the I'salter, to which, 
 without well understanding it, some magical influence was 
 ascribed,* and the young priest applied himself to Latin, 
 in ordf?r that he might becomingly celebrate the Mass. 
 For records of daily life, the Icelander needed not the 
 foreign character; his Runes afforded him a readier 
 medium, and their use was continued for a long period. 
 On the other hand an acquaintance with the Latin 
 language became of the greatest importance to his whole 
 being ; for thus an inexhaustible source of knowledge hatl 
 been opened to him, and the travelling Icelander could 
 now, in foreign schools, become dowed with all the 
 learning of the age, and by means atin books, transfer 
 
 this learning to his own country. Of these, the historical 
 were the most congenial to his taste and habits, and the 
 annalistic form was best suitod to retain the fruits of his 
 reading : hence came Icelanders to copy, and afterwards 
 to compile annals embracing long periods of time, and hence 
 to treat Northern history in the same simple manner. 
 
 But peculiar difficulties presented themselves to the 
 correct arrangement of these records. Much as had been 
 related in Iceland of the events of the past, their chrono- 
 logical order was not preserved, and the only guide to this 
 indispensable element of history, were the long genealogical 
 details of the individuals whose actions wore recorded. To 
 ascribe these different events to particular years, and 
 arrange them in chronological order, required nmch time, 
 trouble and investigation, yet under all these difficulties a 
 
 • How many modern riuistians ropeut the Psulmodic asponsos with 
 kindred ignorance unU superijtitioii ! 
 
INTIlODL'CrioN. 
 
 XXXl 
 
 book was coinplotod, which must excite the surprise and 
 admiration of all the modern literati. 
 
 'I'liis hook was written by Are Frode, under the title of 
 Book of the Icelanders (Islendingabok) and contained a 
 dry and condensed, but at the same time, well arranged 
 and comprehensive view of the most important events in 
 the history of the country. It has often been regretted that a 
 larger work by the same author has been lost. The former, with 
 good reason, was highly prized, for it laid the foundation of 
 all nor^l em history, determining many important epochs, 
 and shewing their connexion and succession with minor 
 events. Bu* Snorro's expression about Are Frode has been 
 misunderstood, when he is made to say that Are was the 
 first Icelander, who wrote anything historical. Snorro says 
 that Are was the first Icelander, who was a histor'utn, but by 
 this he could not mean to say that no one had ever put a 
 Saga upon paper before Are Frode ; for this, after Icelanders 
 had been educated in schools, could not be well maintained. 
 
 The preceding shows that a number of narratives, thrown 
 into an agreeable fonn, were current throughout Iceland, 
 and that these, favoured by a free constitution, were in- 
 creased by all the remarkable events that took place either 
 in the island, or the neighbouring kingdoms. The transition 
 to written documents was now easy and natural : he who 
 was accustomed to read and write, and who, perhaps, relied 
 less upon his memory than others, was readily led to take 
 down in writing that which he was desirous to retain, and 
 thus he constructed a Saga. But the writer of such a Saga 
 would never think of appending his name to it, and thereby 
 seeking the honours of authorship, for he merely wrote 
 down what he had heard others say, and exactly as he had 
 heard it. Hence are the greater number of Icelandic 
 Sagas anonymous ; the date must be determined by the 
 contents, and it is very possible that many of these narra- 
 tives, such as Vigastyrs and Heidarviga Saga were written 
 
 , 1 
 
 i: 
 
 t 
 
4' « 
 
 xKxn 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 m 
 
 1 I 
 
 Ml 
 
 earlier than the Scheda of Are Frode . The other principal 
 Icelandic historian was Are's uicnd, Sitmund, also sur- 
 named Frode, or the learned, whose work on the Norwegian 
 kings, from Harald Haarfager to Magnus the Good, is now 
 lost: it is quoted less frequently than that of Are, the 
 most important events having, probably, been already deter- 
 mined by him. 
 
 The peculiar nature of the settlement, and the circuni- 
 stances under which it had been formed, directed the 
 attention of the Icelandic historians of the 12th century, 
 more particularly to details connected with the colonization 
 of the island ; the order in which families had become es- 
 tablished, their genealogy, territory, how they were allied, 
 &c. ; and the fruit of these enquiries was the celebrated 
 Landnamabok. Next to these local matters, came the 
 reigns of the two Olafs, of whose achievements many nai'- 
 ratives were in circulation, and whose zeal in the propaga- 
 tion of Christianity caused them to be surrounded with a 
 sacred halo. The life of Olaf Tryggveson was written in 
 Latin by two monks, named Gunlaug and Odd, who gave 
 as authorities the oral relations of men from the middle of 
 the same century, at the end of which they wrote ;* their 
 labour consisted in little more than translating into Latin, 
 and accompanying with a few remarks, that which had been 
 communicated to them by others, for both these notices of 
 Olafs life shew that neither of the authors related anything 
 on his own personal knowledge About the same period a 
 diffuse compilation was made, recording the achievements 
 of St. Olaf during his life, and his miracles after his death ; 
 this was afterwards employed by Snorro, and his contempo- 
 rary Styrmer, but the nature of both these works renders it 
 j)robable that many j)arts had been already written in de- 
 tached narratives before the whole was collected. 
 
 These lives of the (.)lafs are, in all probability, the earliest 
 
 * The I'Jlh coiiturv. 
 
INTROUUCTION. 
 
 XXXIU 
 
 regularly arranged written records of a narrative which had 
 been orally related, and they form a connecting link be- 
 tween historical writing and tradition. I'he achievements 
 of Harald Haarfager, also, which arc mentioned in so many 
 narratives of the Icelandic colonists, as having been sung by 
 so many Skalds, whose songs were remembered, and which, 
 besides, contained events of such great general importance 
 to the Icelanders, — were no doubt committed to writing in 
 the course of the 12th century. 
 
 From such lives of individual kings, the Sagas of the 
 Kings of Norway could easily be compiled, for just as the 
 isolated deeds of an Icelander were put together to form the 
 histoiy of his life, and thereto were added the achievements 
 of his forefathers and children, so by uniting the lives of 
 Harald Haarfager and the two Olafs, a Saga of Norwegian 
 Kings was already forrr.ed. But he who collected or trans- 
 cribed such a history in the I'itli century, never thought of 
 writing a book, still less of being looked upon as an author ; 
 he wrote either because he wished to note down certain 
 events, for his own satisfaction, or in order to have a good 
 collection of entertaining narratives to relate to his friends. 
 The first attempts were naturally imperfect and unequal, 
 for *he materials were casually collected, and the most dis- 
 propo tionate brevity and prolixity is to be observed amongst 
 them ; but these became better after a time, and only the 
 most deserving were eventually transcribed. 
 
 Next to the Olafs, Harald llaardraade was the Norwe- 
 gian King who furnished the richest materials to the histo- 
 rian, and already during his life time, and with his cogni- 
 zance, a romantic complimentary Saga, of his residence at 
 Constantinople, founded upon Haldor Snorroson's prolix 
 narrative, was in circulation. There was another class of 
 Saga which must have led the admirers of the bardic art to 
 collect them into a united form ; namely, the celebrated 
 mythic Sagas of the Volsunger and Giukunger, whose deeds 
 
 D 
 
 
\XX1V 
 
 iN'nu)i>r('Ti()N. 
 
 ^1 . i 
 
 U I 
 
 r«)rMU'(l tho tluMiic ol" the oldt'st soul's ol' flio SKjilds, and 
 iVom wluMuv so iiiiinv ]>(U'ti('al images aiv lakoii. No Icc- 
 landm- who t'ithor vtMituroil to iiulito a stro|)lu> hiinsidl', or 
 mado anv pivtiMisions to pootic tasto, could bo ignorant ol" 
 tluvso. Tho \'olsunga Saga is supposed to have been 
 written either at the end of the [•Jth or bogluniug of the 
 }:M\\ eeutury. 
 
 Tliat the leelaiulers who tims, in tlie I'Jth eeutury, coui- 
 inltted to paper for their own infonuation, the aehievenuMits 
 of foreign iiingei, were not uuniiudful of the transactions of 
 their own island, nuvy be easily believed ; nor did they fail 
 to note down carefully the concerns of their own families 
 and the valorous deeds of their kinsuuMi aiul forefathers. 
 Hut of these narratives, there was scarcely one that could 
 be properly called a book, that is to say, a work published 
 for the information of others ; they coidd only be looked 
 upon as records for personal use, or cchos of the living 
 narrative and assistants to its propagation. 
 
 The first real writers of history that Iceland produced — 
 those, namely, who collected historical materials, which they 
 individually worked out with the view of coinnmnicatiug the 
 knowledge of remarkable events to their fellow men, v.ero 
 those who wrote the history of their own times. The first 
 of these was Erik Oddson, who, according to Snorro, wrote 
 from the testimony of eye-witnesses, and from what he 
 himself had learuetl from Harald Gille and his sous in the 
 middle of the 12th century. This book is used by Snorro, and 
 still more literally by the author of the MS. Morkinskinna. 
 Next to him comes Carl Johnson, who was Abbot of Thin- 
 gore Monastery in 11(51), and wrote the first part of the 
 history of King Sverre, under the personal inspection of the 
 monarch himself: the succeeding part was finished by 
 Styrmer, in the first half of the 13th century. These 
 authors followed exactly the historical stylo which had been 
 formed bv oral relation. The circumstance of King Sverro^ 
 
 
'1 
 
 FNTIIODIK riON. 
 
 XXXV 
 
 wlic cart^rully cmployiMl every iiieaiis of IciKliiijf publu; 
 opinion ill liis Jiivoiir, liiivin^r souf^lit to iiifliioiK.'e t,li(? Alilxit, 
 while writin^f liis history, proves tliiit already at that. tiiiK! 
 a fe(^Iiii<^ for Uterature had been awakened. 
 
 Thus in the I'Jth century, when the nif^ht of i^^norancu^ 
 and l)arharisni still huiif^ over the rest of Kuropt;, narratives 
 which had previously been transmitted by oral tradition, 
 were taken down with the pen, and the writin*]^ of books 
 was coimnenccil in Iceland. The following century was 
 the golden aLije of Icelandic historical litiu'ature, for in that 
 age lived Snorro Sturh^son.* Ilis mode of writing history 
 was to collect the Sagas that had been written before his 
 time, to strike out whatever displeased him, make abstracts 
 of what he considered too dilluse, and enliven the recital 
 by tlu! introduction of a few stro[)hes from the old Skalds. 
 He states nothing for which he has not good authority ; 
 ho rejects whatever was too trifling to be consistent with 
 the dignity of history, as well as the greater part of those 
 legends which several of the copyists have inserted in his 
 work : but, on the other hand, he does not pass by a single; 
 
 • Son of the wualtliy and powerful Chief Sturle I'hordson, and Lnginnii 
 or governor of leclund in 1213. '* His countrymen," says an olccincnt 
 writer, " love to compare him with the most celebrated of the Roman 
 orators, to whom both in cluiracter and fortune be bore a striking re- 
 Bcmblancc. Uoth were called to oiie highest offices in their native land by 
 the voice of their admiring countrymen — both amidst tlie cares and dis- 
 tractions of political life, soothed their labours by literature, and won iti< 
 brightest honors from their less busy contemporaries, — both lived at a time 
 when tlie bulwarks of freedom were crumbling into fragments around them, 
 — and both, taking an active share in tlic unnatural conflict, fell victims to 
 the success of their enemies. Like Cicero, too, Snorro was distinguished 
 for his powerful, fervid eloquence, and by his rank, wealth and talenf:s, was 
 entitled to the highest place in the state. But his character was sta'.ncd by 
 avarice and ambition, and he is accused of having often failed to perform 
 boldly what lie had prudently contrived." Iceland, (ireenland, &c. Ed. 
 Cab. Lib. x.\viii. pp. 135-G. 
 
 d2 
 
I ■. 
 
 XXXVl 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 V'l "i! 
 
 ; p! 
 
 1 1 
 
 f'' 
 
 w 
 
 illustrative feature, and has faithfully preserved the lively 
 character of the antient Saga. 
 
 Between 1264 and 1271, being some years after Sverres 
 Saga had been completed, Sturle Thordson wrote the 
 history of Hakon Hakonson, at the instigation of Magnus 
 Lagebaeter, and according to the materials which he had 
 collected at the Norwegian court. His work is therefore 
 to be looked upon as an independent performance, and 
 both as regards its comprehensiveness and historical 
 arrangement, must be classed amongst the best of the Ice- 
 landic historical works. 
 
 The Sagas which embrace that period of time, extending 
 from the death of Sverre to the birth of Hakon Hakonson, 
 are probably written later than Hakon Hakonson's Saga, 
 for as they just fill up the space between these two great 
 historical works, the want of this link would not clearly 
 appear, until the latter had been completed. The fragment 
 which remains of Magnus Lagebaiter's Saga, shews that it 
 was intended to continue the series of Royal Narratives, 
 but these could scarcely have been of much interest, as no 
 MSS. are extant. 
 
 A Jarls Saga was also compiled in the 13th century, 
 being a collection of antient Narratives relating to the 
 Jarls of the Orkneys, wnich were united and continued 
 under the name of the Orkneyinga Saga. The civil dis- 
 turbances in Iceland at this period, were described by 
 Sturle Thordson, and beside this many were employed in 
 writing Annals. 
 
 In the 16th century, although the decline of learning 
 had commenced, much literary activity was still visible in 
 Iceland ; but the independent compilation or composition 
 of history had ceased, and only a few Bishops Sagas were 
 still written. On the other hand co})ying was carried on 
 with great industry, older Sagas were transcribed, the 
 
 ■H 
 
INTKODUCTION. 
 
 XXXVll 
 
 Landnamabook completed, and the Kristnisaga, or de- 
 scription of the introduction of Christianity into the 
 country, was extracted from the older writings : the copious 
 IN'SS. called Flatobogcn,* still shews with what industry 
 in lividual ecclesiastics collected and transcribed the older 
 historical Sagas, towards the end of this century. 
 
 ■'II 
 
 LAST PERIOD. 
 
 We have now seen how Icelandic historical literature, 
 after having blossomed and borne good fruit, began at last 
 to wither and decay; artd the cause of its origin and bloom, 
 leads us also to the cause of its decline and extinction. 
 The old state of society had called forth individual ac- 
 tion and heroic deeds, and awakened a feeling for their 
 representation ; but now the power of the petty chief over 
 his Thingmen had become diminished, and the equilibrium 
 had been removed from amongst the chieftains themselves. 
 Already in the beginning of the 11th century had Gudmund 
 the Powerful one hundred servants at his farm, and he was 
 accustomed to travel through his district like a petty king, 
 with a retinue of thirty men, to judge the disputes of his 
 Thingmen. He did not, however, venture to combat the 
 general dissatisfaction, caused by the increased expense to 
 the individuals where he lodged, which this practice occa- 
 
 * The book of Flat island (Codex Flateyensis) so called from having 
 been found in a monastery on the island of Flatii (Flat island) situated 
 north of the Breida Fjord in Iceland. It is a vellum MS. containing 
 copies of a number of Sagas, executed between 1387 and 1395, and is pre- 
 served in the Royal Library of Copenhagen. 
 
XXXVlll 
 
 INIRonrCTION. 
 
 sioned, aiul cvontually contented himself with six attcnd- 
 iints. As long as public opinion had so much weight, the 
 voice of the Saga was also influential, but when powerful 
 families intermarried, their influence invariably increased, as 
 well as the number of their followers and constituents. In the 
 beginning of the I'ith century Haflide Marsor. had a dispute 
 with Thorgill Oddeson, and rode to the Thing with I'iOO 
 men, while 700 accompanied his antagonist. No individual 
 yeoman could oj)p()se such an arnuunent, either with his 
 own force or that of his kinsmen, and the field of domestic 
 narrative was therefore reduced from the multii)licity 
 of characters and events which the time of the colonists 
 brought forth, to the more serious feuds of a few powerful 
 chiefs. 
 
 From the middle of the l*2th century, all power and 
 inllueuco was divided between the three warlike sons of 
 Sturle — the historian Snorro, Thojjd, and Sighvat. Ava- 
 rice, ambition, and revenge generated implacable hatred 
 between these, and brought on the destruction of their race; 
 and the history of the independent age of Iceland may be 
 said to end with the feuds of this family, which lasted one 
 hundred years, and gave to that period the name of " the 
 time of the Sturlungers" (Sturlungatiden). Although the 
 history of this period has been written in a good style, with 
 the greatest accuracy, and rare impartiality by an eye- 
 witness rnd participator in the events — Sturle Thordson ; 
 notwithstanding the much more important occurrences 
 which are here narrated, as compared with the former 
 periods, and which, it might therefore be supposed, would 
 awaken greater interest, — the Sturlunga Saga does not 
 present that attraction to the reader, which is aftbrded by 
 the narratives of less important periods. 
 
 Mere luunerical force, and not the personal strength or 
 ability of the individual now determined the result. The 
 question was no longer about defending a cause at the 
 
 ^!i 
 
INTHODUCTION. 
 
 XXXIX 
 
 Court, but asscTubliu^ an unny ; the old thirst for rovongo 
 hud not vanished, hut honourable lecling had given place to 
 treachery, and the j)ower of nuuibers. No distinguished 
 individual ajjpearcd whose deeds could awaken sympathy. 
 Snorro Sturleson was talented and eloquent, but at the 
 same time, ambitious, avaricious, and not very celebrated 
 for his personal prowess ; his nephew, Sturle Sighvatson, 
 was full of energy, but imperious, violent, and faithless ; 
 Kolbcin the younger, and (iissur, authors of Snorro's 
 nuirder, were only clever partisans; Thord Kakal, who 
 revenged the fall of the Sturlungors, awakened more sym- 
 pathy, but he did not possess energy enough either to 
 overcome his enemies, or sincerity enough to be recon- 
 ciled to them, and hastened the submission of the island to 
 Norway.* 
 
 The submission of the Icelanders to the sway of the 
 Norwegian Kings was a natural consequence of these do- 
 mestic dissensions ; there was no end to the wars of the 
 chiefs; not a single house, as formerly, was burned down, 
 but whole provinces were laid waste. The chiefs them- 
 selves, also, looked to Norway for assistance as well as to 
 their bishops, who were dependant on the see of Thrond- 
 hjem; llakon Hakonson well knew how to avail himself 
 of this internal weakness, and hastening on a crisis, which 
 was the necessary consequence of the natural course of 
 events, secured the allegiance of the island in 1261. 
 
 Thus did all the noble sentiments, generated by equal 
 laws, an independent position, high descent, and intellectual 
 endowment, sink beneath the angry and narrow-minded 
 conflicts of private interest and personal animosity. Party 
 feeling, — that curse of a nation, — fell upon the land ; the 
 Norwegian monarch, availing himself of the weakness 
 which ever accompanies disunion, accomplished the sub- 
 
 • For ii sihort account of Siiorio's death, and tlie fends of tlie SturUmsrcrs, 
 SCO lochmd, Greenland, \o. — Hd. Cab. Lib. xxviii, ji. 134, ct scq. 
 
 '' '.-^i 
 
 ,(,ViI 
 
vl 
 
 IN ntoix (HON. 
 
 'H'i'li(u\ ol'lln' i>linul, ami a>< in n iiutic soiilluMn imd girrnrr 
 i-'li', lli«> ii)l(<sliii«> (liss(Misi«)iis of liiM" own rxfili'il sons, 
 allixt'il till' l)a(l!;»' »»!" viissalaijt* »n»(>ii L-i'Iand ! 
 
 ^Mlal tliouu' {'o\\\{\ now aninialo llic lyi'u' niusi", or f^iv«' 
 intt'ii'st and distinction {o tlu> annals of tin* historian ? 'I'lio 
 Ihnni' ot'tliscord lis;litrd by tlu« rliii>l"s, and I'annrtl into <l»«- 
 structivo t'sti'iision by the Nonvi\ij;ian Kin^, bad <'arri<<d 
 uith it, thi' last spark tti' iVi'i'doni IVout llu» i'\liaiist»'d land, 
 antl with lVi«v'doni IKmI tlio spirit wliicb bad Invatbi'd lil"*' 
 into till' soiiys oltlu' Skalds, and ^ivi'n I'orco and cbaracli'r 
 tt! 'Ill' ri'ronis of the Saj^a ! 
 
 AliiT a short linio tho Sa^as coasi'd to bo proibici'd, lor 
 nothing; Di-rurrod that was worthy ol bi'ins; conMnitli'd lo 
 yyritioii : tho ilry annalist alom* ronid (ill his nolo book yvilb 
 tho snooossions of Lai^nion or ohii'l" niapstratos, tbo yvi'il- 
 tiiiiiis ol' tho rhiols, law snits, and solitary doods oi" \iolonco, 
 tlio ronuiant oi' tho old lioontionsuoss; or nioro dostruotiyo 
 still, with dotails of tho rayayos of tho poslilonlial ilisoasos, 
 whioli now sproad tloatli and ilosolation lhroii{;bout tho 
 land. 
 
 Hut oyon n\oro injurious to tho bislorioal liloraturo of 
 looland than thoso dopi>pnlaling olVoots yyas tho tasto for 
 ronianoo yvhioh aroso about this poriod, iiu(i woakonod tho 
 foolini; for puro history. Wo hayo alroady soon that in tho 
 li'th oontury. fabulous or pootioal ornamont yyas givon to 
 historioal narratiyo, in ordor to inoroaso tho gratifioation of 
 tho hoaror; and by such ombollishod adyonturos Sturlo 
 'I'hordson obtainod so much favour yvith JMa<j;nus Lago- 
 bator : but so long as real acts of horoisin yvoro porforniod, 
 and roiordod, and tho Sagas yvore connected yvith tho songs 
 of tho Skalds, and tho genealogy of families, such narratives 
 justly attained the preference ; it y»as otheryvise, lioyvever, 
 yvhen the public interest in domestic events had subsided, 
 or rather yviien the altered condition of society produced 
 iiotiiiug to call it forth, and the romances of chivalry, yverc 
 
INTKOOIICTION. 
 
 xli 
 
 o|H>riiMl likt) a iirw w<>rl<'l, hcloro iJio luliriirin^ eyes oi' tJtf 
 lr(>laii<l(>i-s. Tills was |>ui'ti<'iilai'ly a|>|»ar(>iil, in ili(! nti^ti of 
 llalutii llakntiHoii, l>y vvliostt oiiltitH Hcvtirul of tlu; iiioHt. 
 |K)|Milai' lorci^ii I'oiiiaiiccs wrrv. (.raii>ilalf(l into l(;<*lan(lir. 
 To l,li(>s(Mnay lio additd lli(t (Millions Vilkina Sa^^a, a ronianct; 
 ol DidrikoC Ht^rn and liis clianipions, wlii(-li was, prohahly, 
 wrillon liy I'm>| mdrrs in n<;r^'<>n, in tint i4Ui ccnUiry, iVoni 
 i\w imrralivos of llanHcaiic nirrdiuntH. 
 
 'I'lio passion for iioaiinf^ and ntadin^ foreign roinancoH 
 injin-(Ml liistori(!al liforaturo in two ways: first, by (!(»rrn|)f,- 
 iiif^' tlu^ pnn! tasto for triK? history; and sticrondly, by loading 
 many to tixa^f^M-rato, and <lr(k ont farts with iniaf^inativo 
 fiMiturrs borrowed from th(!s«^ fabh^s. I'liblic intiin^st in th«; 
 history of tho noi^hboiirin^ countriivs also ccascui to ))<> 
 lon;f(M' cnU'rlainisd ; sonu5 (;onsid(!rablo jiroportios fell to liuj 
 Norw»';;ian crown ; the riches of the ehicifs pass<!<l away, and 
 the island sinik fast into an abject and nniinportant condi- 
 tion. .lonrni<vi to foreif^Mi courts, and (!onse(jneritly tho 
 knowl(ul^f(; of fon^i^n events Ixfcanu! inoro ran; ; tlio coni- 
 plinientary v«u'S(fs of tin? subj(u;t poet to his monarcli were 
 naturally les • valued than those sunf( by the travidlin^ bard 
 in honour of a strangtfr kin^ ; they were no lon^csr liberally 
 rewarded, and soon both Skald and Sagarrian ceased to sin^ 
 and to narrate. With f^'ood reason, therefon;, does 'J'orfaMis 
 observe! that Ilakon Ilakonson, by subjecting Iceland, 
 left a larger kingdom to his successors, but at tho same 
 time, diminished their glory by depriving them of the men 
 who could have immortalized their name. 
 
 In tho 14th and 15th centuries the voyages of the Ice- 
 hinders altogether ceased. Tlio stranger who landed on 
 their coast, unlike tho old skipper of wide experience and 
 goodly lineage and connexion, was now the paltry trader or 
 ordinary seaman from whom little could be learned j and if 
 an Icelander went abroad, he found himself a stranger in 
 Scandinavia. In the course of the 13th century, the old 
 
 
 m 
 
xlii 
 
 INTIIODUCTION. 
 
 V t 
 
 Intigungo, by niixtiiro with the Gonnan, iiiul a careless 
 tnanncr of speaking, had become quite altered in Denmark, 
 and the same change appeared in the following centiu'y in 
 Norway, these two languages becoming nearly similar; so 
 that the old Danslic Tiini/c, together with the Saga, was no 
 longer heard in Scandinavia, while in remote Iceland, the 
 ancient songs of the Skalds, and stories of the Sagamen, 
 secured its preservation there. 
 
 Thus separated from the rest of the world, as well by 
 language as locality, the Icelanders could only gratify their 
 taste for reading in the books of their own country. The 
 value of oral tradition, and therewith its j)ower had gra- 
 dually diminished and died away as books and reading be- 
 came more general ; but the old supply of true and poetical 
 narratives became corrupted by legends of foreign and 
 native saints, adventures with ghosta and spirits, and tradi- 
 tions from foreign romances, which were written in the 15th, 
 ICth, and 17th centuries. Meantime the feeling for the 
 old Saga was still kept alive by historical songs (llimar) and 
 the labours of the genealogist; the latter has been a 
 favourite pursuit with Icelanders in all ages, and by these 
 means have the principal families been enabled to trace 
 their descent from the 10th and 11th centuries, with far 
 greater accuracy than the most ancient nobility of the rest 
 of Europe. The Rimar had much resemblance to the 
 Champion songs (Kaempe viser), traces of which are to be 
 found in the Sturlunga Saga, and which were composed in 
 great numbers in the following century. Of the seventy- 
 eight Icelandic poets that are enumerated by Einarm, as 
 having flourished from the Reformation to the end of the 
 18th century, the greater number have composed such 
 rhymes, and in many of these the old traditions are in- 
 cluded. 
 
 In the 10th century still fewer Sagas were written than 
 in the 15th, not so much because people began to get 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 xliii 
 
 acquaintod with printed works, which took place slowly, 
 but because the Refonnatiou at lirst operated afjainst the 
 readiii<? of Sa^'as : they were said to contain Popery. 
 
 It was, therefore, fortunate for history that irom the 1 7th 
 century the attention of the literati, both in Sweden ami 
 Denmark, was turned to the importance of Icelandic ma- 
 nuscripts. Amgrim Johnson, author of Crymogoca, assisted 
 by King Christian IV. of Denmark (1()4;)), collected seve- 
 ral of them, and Bishop Urynjulf Svendson sent some of 
 the most important Icelandic codices to Frederic III. 
 (IG70), who was a zealous promoter of all intellectual ad- 
 vancement. The Icelander liugman who, taken prisoner 
 in the wars of Charles X. of Sweden, had awakened the 
 attention of the Swedish literati to the literary treasures of 
 his own country, was sent to the island in 1661 to purchase 
 manuscripts for the Antiquarian Museum of Stockholm, 
 and many were afterwards sent thither on the same errand ; 
 but Christian V. of Denmark, whose dominion, including 
 Norway, extended to Iceland, issued a prohibition in 1685 
 against any manuscripts being disposed of to strangers, nor 
 was it until the eminent antiquary Professor Amas Mag- 
 nussen was placed at the head of a royal commission in 
 Iceland, which carried on its labours with unwearied assi- 
 duity from 1702 to 171'2, that the remaining manuscripts 
 were collected and lodged in the libraries of Copenhagen. 
 
 
I . * 
 
 I 
 
DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 IbasA of (Bvik the Uttf* 
 
 The first important document that appears in 
 Professor Rafn's collection, is the Saga or narrative 
 of Erik the Red, the first settler in Greenland. 
 This manuscript forms part of the celebrated Flato- 
 bogen, or Codex Flateyensis,* and the language, 
 construction, and style of the narrative, together 
 with other unerring indications, prove it to have 
 been written in the 12th century. A facsimile of 
 this, as well as of the other principal manuscripts, 
 is appended to the Antiquitates AMERicANiE. 
 
 Altliough the main object of the writer of this 
 narrative appears to have been to enumerate the 
 deeds and adventures of Erik and his sons, short 
 accounts are also given of the discoveries of suc- 
 ceeding voyagers, the most distinguished of whom 
 was Thorfinn Karlsefne; but as a more detailed 
 narrative of the discoveries of this remarkable per- 
 sonage, is contained in the manuscript entitled the 
 Saga of Thorfinn Karlsefne, which is also 
 translated, the following selections are principally 
 confined to the voyages of Erik and his immediate 
 followers. 
 
 • See Introduction, page xxxvii. 
 
SsHQH of ertit t\u Uttf, 
 
 m 
 
 DISCOVERY AND COLONIZATION OF GREENLAND. 
 
 A. D. 985. 
 
 Thorvald hight a man, a son of Osvald, a son 
 of Ulf-Oxnc-Thorersson. Thorvald and his son 
 Erik tlie Red removed from Jjeder* to Iceland, in 
 consequence of murder. At that time was Iceland 
 colonized wide around.t They lived at Drange on 
 Hornstrand; there died Thorvald. Erik then 
 married Thorhild, the daughter of Jaerunda and 
 Thorbjorg Knarrarbringa, who afterwards married 
 Thorbjom of Haukadal. 
 
 Then went Erik northwards, and lived at Erik- 
 stad near Vatshorn. The son of Erik and Thor- 
 hild hight Leif. But after Eyulf Soers and Rafti 
 the duellistst murder, was Erik banished from 
 Haukadal, and he removed westwards to Breidaf- 
 jord, and lived at Oexney at Erikstad. He lent 
 
 * S. W. coast of Norway. 
 
 t Iceland was colonized by Ingolf, a Norwegian, in 874. The discovery 
 of the island has been erroneously given to Nadodd in 862, but Finn Mag- 
 nusen and Rafu have shewn that it had been previously visited by Gardar, 
 a Dane of Swedish descent about the year 860, and was first called Gardars- 
 holm (Gardar's island), nor can the arrival of Nadodd, who called it Snee- 
 land (Snowland) be fixed at an earlier period than 864. See Gronland's His- 
 toriske Mindesmterker, Vol. I. p. 92-97. But both the Norwegian and 
 Swedo-Danc must give place to the Irish monks, who, it will be shewn, 
 visited and resided in Iceland aixty-five years before the discovery of Gar- 
 dar. 3cc Minor Narratives, Part III. of this volume. 
 
 X Uohngang Rafn. Sec Introduction, p. vi. 
 
 'i. 
 
 t • ' 
 
48 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 \ if. 
 
 ( "I 
 
 ThorgGst his seat-posts,* and could not get them 
 back again ; he then demanded them ; upon this 
 arose disputes and frays between him and Thorgest, 
 as is told in Eriks saga.f Styr Thorgrimson, Eyulf 
 of Svinoe, and the sons of Brand of Alptafjord, and 
 Thorbjorn Vifilson assisted Erik in this matter, 
 but the sons of Thorgeller and Tliorgeir of Hitardal 
 stood by the Thorgestlingers. Erik was declared 
 outlawed by the Thorsnesthing,1: and he then made 
 ready hift ship in Erik's creek, and when he was 
 ready, Styr and the others followed him out past 
 the islands. Erik told them that he intended to go 
 in search of the land, which Ulf Krages son 
 Gunnbjorn saw, when he was driven out to the 
 westward in the sea, the time when he found the 
 rocks of Gunnbjorn.§ He said he would come 
 back to his friends if he found the land. Erik 
 sailed out from Snaefellsjokul || ; he found land, and 
 came in from the sea to the place which he called 
 Midjokulj it is now hight Blaserkr. He then 
 went southwards to see whether it was there habit- 
 able land. The first winter he was at Eriksey, 
 nearly in the middle of the eastern settlement^ j 
 the spring after repaired he to Eriksfjord, and 
 took up there his abode. He removed in summer 
 
 • Setstokka. See Introdtic. p. iii. note. 
 
 t Supposed to be a lost Icelandic MS. 
 
 t Court. See lutroduc. p. xvii. note. 
 
 § Gunnhjamasker, stated by Bjorn Johnson to have been about midway 
 between Iceland and Greenland, but now concealed, or rendered inaccessible 
 by the descent of Arctic ice, Antiq. Am. p. xi. note a. 
 
 II Jiikul is used to describe a mountain of snow oi- ice (glacier) from Juki, 
 a fragment of ice. f Eystribygd. 
 
 1 U 
 
HY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 49 
 
 to the wdstjrn settlement, and gave to many places 
 names. He was the second winter at Holm in 
 Ilraftisgnipa, but the third summer went he to 
 Iceland, and came with his ship into Breidafjord. 
 He called the land which he had found Greenland, 
 because, quoth he, " people will be attracted thither, 
 if the land has a good name." Erik was in Iceland 
 for the winter, but the summer after, went he to 
 colonize the land ; he dwelt at Brattahlid in Eriks- 
 fjord. Informed people say that the same summer 
 Erik the Red went to colonize Greenland, thirty- 
 five ships sailed from Breidafjord and Borgafjord, 
 but only fourteen arrived ; some were driven back, 
 and others were lost. This was fifteen winters 
 before Christianity was established by law in Ice- 
 land. The following men who went out with Erik, 
 took land in Greenland : Herjulf took Herjulfs^ord 
 (he lived at Herjulfsness) Ketil KetilsQord, Rafn 
 Rafnsfjord, Soelve Soelvedal, Helge Thorbrandsson 
 Alptefjord, Thorbjornglora Siglefjord, Einar Ei- 
 narsQord, Hafgrira HafgrimsQord and Vatnahverf, 
 Arnlaug ArnlaugsQord, but some went to the 
 western settlement. 
 
 f •' 
 
 The above statement of these occurrences having taken 
 place " fifteen winters before Christianity was established 
 by law in Iceland'' enables us to fix with certainty, the 
 exact period of time when the final settlement was made 
 by Erik and his followers in Greenland, namely, A. D. 985 : 
 Christianity having been established in Iceland in the 
 year 1000. 
 
 1 ; ; 
 
 E 
 
50 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 BJAllNI SEEKS OUT GREENLAND. 
 
 A.D. 980. 
 
 . '' 3. Herjulf was the son of Bard Hcrjulfson ; he 
 was kinsman to the colonist* Ing-olf. To Herjulf 
 gave Ingolf land between Voo and Rcykjaness.t 
 Herjulf lived first at Drepstock ; Thorgerd hight 
 his wife, and Bjarni was their son, a very hopeful 
 man. He conceived, when yet young, a desire to 
 travel abroad, and soon earned for himself both 
 riches and respect, and he was every second winter 
 abroad, every other at home with his father. Soon 
 possessed Bjarni his own ship, and the last winter 
 he was in Norway, Herjulf prepared for a voyage 
 to Greenland with Erik. In the ship with Herjulf 
 was a Christian from the Hebrides,^ who made a 
 hymn respecting the whirlpool,§ in which was the 
 following verse : — 
 
 O thou who triest holy men ! 
 
 Now guide me on ray way, 
 Lord of the earth's wide vault, extend 
 
 Thy gracious hand to me ! 
 
 Herjulf lived at Herjulfsness ; he was a very re- 
 spectable man. Erik the Red lived at Brattahlid ; 
 he was the most looked up to, and every one regulated 
 themselves bv him. These were Erik*s children : 
 Leif, Thorvald and Thorstein, but Freydis hight 
 his daughter ; she was married to a man who 
 
 * Landnamsman, see Introduc. p. vl. 
 t S. W. point of Iceland. 
 I Sudreyskr madr kristinn. 
 
 «i Ilafgerdingar, described by an antient Icelandic writer as a dangerous 
 pass in the Greenland ' eean. — Antiq. Amer. p. 18, note a. 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 r)i 
 
 Thorvard hight ; they lived in Garde, where is 
 now the Bishop's seat ; she was very haughty, but 
 Thorvard was narrow-minded ; she was married to 
 him chiefly on account of his money. Heathen 
 were the people in Greenland at this time. Bjarni 
 came to Eyrar with his ship the summer of the 
 same year in which his father had sailed away in 
 spring. These tidings appeared serious to Bjarni , 
 and he was unwilling to unload his ship. Then 1 is 
 seamen asked him what he would do ; he ansv ered 
 that he intended to continue his custom, and pass 
 the winter with his father : " and I will,'* said he, 
 " bear for Greenland if ye will give me your com- 
 pany." All said that they would follow his counsel. 
 Then said Bjarni : " Imprudent will appear our 
 voyage since none of us has been in the Greenland 
 ocean.'' However, they put to sea so soon as they 
 were ready, and sailed for three days,* until the 
 land was out of sight under the water ; but then 
 the fair wind fell, and there arose north winds and 
 fogs, and they knew not where they were, and thus 
 it continued for many days. After that saw they 
 the sun again, and could discover the sky ; they 
 now made sail, and sailed for that day, before they 
 saw land, and counselled with each other about 
 what land that could be, and Bjarni said that he 
 thought it could not be Greenland. They asked 
 whether he wished to sail to this land or not. 
 "My advice is," said he, "to saii close to the 
 land ;" and so they did, and soon saw that the 
 
 * Thija daga. 
 
 Ill 
 
 3,.. 
 
 e2 
 
 I. < 
 
52 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 ■ ;. r;ij,. 
 
 r 
 
 land was without mountains, and covered with 
 wood, and had small heights. Then left they the 
 land on their larboard* side, and let the stern turn 
 from the land. Afterwards they sailed two d.ayst 
 before they saw another land. They asked if 
 lijarni thougljt that this was Greenland, but he 
 said that he as little believed this to bo Greeidand 
 as the other : *' because in Greenland are said to 
 be very high ice hills." They soon approached the 
 land, and saw that it was a flat land covered with 
 wood. Then the fair wind fell, and the sailors 
 said that it seemed to them most advisable to land 
 there ; but Bjarni was unwilling to do so. They 
 pretended that they were in want of both wood and 
 water. " Ye have no want of either of the two,*' 
 said Bjarni ; for this, however, he met with some 
 reproaches from the sailors. He bade them make 
 sail, and so was done ; they turned the prow from 
 the land, and, sailing out into the open sea for three 
 days,'! with a south-west wind, saw then the third 
 land; and this land was high, and covered with 
 mountains and ice-hills. Then asked thev whether 
 Bjarni would land there, but he said that he would 
 not : " for to me this land appears little inviting.*' 
 Therefore did they not lower the sails, but held on 
 along this land, and saw that it was an island ; 
 again turned they the stern from the land, and 
 sailed out into the sea with the same fair wind ; 
 but the breeze freshened, and Bjarni then told them 
 to shorten sail, and not sail faster than their ship 
 
 • Bakbordu. t Tvb dscgr. t Thrju doegr. 
 
 |i |l 
 
5» 
 
 BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 53 
 
 and ship's gear could hold out. They sailed now 
 lour day ,* when they saw the fourth land. Then 
 asked they Bjarni whether he thought that this 
 was Greenland or not. Bjarni answered : " This 
 is the most like Greenland, according to what 1 
 have been told about it, and here will we steer for 
 land." So did they, and landed in the evening 
 under a ness ; and there was a boat by the ness, 
 and just here lived Bjarni's father, and from him 
 has the ness taken its name, and is since called 
 Herjulfsness.; Bjarni now repaired to his father's, 
 and gave up seafaring, and was with his father so 
 long as Herjulf lived, and afterwards he dwelt there 
 after his father. 
 
 Such is the simple* detail of the first voyage of the North- 
 men to the western hemisphere, and Professor llafn shews 
 that there are sufficient data in the antient Icelandic geo- 
 graphical works, to determine the position of the various 
 coasts and headlands thus discovered by Bjarni Herjulfson. 
 A day's sail was estimated by the Northmen at from twenty- 
 seven to thirty geographical miles, and the knowledge 
 of this fact, together with that of the direction of the wind, 
 the course steered, the appearance of the shores, and other 
 details contained in the narrative itself, together with the 
 more minute description of the same lands given by suc- 
 ceeding voyagers, — leave no doubt that the countries thus 
 discovered by Bjarni Herjulfson, were Connecticut, Long 
 Island, Rhode Island, Massachusetts, Nova Scotia, 
 and Newfoundland, and the date of the expedition is 
 determined by the passage in the preliminary narrative 
 which fixes the period of HerjulPs settlement atHerjulfsness 
 in Iceland. (See p. 49.) 
 
 * Fjopiir dfr(iv. 
 
 ■:i 
 
 
 L:V''. 
 
 •M 
 .-:«; 
 
 rr , 
 
54 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 It may, perhaps, be urged in disparagetnent of these 
 discoveries that they were (iv.c'uhmUil, — that IJjarni Iler- 
 jult'son set out in search of Greenland, and fell in with the 
 eastern coast of North America ; i)Ut so it was, also, with 
 Columbus. — The sanguine and sInHFuI Genoese navigator 
 set sail in quest of Asia,* and discovered the West Indies; 
 even when in his \ast voyage, he did reach the eastern 
 
 • " lie set it down as a fundamental principle that the earth was a ter- 
 inqueoiis globe, which might be travelled round from east to west, and that 
 1T1CU stood foot to foot when on opposite points. The circumference from 
 east to «est, tit the equator, he divided according to Ptolemy, into 24 hours 
 of 15 degrees each, making ;)G0 degrees. Of these he imagined, comparing 
 tlio globe of i'tolcmy with the earlier map of Marinus of Tyre, that 1-3 hours 
 liiid been known to the antients, extending from the Canary or Fortunate 
 Islands, to the city of Thinte in Asia, the western and eastern extremities 
 (if the known world. The Portuguese had advanced the eastern discovery 
 (1110 hour more by the discovery of the Azorc and Cape do Verde Islands: 
 sMll about eight hours, or one third of the circumference of the earth, re- 
 mained to be explored. This space he imagined to bu occupied in a great 
 measure by the eastern regions o^Asia, which might extend so far as to 
 ainnoaeb the western shores of Europe and Africa. A navigator, therefore, 
 liy pursuing a direct course from oast to west, must arrive at the extremity 
 of Asia, or discover any intervening land. The great obstacle to be sinpre- 
 licnded was from the tract of ocetin that might intervene ; but this could -lOt 
 he very wide, if the opinion of Alfraganus the Arabian were admitted, who 
 by diminishing the size of the degrees, gave to the earth a smaller circum- 
 ference than was assigned to it by other cosmographcrs ; a theory to which 
 Columbus seems, generally, to have given much faith. He was fortified, 
 also, by the opinion of Aristotle, Seneca, Pliny, and Strabo, who considered 
 tlie ocean but of moderate breadth, so as that one might pass from Cadiz 
 westward to the Indies in a few days.'"— Life and Voyages of Christopher 
 Columbus by Washington Irving, Fam. Lib. No. XI. p. 14, 15. 
 
 " Tlio great argument which induced him to \vi enterprise was the one 
 iirst cited; namely, that the most eastern part of Asia known to the an- 
 tients could not be separated from the Azores by more than i>, third of the 
 circumference of the globe ; thaf. the intervening space must, in n great 
 measure, be filled up by the unknown residue of Asia ; and that, as the 
 rirciimference of the world was less than was generally supposed, the Asiatic 
 sluircs could easily be attained by a moderate voyage to the west.'" — 
 lb. p. 18. " 
 
 •i. 
 
BV^ THF, NORTHMEN. 
 
 55 
 
 shore of Centol America, he still believed it to be Asia, 
 and continued juider tliat impression to the day of l;is 
 death.* Besides, how different were the circumstances 
 under which the two voyages were made ? The North- 
 men, without compass or quadrant, without any of the ad- 
 vantages of science, geographical knowledge, personal ej:- 
 perience, or previous discoveries, — without the support of 
 either kings or governments, — which Columbus, hov»fevcr 
 discouraged at the outset, eventually obtained, — but guided 
 by the stars, and upheld by their own private resources, and 
 a spirit of adventure which no dangers coidd deter— cross 
 the broad northern ocean, and explore these distant lands ! 
 Columbus, on the other hand, went forth with all the advan- 
 tages of that grand career of modern discovery which had 
 been commenced in the preceding century , and which, under 
 Prince Henry of Portugal, had been pushed forward to an 
 eminent position in the period immediately preceding his 
 first voyage.f 
 
 ■Mi 
 
 
 * ** With all the visionary fervour of his imagination, its fondest dreams 
 fell short of reality. He died in ignorance of the real grandeur of his dis> 
 covery. Until his last breath, he entertained the idea that he had merely 
 opened a new way to the old resorts of opulent commerce, and had disco- 
 vered some of the wild regions of the East. He supposed Ilispaniola to be 
 the anticnt Ophir, which had been visited by the ships of King Solomon, 
 and that Cuba and Terra Firma were but remote parts of Asia." — Irving's 
 Columbus, Fam. Lib. No. XI. p. 353. 
 
 " He imagined that the vast stream of fresh water which poured into the 
 gulph of Paria, issued from the fountain of the tree of life, in the midst of 
 the Garden of Eden."— lb. p. 210. 
 
 " He fancied that he had actually arrived at the Aurea Chersonesus, from 
 whence, according to Josephus, the gold had been procured for the building 
 of the Temple of Jerusalem." — lb. p. 291 . 
 
 t " Prince Henry called in the aid of science to dispel these errors. He 
 established a Naval College and observatory at Sagres, and invited thither 
 the most eminent professors of the nautical faculties. The effects of this 
 establishment were soon apparent. A vast improvement took place in maps 
 and charts ; the compass was brought into more general use ; the Portu- 
 guese marine became signalised for its hardy cnterprL^es ; Cape liojador 
 
 • "''^ 
 
 if; 
 
 ijI. 
 
.515 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 If I . 
 
 Pi 
 
 Tho compass hail been discovered and brought into 
 general use ; maps and charts had been constructed ; as- 
 tronomical and gcograi)hical science had become more 
 diffused, and tho discoveries of tho African coast from Capo 
 IJlanco to Capo de Verde, together with the Cape do 
 Verde and Azore Islands, had produced a general excite- 
 ment amongst all who were in any way connected with a 
 maritime life, and filled their minds with brilliant images 
 of fairer islands and more wealthy shores amidst the bound- 
 less waters of the Atlantic* It should also be recollected 
 that Columbus, ever ready to gather information from 
 veteran mariners, had heard of land seen far to the west of 
 Ireland and of the island of Madeira; had been assured 
 that, four hundred and fifty leagues east of Cape St. Vin- 
 cent, carved wood, not cut with iron instruments, had 
 been found in the sea, and that a similar fragment, toge- 
 ther with reeds of an immense size, had drifted to Porto 
 Santo from the west : added to this, was the fact of huge 
 pine trees, of unknown species, having been wafted by 
 westerly winds to the Azores, and human bodies of won- 
 drous form and feature cast upon the island of Flores.f 
 
 was doubled ; the region of the tropics penetrated and divested of Its fan- 
 cied terrors ; the greatest part of the African coast from Cape Blanco to Cape 
 de Verde, explored, and the Cape de Verde and Azore islands discovered." — 
 Irving's Columbus, p. 0. 
 
 • " It was a period of general excitement with all who were connected 
 with maritime life, or wlio resided in the vicinity of the ocean. The recent 
 discoveries had inflamed their imaginations, and had filled them with ideas 
 of other islands of greater wealth and beauty, yet to be discovered in tho 
 boundless wastes of the Atlantic." — lb. p. 12. 
 
 t " Columbus was attentive to every gleam of information bearing upon his 
 tVieory, that might be derived from veteran mariners, and the inhabitants of 
 the lately discovered islands, who were placed, in a manner, on the frontier 
 posts of geographical knowledge. One Antonio Leone, an inhabitant of 
 Madeira, told him, that in sailing westwards one hundrtd leagues, he had 
 .xecn three islands at a distance. A mariner of Port St. Mary, also asserted, 
 (hat in the course of a voya4,'c to Ireland, he had seen laud to the west, 
 
»Y TFlli P )riTlIMEN. 
 
 57 
 
 Nor should it be forgotten that Columbus visited Iceland 
 in 1477,* when, having had access to the archives of the 
 
 wlilch tlio »lii|»'8 company took for some extreme purt of Tartary. Oiiu 
 Martin Viccnti, a pilot in the service of tlio King of Portugal, assured Co- 
 lumbus that, after sailing 450 leagues to the west of Capo St. Vincent, he 
 liad taken from the water a pieco of carved wood, evidently not laboured 
 with an iron instrument. As the wind had drifted it from the west, it might 
 have come from some unknown land in that direction. Pedro Correo, 
 brother>in-law of Columbus, also informed him, that ho had seen a similar 
 ]>iecc of wood, on the island of Porto Santo, which had drifted from the 
 -amu quarter, and he had heard from the King of Portugal, that reeds of an 
 immfinsc size, had floated to those islands from the west, which Columbus 
 supposed to be the kind of reeds of enormous magnitude described by 
 Ptolemy us growing in India. Trunks of huge pine trees, of a kind that 
 did not grow upon any of the islands, had been wafted to the Azores by 
 westerly winds. The inhabitants also informed him that the bodies of two 
 dead men had been cast upon the island of Flores, whose features had caused 
 great wonder and speculation, being diflbrent from those of any known race 
 of 1)co|p1c." — Irving's Columbus, p. 17. 
 
 • " While the design of attenii)ting the discovery in the west was ma- 
 turing in the mind of Columbus, he made u voyage to the northern seas, to 
 the island of Thulc, to which the English navigators, particularly those of 
 Bristol, were accustomed to resort on account of its fishery. He even ad- 
 vanced, he says, one hundred leagues beyond, penetrated the polar circle, 
 and convinced himself of the fallacy of the popular belief, that the frozen 
 zone was uninhabitable. TIic island thus mentioned by him as Thule is 
 generally supjiosed to have been Iceland." — lb. p. 20. 
 
 According to Mr. Irving's larger work, this visit took place in February, 
 1477, when Columbus appears to have observed with surprise that the 
 sea was not frozen. A striking confirmation of this circumstance is 
 mentioned by Finn Magnusen as having been found appended to an 
 authentic ])ubiic document, which came out ut EyuQord in the north part 
 of the island, early in the month of March of the siimc year, and which 
 states that " no snow was then seen upon the ground.'' (pu var snjolaus jiird) 
 The same learned Icelander directs attention to the following remarkable 
 coincidence : — In 'he year 1477, Magnus Eiolfson was Bishop of Skalholt 
 in Iceland ; since 1470, ho had been Abbot of the Monastery of Ilelgafell, 
 the place where the oldest documents relating to Qreenland,Vlnland, and the 
 various parts of America discovered by the Northmen, had been written, and 
 where they were, doubtless, carefully preserved, as it was from this very dis- 
 trict that the mo^^tdistinguishid voyugerb hud gone fortli. Tiicse documents 
 must have been well known to Bishoj) Magnus, ns weru their s;oncral ron- 
 
 
 *^l 
 
58 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMKRKA 
 
 ■>' !•:• 
 
 island, and ample opportunity of conversing witii the 
 learned there, through the medium of the Latin language, 
 ho might easily have obtained a complete knowledge of the 
 discoveries of the Northmen : sufficient at least, to confirm 
 his belief in the existence of a western continent. How 
 much the discoveries of the distinguished Genoese navigator 
 were exceeded by those of the Northmen, will appear from 
 the following narratives. 
 
 . V 
 
 tents throughout the island, and it is therefore in the hi^^hcHt cc im- 
 probable tliat Columbus, whose mind had been filled wltli the aict of 
 exploring a western continent since the year 1474, should have omitted to 
 sceli for and receive information respecting these early voyages. lie ar- 
 rived at Ilvalfjord, or Ilvalfjardarcyri, on the south coast of Iceland, at a 
 time when that harbour was most frequented, and it is well known that 
 Bishop Magnus visited the neighbouring churches in the spring or summer. 
 Sec Xord. Tidsk. f. Oldkynd. B. 2. p. 12U. Om de Engclskcs Handel og 
 Fa3rd paa Island i det 15 de Aarhundrede, isror med Hensyn til Columbus's 
 formeentligc Ileise dertil i Aaret 1477, og bans Beretninger dcsangaaendc, 
 ved Finn Magnusen. 
 
 No mention has been made hero of the supposed voyages of the Zcni in 
 the 14th century, which a modern historian lias enumerated amongi>t the 
 causes of encouragement to the views and projects of Columbus (Hist, of 
 Maritime and Inland Discovery, Vol. I. p. 221 -2'i5), for although these voy- 
 ages are said to have been made in the 14th century, no account of them was 
 published until 1558, more than fifty years after the death of Columbus ! 
 and the whole story has been clearly shewn by an acute Danish writer, to 
 have been a compilation from faulty geographical works and vague reports, 
 mixed up with the most palpable inconsistencies, anachronisms, and fable. 
 See Bemujrkninger over dc Vcnetianernc Zeni tilskrcvne Reiser i Norden, 
 af C. C. Zahrtmann. Capitain-lieutenant, ap. Nord. Tid. f. Oldkynd. 
 B. 2. p. 1. 
 
' 
 
 * V 
 
 UY Tllli NORTHMKN. 
 
 59 
 
 VOYAGE OF LEIF ERIKSON, 
 
 AND FIRST aE'ITLEMENT IN MASSACHUSETTS. 
 
 A.D. 004. 
 
 IIKItr: TiEOINNETII THE NAltUATIVE OP THE OREENLANDER8. 
 
 The next thing now to be related is, that Bjarni 
 Herjulfson went out from Grcenlanil, and visited 
 Erik Jarl,* and the Jarl received him well. Bjarni 
 told about his voyages, that he had seen unknown 
 lands, and people thought that he had shown no 
 curiositv, when he had nothini? to relate about 
 these countries, and this became somewhat a matter 
 of reproach to him. Bjarni became one of the Jarl's 
 courtiers, and came back to Greenland the summer 
 alter. /There was now much talk about voyages of 
 discovery. Lcif, the son of Erik the Red, of Brat- 
 tahlid, went to Bjarni Herjulfson, and bought the 
 ship of him, and engaged men for it, so that there 
 were thirty-five men in all. Leif asked his father 
 Erik to be the leader on the voyage, but Erik 
 excused himself, saying that he was now pretty well 
 stricken in years, and could not now, as formerly, 
 hold out all the hardships of the sea. Leif said 
 that still he was the one of the family whom good 
 fortune would soonest attend j and Erik gave in to 
 Leif's request, and rode from home no soon as they 
 were ready ; and it was but a short way to the ship. 
 The horse stumbled th&t Erik rode, and lie fell off, 
 
 * Erik, Jarl (Earl) of Norway. Tliis is supposed by Kafn to have happened 
 ill the year 1)04, — Antiq. Amcr. p. xxix. 
 
 
 ^■r< 
 
 'tv 
 
 .l' . 
 
 .■ -: 
 
 
 ■■;.r 
 
(io 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 l». ]■• 
 
 I'l 
 
 
 ■1 
 
 and bruised his foot. Then said Erik, *♦ It is 
 not ordained that I should discover more countries 
 than that which we now inhabit, and we should 
 make no further attempt in company." Erik went 
 home to Brattahlid, but Leif repaired to the ship, 
 and his comrades with him, thirty-five men. There 
 was a southern* on the voyage, who Tyrker hight. 
 Now prepared they their ship, and sailed out into 
 the sea when they were ready, and then found that 
 land first which Cjarni had found last. There sailed 
 they to the land, and cast anchor, and put off boats, 
 and went ashore, and saw there no grass. Great 
 icebergst were over all up the country, but like a 
 plain of flat stonest was all from the sea to the 
 mountains, and it appeared to them that this land 
 had no good qualities. Then said Leif, *' We have 
 not done like Bjarni about this land, that we have 
 not been upon it ; now will I give the land a name, 
 and call it Helluland."§ Then went they on 
 
 * Sudrmadr, supposed to mean a German, as the terms Sudrmcnn and 
 Thydverskirmcnn arc used promiscuously to distinguish the natives of 
 Germany, hy oUl nortlicm writers. Antiq. Amer. p. 28, note a. 
 
 i Jijkhir miklir. t Sem cin holla. 
 
 ^ From IlcUa, a flat stone. The coast of Newfoundland is thus dc- 
 scrihed hy the German writer Anspach : Die I nscl Newfoundland offenhart sich 
 in seltsamer Wunderharkeit, als ob die Natur sich in regcllosem Snhaffen in 
 der Darstellung Erstaunen weekender Dcnkmiihler ihror machtergiitzt hiitte 
 — Was von dem Innern der Insel bekamit ist, besteht aus felsigtem diirrem 
 I3oden,steilenIliigeln,mit verkruppeltem IJoltzc bcdeckt, cinigenengensan- 
 digen Tiiiilern, und wcit ausgedehnten Haide Ebcnen,odcr kalden, viehr oiler 
 minder verbreitcten Fdsevtiikhen wo hem Uaum, incht eiumalein (jestriiuch 
 gedeiht, und die man duller Barron (Iiarrens) iiennt.'' Geschichte und 
 ncsehreihuiig von Newfoundland und der Kiistc Labrador von C. A. Anspaeh. 
 up. Antiq. Amcr. pp. I'Jl-'J. 
 
IIY TIIK NORTHMEN. 
 
 Gl 
 
 board, and after that sailed out to sea, and found 
 another Innd ; tliey sailed again to the land, and 
 cast anchor, then put off boats and went on shore. 
 This land was flat, and covered with wood, find 
 white sands* were far around where they went, and 
 the shore was low.t Then said Leif, " This land 
 sliJill be named after its qualities, and called Mark- 
 LANiVJ (woodland.)" They then immediately re- 
 turned to the ship. Now sailed they thence into 
 the open sea, with a north-east wind, and were 
 
 r ^ 
 
 
 " This vast tract of land is extremely barren, and altogetlicr incapable of 
 cultivation. The surface is everywhere uneven, arid covered with large 
 stones, some of which arc of iimuzing dimensions. Tlicre is no such thing 
 as level land." Particulars of Labrador. — Phil. Transac. Vol. LXIV. 
 p. 374-r>, ap. Antiq. Amer. pi». 419-20. 
 
 " The most lofty perpendicular precipices rise to an amazing height upon 
 the north side, and the southoin shore only appears less striking in its 
 attitude from tlie summit of the opposite rocks." — '' The summit of this 
 majestic headland (Cape IJrogle) was now (14tli June) covered with snow.'' 
 Voyage of His Majesty's ship Rosamond to Newfoundland and the southern 
 coast of Labrador, by Lieut. Edward Chappcll, R.N., Lond. 1818, pp. 41'o0, 
 ap. Antiq. Amer. p* 422. 
 
 • Sandar hvitir. 
 
 t Osaibratt. 
 
 t " The land about the Harbour of Halifax, and a little to the southward 
 of it, is, in appearance, rugged and rocky, and has on it, in several places, 
 scrubby withered wood. Although it seems bold, yet it is not high." 
 Columbian Navigator, Vol.1. P. i. p. 17. " The land is low 'm general, 
 and not visible twenty miles off, except from the quarter-deck of a seventy- 
 four. A|^togon Hills have a long level appearance. Between Cape le 
 Have and Port Med way, the coast to the seaward being level and low, and 
 the shores toith white rocks, and low barren points ; from thenre to Shel- 
 burne and Port Roseway are woods. Near Port Haldimand arc several 
 barren places, and thence to Cape Sable, which makes the S. W. point into 
 Barrington Bay, is a low woody island, at the S. E. extremity of a range of 
 sandy cliffs, which are very remarkable at a considcrablo distance in the 
 offing."— New North American Pilot, Lond. 1816, P. ii. p. 1-0, ap. Antiq. 
 Amer. p. 423. 
 
 
 !•'! 
 
62 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 It r 
 
 V ■ 5 
 
 two days* at sea before they saw land, and they 
 sailed thither and came to an island which lay to 
 the eastw'ara ol' the land,! and went up there, 
 and looked round them in good weather, and 
 observed that there was dew upon the grass; and it 
 so happened that they touched the dew with their 
 hands, and raised the fingers to the i uth, and 
 they thought that they had never before tasted any 
 thing so sweet. 
 
 This island appears to have been Nantucket, where 
 honey dew is known to abound,]: and Helluland and Mark- 
 land are clearly shewn by Professor Rafn, on the authority 
 of modern voyagers and hydrographers, the Ciiief of whom 
 are quoted in the precoding notes — to be Newfoundland 
 and Nova Scotia. The narrative continues : — 
 
 After that tliey went to the ship, ard sailed into 
 a sound, which lay between the island and a ncss 
 (promontory), which ran out to the eastward of the 
 land ; and then steered westwards past the ness. 
 It was very shallow^ at ebb tide, and their ship 
 stood up, so that it was far to see from the ship to 
 the water. 
 
 The statement of shoal water in this sound corresponds 
 exactly with the description of the passage between Nan- 
 
 • 2 diEgr. 
 
 t Literally " northward of the land," (nordr af landinu,) but the Editor 
 shows that the Northmen placed this point of the compass nearly in the 
 position of our east." — Antiq. Anier. p. 428. 
 
 t See communication from Dr. Webb, Secretary to the Rhode Island 
 Historical Society. Antiq. Amcr. p. 443. 
 
 $ Grunnsijcfui mikit. 
 
 »i 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 
 tucket and Capo Cod, or the peninsula of Barnstable, as 
 given in the Columbian Navigator.* 
 
 But so much did they desire to land, tliat they 
 did not give themselves time to wait until the water 
 again rose under their ship, but ran at once on 
 shore, at a nlacc where a river flows out of a lake : 
 but so soon as the waters rose up under the ship, 
 then took they boats, and rowed to the ship, and 
 floated it up to the river, and thence into the lake, 
 and there cast anchor, and brought up from the 
 ship their skin cots,t and made there booths. J 
 
 From these details, it is evident that Leif and his com- 
 panions shaped their course through Nantucket Bay, be- 
 yond the south-western extremity of the peninsula of Cape 
 Con ; thence across the mouth of Buzzard's Bay to Sea- 
 CONNET Passage, and thus up the Pocasset River, to 
 Mount Hope Bay, which they seem to have taken for a 
 lake. 
 
 After this took they counsel, and formed the 
 resolution of remaining there for the winter, and 
 
 • " The eastern entrance is impeded by numerous riffs and other shoals, 
 as are lilicwise the central and western parts, and the whole presents an 
 aspect of drowned lands, which, there can be little doubt, were, at some 
 period, anterior to history^ connected with the main." — p. 72. See Antiq. 
 Amer.p. 425. 
 
 1 TKidf'ot, from hiid, skin, and fat, a case or covering, being strictly 
 speaking, a skin bag or pouch, in which the antients were accustomed to 
 keep their clothes and other articles on a journey : the same was used for a 
 bed on ship-board, as appears in the Laxdocla Saga, p. 1 10, where Thnrid 
 says " bun gekk at Mdfati pvi, crGcirmundr svaf i" — " she went to the couch, 
 where Geirmund slept." It thus answers to the uter of the Romans and 
 ffrpw/iaro^£(T/ir/j of the Greeks. Antiq. Am. p. 31. 
 
 X Bkdir. f. pi, of hkd, from bUa, to remain or inhabit, hence, probably, 
 the Eng. booth 
 
 \^% 
 
 • ). 
 
 \'A 
 
G4 
 
 DISCOVERY or AMERICA 
 
 mi 
 
 built thoro largo houses.* There was no want of 
 salmon cither in the river or in the lake, and 
 larger salmon than they had before seen.t TIk; 
 nature of the country was, as they thought, so good, 
 that cattle would not rec^uire house fecding;j: in 
 winter, for there came no frost in winter, and little 
 did the grass wither thei'e. Day and night were 
 more equal than in Greenland or Iceland, for on 
 the shortest day, was the sun above the horizon 
 from half-past seven in the forenoon till half-past 
 
 four in the afternoon. § 
 
 y 
 
 • II lis inikil. 
 
 t " The salmon (Salmo Salar) is met with a little farthrv to the eastward 
 of us, and was formerly found in our waters." — Dr. Webb, Sec. Ithodo 
 Island Hist. Soc. ap. Antiij. Am. p. 3G7. 
 
 i Fodr. 
 
 § " Sol hafdi dar eyktarstad ok dagmalastad urn skamdcgi." TIio mis- 
 conception of this passage by Torfa^us, who was followed by Wormskiold, 
 Malta Bran, and others led to an error as to the locality of Vinla.nd which 
 is ably exposed by Professor Rafn in a long and lucid note in explanation of 
 the Icelandic terms. Antiq. Amer. p. 435. note b. The subject lias been 
 further elucidated in an interesting article " On the Antient Scandinavians' 
 division of the time of the day," by Finn Magnusen, published in the 
 Memoirs of the Society of Northern Antiquaries, by which it appears that : — 
 
 The antient Scandinavians divided the heavens or the horizon into 8 
 grand divisions, and the times of the day according to the sun's apparent 
 motion through these divisions, the passage through each of which they 
 supposed to occupy a period of three hours. The day was therefore divided 
 into portions of time corresponding with these 8 divisions, each of Avhich 
 was called an eyJtt, signifying an eighth part. This eykt was again divided, 
 like each of the grand divisions of the heavens, into two smaller and equal 
 portions, called stu7ul or rnal. In order to determine these divisions of 
 time, the inhabitants of each place carefully observed the diurnal course of 
 the sun, and noted the terrestrii:! objects over which it seemed to stand. 
 Such a natural or artificial object was called in Iceland dagsmark (day- 
 mark). They were also led to fix these daymarks by a division of the 
 horizon according to the princin :;1 winds, as well as by the wants of their 
 domestic economy ; the shepherd s rising uuii., for instance, was called 
 
BY THR NORTH MRN. 
 
 0.'J 
 
 This would give very nearly the latitude of Mount 
 Hope Bay, which locality is previously pointed out by the 
 details relating to the soil and climate, and fully corres- 
 ponds with the descriptions of modern travellers : " Les 
 paturages," says Warden, "sont beaux en general, etplus 
 particulicrement au pays de Narraganset. Le pays de 
 South- Kingston, prcs de la cote de la mer et de la bale de 
 Narraganset, est trcs fertile, et d'un bon rapport. Ce sol 
 est forme d'un terreau profond et d'une petite partie de sable 
 et de gravier ; et la temperature est si douce quo la vegeta- 
 tion souffrc rarement dv froid ou de la sccheresse." Of 
 Rhode Island he says; — "Onrappelle le jyaradis de 
 VAmcrique^d^xco quelle emporte sur les autres lieux par 
 
 Hirdis rismal, which corresponds with half past 4 o'clock, A. M. and this 
 was the beginning of the natural day (dsegr) of 24 hours. Reckoning from 
 the hirdis risinul, the eighth sUnid or eighth half eylit terminated exactly 
 at half-past 4 o'clock in tiie afternoon, and therefore this particular period 
 was called kot' i%ux^)v eykt. This eykt, strictly speaking, commenced at 
 3 o'clock p. M. and ended at half-past 4 p. m. when it was said to be in 
 eyldamtodr, or the termination of the eykt. The precise moment that the 
 sun appeared in this place, indicated the termination of the artificial day 
 (dagr) and half the natural day (dffigr), and was therefore held especially 
 deserving of notice : the hours of labour, also, are supposed to have ended 
 at this time. Six o'clock a. m. was called Midr morgan ; half-past 7 A. m. 
 Dagmal ; 9 A. lu. Dagverdarmal, &c. AVinter was considered to commence 
 in Iceland about the 1 7th October, and Bishop Thorlacius, the calculator of 
 the Astronomical Calendar, fixes sunrise in the South of Iceland on the 17th 
 October, at half-past 7 A. m. At this hour, according to the Saga, it rose 
 in Vinland on the shortest day, and set at half-past 4 p. m. which data fix 
 the latitude of the place at 11" 43' 10", being nearly that of Mount Hope 
 Bay. — See Antiq. Amer. pp. 435 — 8, Memoires de la Sociut6 Royale des 
 Antiquaircs du Nord 1636-1837, p. 1G5, and Dial of the antient Northmen 
 in Appendix. Professor Rafn makes the latitude from the above data 
 41" 24' 10" [Antiq. Amer. p. 430], but If, as is to be presumed, the obser- 
 vation was made, when the sun had completely risen, and his lower edge 
 appeared to touch the horizon, it could not be less than 41" 43' 10" ; how- 
 ever, the difference is nnimportant, as regards the locality, for nothing more 
 than an approximation to the correct latitude of the place, could be ex- 
 pected from the rude method of calculating time, which was then practised 
 by the Northmen. 
 
 I HI >•''.'■ 
 
 
Cf) 
 
 DISrOVERY OF ATM ERIC A 
 
 I' i' 
 
 If' '=|il i- 
 
 sa situation son sol ot son climat."* The German historian 
 Kbeling offers equally favourable testimony,-)- and Hitch- 
 cock's scientific Report of the State of Massachusetts fully 
 accords with these. 
 
 But when they had done with the house building, 
 Leif said to his comrades : — " Now will I divide our 
 men into two parts, and have the land explored, 
 and the half of the men shall remain at home at 
 the house, while the other half explore the land ; 
 but however, not go further than that they can 
 come home in the evening, and they should not 
 separate." Now they did so for a time, and Leif 
 changed ahout, so that the one day he went with 
 them, and the other remained at home in the 
 house. Leif was a great and strong man, grave 
 and well favoured, therewith sensible and moderate 
 in all things. 
 
 LEIF THE LUCKY FOUND FOLK UPON A ROCK IN THE SEA. 
 
 2. It happened one evening that a man of the 
 party was missing, and this was Tyrker the German, 
 
 * Description ties Etats Unis de rAintriquc Scptentrionalc, Paris, 1820, 
 T. 1, pp. 490—503, ap. Antiq. Amcr. pp. 439—40. 
 
 t " An tier Sec ist dcr Winter meistcn theils mild, und nur von kurzcr 
 
 Daucr, dahcr uuch dcr Sclmcc nic laiige liegcn bleibt Man hjilt das 
 
 liiesige klima fiir das gesuntlcstc in ganz Nordamerika, weswegen vielc 
 krilnklichc I'crsonen aus den siidliclien Staatcn im Sommer nach den liiesigen 
 Inseln kommen, um sieli zu crliolcn. — Das Land liat einen Ueberfluss von 
 nahrliaftcn Grasarton und Futtcrkrauteru, nnd sondcrlich Bind in deni 
 cliomaligen Gcbiete von Narragansct die vortrcflfliclisten Triften." — Erd- 
 bescreibung und Gescliicbte von America, B. iJ, p. 4-12. A long und hlgbly 
 interesting reply to enquiries instituted by Professor Rafn on this subject, 
 from Dr. Webb, Secretary to the Hhodc Island Historical Society, contains 
 similar evidence of the fertility of the soil and salubrity of the climate. 
 See Antici. Ainer. p. 308. 
 

 15V rrn: northmkn. 
 
 67 
 
 This took Lcif much to heart, for Tyrkcr hsul hecii 
 long with his father an<l him, and loved Leif much 
 in his childhood. Leif now took his people se- 
 verely to task, and prepared to seek for Tyrker, 
 and took twelve men with him. But when they had 
 gotten A short way from the house, then came 
 Tyrkcr towards them, and was joyfully received. 
 Leif soon saw that his foster-father was not in his 
 right senses. Tyrkcr had a high forehead, and 
 unsteady eyes, was freckled in the face, small and 
 mean in stature, but excellent in all kinds of arti- 
 fice. Then said Leif to him : " Why wert thou so 
 late my fosterer, and separated from the party?" 
 He now spoke first, for a long time, in German, and 
 rolled his eyes about to different sides, and twisted 
 his mouth, but they did not understand what he 
 said. After a time he spoke Norsk.* " I have not 
 been much further off, but still have I something 
 new to tell of; I found vines and grapes." " But 
 is that true, my fosterer ?" quoth Leif. " Surely is 
 it true," replied he, " for I was bred up in a land 
 where there is no want of either vines or grapes." 
 They slept now for the night, but in the morning, 
 Leif said to his sailors : '* We will now set about 
 two things, in that the one day we gather grapes, 
 and the other day cut vines and fell trees, so 
 from thence will be a loading for my ship," and 
 that was the counsel taken, and it is said their 
 
 * Norroenu, i, e. the northern tongue (Dijnsk tunga) being the language 
 then common to Denmark, Norway, Sweaen, Iceland, Greealantl, and part 
 of Britain. Antiq. Amcr. \i. 35. 
 
 F 2 
 
 cii^ 
 
 1:^1 
 
 ' '•'^1 
 
 %■ 
 
.1 
 
 08 
 
 DISCOVRRY OF AMERICA 
 
 l,j ■ I 
 
 HI 
 
 if': . 
 
 h''4 
 1" :\ 
 
 long- boat was filled with grapes. Now was a cargo 
 cut down for the ship, and when the spring came, 
 they got ready, and sailed away, and Leif gave the 
 land a name after its qualities, and called it 
 
 ViNLAND. 
 
 It appears by a communication from Dr. Webb, Secre- 
 tary to the Rhode Island Historical Society, which is given 
 in that part of Professor Rafn's work, entitled Monnmcntim 
 vetustum in Massachusetts, that wild grape vines of several 
 varieties, as well as maize or Indian corn, and other escu- 
 lents, were found gi'owing in that district, in great profu- 
 sion, when it was first visited by the Europeans. Hence 
 the name of Vinland (Vineland), given to the country by 
 Leif, a name mentioned by Adam of Bremen,* Torfajus 
 and Wormius, as well as by Pinkerton and Malte Brun, as 
 designating a country frequently visited by the Northmen. 
 Hence also the modern name of Martha's Vineyard given 
 to the neigliboui'ing island ; and in the adjoining province 
 of Connecticut, Warden states that " La viffne smivarje 
 grimpe de tous cotes sur les arbres."f The narrative con- 
 tinues : — 
 
 They sailed now into the open sea, and had a fair 
 wind until they saw Greenland, and the mountains 
 below the j()klers. Then a man put in his word and 
 said to Leif: " Why do you steer so close to the 
 wind ?" Leif answered : '• I attend to my steering, 
 
 * " Fraiterpa uiiuin adliuc rcyiioiiem recitavit (Svuiiin Ulfsson king of 
 Denmark) u miiltis in eo reportam occano, quae dicitur Win land, eo (luod 
 ibl Kites sfjonte nascnntur vinum optimum ferentcs; nam et fruges ibi non 
 semiiiatas hahundare, non fabulosa opinione, scd certa comperimus rehitiono 
 Oanorum." Adam Brem. T^scriptio de situ Daniae et reliquarum, quie 
 trans Uaniam sunt, regionum. ap. Antiq. Amer. p. 338. 
 
 t II. p. 15. I. p. 456. ap. Antiq. Amer. p. 441. 
 
wm 
 
 
 IIY THE NOIITIIMKN. 
 
 69 
 
 s 
 
 and something more, and can ye not sec any 
 thing ?'* They answered that they could not observe 
 anything extraordinary. •' I know not," said Leif, 
 " whether I sec a ship or a rock." Now looked 
 they, and said it was a rock. But he saw so much 
 sharper than they, that he perceived there were 
 men upon the rock. " Now let us," said Leif, 
 " hold our wind, so that we come up to them, if 
 they should want our assistance ; and the necessity 
 demands that we should help them ; and if they 
 should not be kindly disposetl, the power is in our 
 hands, and not in their's." Now sailed they under 
 the rock, and lowered their sails, and cast anchor, 
 and put out another little boat, which they had with 
 them. Then asked Tyrkcr who their leader was ? 
 He called himself Thorer, and said he was a North- 
 man ; "but what is th?/ name?" said he. Leif 
 told his name. "Art thou a son of Erik the Red, 
 of Brattahlid ?" quoth he. Leif answered that so 
 it was. "Now will I," said Leif, "take ye all on 
 board my ship, and as much of the goods as the 
 ship can hold." They accepted this oifcr, and 
 sailed thereupon to Eriksfjord with the cargo, and 
 thence to Brattahlid, where they unloaded the ship. 
 After that, Leif invited Thorer and his wife Gudrid, 
 and three other men to stop with him, and got 
 berths for the other seamen, as well Thorer 's as 
 his own, elsewhere. Leif took fifteen men from the 
 rock : he wa«, after that, called Leif the Lucky. 
 Leif had now earned both richex and respect. I'he 
 same winter came a hcavv sickness amon<( Thorer's 
 
 r 
 
 '■■% 
 
 i\\ 
 
 I'M 
 
I < 
 
 70 
 
 DISCOVKUY OF AMERICA 
 
 people, and carried off' as well Tliorer himself as 
 many of his men. This winter died also Erik the 
 lied. Now was there much talk ahout Leifs voy 
 age to Vinland, and Thorvald, his brother, thought 
 that the land had been much too little explored. 
 Then said Leif to Thorvald : '• Thou can'st go with 
 my ship, brother! if thou wilt, to Vinland, but 1 
 wish first that the ship should go and fetch the 
 timber, which Thorcr had upon the rock ;" and so 
 was done. 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 THORVALD REPAIRS TO VINLAND. 
 
 A.D. J 002. 
 
 3. Now Thorvald made ready for this voyage 
 with '30 men, and took counsel thereon with Leif 
 his brother. Then made they their ship ready, 
 and put to sea, and nothing is told of their voyage 
 until they came to Leif s booths in Vinland. There 
 they laid up their ship, and spent a pleasant 
 winter,'* and caught fish for tlieir support. But in 
 the spring, said Thorvald, that they should make 
 ready the ship, and that some of the men should 
 take the ship's long boat round the western part of 
 the land, and explore there during the summer. 
 To them appeared the land fair and woody, and 
 but a short distance between the wood and the sea, 
 and white sands ; there were many islands, and 
 much shallow water. They found neither dwellings 
 
 * A, n. 1002—1003. 
 
HY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 71 
 
 of men or boasts, except upon an island, to the 
 westward, where they found a corn-shed of wood,* 
 but many works of men they found not ; and they 
 then went back and came to Leifs booths in the 
 autumn. But the next summer,t went Thorvald 
 eastward with the ship, and round the land to the 
 northward. Here came a heavy storm upon them 
 when off a ness, so that they were driven on shore, 
 and the keel broke off from the ship, and they re- 
 mained here a long time, and repaired their ship. 
 Then said Thorvald to his companions : " Now will 
 I that we fix up the keel here upon the ness, and 
 call it Keelness (Kjalarness),1: and so did they. 
 After that they sailed away round the eastern shores 
 of the land, and into the mouths of the friths, 
 which lay nearest thereto, and to a point of land 
 which stretched out, and was covered all over with 
 wood. There they came to, with the ship, and 
 shoved out a plank§ to the land, and Thorvald 
 went up the country, with all his companions. He 
 then said : " Here is beautiful, and here would I 
 like to raise my dwelling." Then went they to the 
 ship, and saw upon the sands within the promon- 
 tory, three elevations, || and went thither, and saw 
 there three skin boats (canoes),^ and three men 
 under each. Then divided they their people, and 
 caught them all, except one, who got away with his 
 
 ^■' 
 
 
 * Kornhjiilm iif tr6, from horn, corn, and hjalmr, a coverins, hence hclmet- 
 shcd, which signilication also obtains in the Danish language. Antiq. Amcr. 
 p, 41, note a. t A.U. 1004. 
 
 t See Map of Vinl'.UKl, Plate I. $ Bryggjum. 
 
 II HsDdir. f Hudkeipa. 
 
 \<\ 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 // 
 
 
 ^^/ \/1^.4is 
 
 % ..<^,^ 
 
 ^% 
 
 <. '^^ 
 
 /. 
 
 t/. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 V] 
 
 Vl 
 
 ^ # ^ vV 
 
 /^ 
 
 
 'W 
 
 1.0 l^i^ 1^ 
 
 I.I l.*^ ^ 
 
 ULlL. 
 
 .25 11.4 lil.6 
 
 — 6" 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 
 23 WBT MAIN STRKT 
 
 W»STM,N.Y. M580 
 
 (716)872-4503 
 
4* 
 
72 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 
 V 1' 
 
 boat. They killed the other eight, and then went 
 bs,ck to the cape, and looked round them, and saw 
 some heights inside of the frith, and supposed that 
 these were dwellings. After that, so great a drow- 
 siness came upon them, that they could not keep 
 awake, and they all fell asleep. Then came a shout 
 over them, so that they all awoke. Thus said the 
 shout : *' Wake thou I Thorvald ! and all thy 
 companions, if thou wilt preserve life, and return 
 thou to thy ship, with all thy men, and leave the 
 land without delay." Then rushed out from the 
 interior of the frith, an innumerable crowd of skin 
 boats, and made towards them. Thorvald said 
 then: "We will put out the battle-skreen,* and 
 defend ourselves as well as we can, but fight little 
 against them." So did they, and the Skraelingst 
 shot at them for a time, but afterwards ran away, 
 each as fast as he could. Then asked Thorvald his 
 men if they had gotten any wounds j they answered 
 that no one was wounded. " I have gotten a wound 
 under the arm,'* said he, " for an arrow fled be- 
 tween the edge of the ship and the shield, in under 
 my arm, and here is the arrow, and it will prove a 
 mortal wound to me. Now counsel I ye, that ye 
 
 r 
 
 Jir. 
 
 k- 
 
 
 I- 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 * Vigfleka, from vitj battle, andfleki or flaU flai, and broad, hence a shield 
 made of largo planks of wood. 
 
 t Skreelingar. Various definitions have been given of this term, some 
 authors attributing it to the low stature of the Eaquiniaux, who are also 
 called SmcElingar (diminutive men) by Icelandic authors, and others de- 
 ducing it from skrtBla to make dry, in allusion to their withered appearance. 
 The word akrte/ya to cry out, has also been given as tlie etymology of the 
 term, from their hnbit of shouting. Antiq. Amer. p. 45. note a. 
 
• ''as 
 
 BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 7S 
 
 get ready instantly to depart, but ye shall bear me 
 to that cape, where I thought it best to dwell ; it 
 may be that a true word fell from my mouth, that I 
 should dwell there for a time ; there shall ye bury 
 me, and Get up crosses at my head and feet, and 
 call the place Krossaness* for ever in all time to 
 come.'* Greenland was then Christianized, but 
 Erik the Red died before Chiictianity was intro- 
 duced. Now Thorvald died, but they did all things 
 according to his directions, and then went away, 
 and returned to their companions, and told to each 
 other the tidings which they knew, and dwelt there 
 for the winter, and gathered grapes and vines to 
 load the ship. But in the springt they made 
 ready to sail to Greenland, and came with their 
 ship in liJriksQord, and could now tell great tidings 
 to Leif. / 
 
 * This appears to have been Cape or Point Alderton, which is thus 
 described by Hitchcock : — " Supposing the traveller to start, as before, from 
 Boston, the long and narrow neck of land connecting the settlement of Hull 
 with the meNnland, must not be past unvisited. To say nothing of the rocks, 
 which, at the head of this beach, constitute almost the entire surface, 
 rivalling our Cape Ann in this respect, and which, on the shore, present a 
 remarkable and elegant variety of colours, the beach itself, not less than four 
 or five miles in extent, is much more interesting than that lending to Nahunt. 
 The light house, and the Brewstc, ""d other islands in view, as one ad- 
 vanced towards Hull, arc picturesque objects ; and then the pleasant and 
 sunny situation of the little village of Hull, furnishes a convenient resting 
 place for the traveller." Laurie and Whittle's sailing directions also make 
 mention of " a remarkable grove of trees" at this point, as does the Duke of 
 Saxe Weimar in his American travels. Autiq. Amer. p. 431. 
 
 t A. D. 1005. 
 
 
 
 U-^. 
 
 M I 
 
74 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 r' 
 
 i; 
 
 I' '1. 
 ti , it 
 
 V ■ 11: 
 
 
 \\ 
 
 UNSUCCESSFUL VOYAGE OF THORSTEIN ERIKSON. 
 
 A. D. 1005. 
 THORSTEIN ERIKSON DIES IN THE WESTERN SETTLEMENT. 
 
 « 
 
 4. Meantime it had happened in Greenland, that 
 Thorstein in EriksQord married Gudrid, Thorb- 
 jorn's daughter, who had been formerly marriejj to 
 Thore ■ the Eastman,* as is before related.! f Now 
 Thorstein Erikson conceived a desire to go to Vin- 
 land after the body of Thorvald his brother, and he 
 made ready the same ship, and chose great and 
 strong men for the crew, and had with him 25 men, 
 and Gudrid his wife. They sailed away so soon as 
 they were ready, and came out of sight of the land. 
 They drove about in the sea the whole summer, 
 and knew not where they were ; and when the first 
 week of wintert was past, then landed they in Ly- 
 sefjord in Greenland, in the western settlement.^ 
 Thorstein sought shelter for them and procured 
 lodging for all his crew ; but he himself and his 
 wife were without lodging, and they, therefore, re- 
 mained some two nights in the slnp. Then was 
 Christianity yet new in Greenland. Now it came to 
 
 * Austmadr. Such were the Norwegians often called by the Icelanders, 
 Norway lying to the east of their island. Antiq. Amer. p. 47, note a. 
 
 t Namely, in the lost Saga before mentioned called " Erik's Saga," see 
 p. 48. 
 
 X Whilst tlie Julian calendar, introduced after Christianity, was \\\ use 
 amongst titc Icelanders, they considered winter to commence about the 
 17th October. Finn Magnusen ap. Mem. dcs Antiq. du Nord. 183G-1887, 
 p. 179. 
 
 »• h 
 
 p. 
 
M 
 
 ■^'. 
 
 BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 75 
 
 pass one day that some people repaired, early in the 
 morning, to their tent, and the leader of the party 
 asked who was in the tent. Thorstein answered : 
 " Here are two persons, but who asks the ques- 
 tion ?'' " Thorstein is my name," said the other, 
 and I am called Thorstein the black, but my busi- 
 ness here is to bid ye both, thou and thy wife, to 
 come and stop at my house." Thorstein said that 
 he would talk the matter over with his wife, but 
 she told him to decide, and he accepted the bidding. 
 " Then will I come after ye in the morning with 
 horses, for I want nothing to entertain ye both ; 
 but it is very wearisome at my house, for we are 
 there but two, I and my wife, and I am very 
 morose ; I have also a different religion from yours, 
 and yet hold I that for the better which yo have." 
 Now came he after them in the morning with 
 horses, and they went to lodge with Thorstein the 
 black, who shewed them every hospitality. Gudrid 
 was a grave and dignified woman, and therewith 
 sensible, and knew well how to carry herself among 
 strangers. Early that winter came sickness amongst 
 Thorstein Erikson*s men, and there died many of 
 his people. Thorstein had coffins made for the 
 bodies of those who died, and caused them to be 
 taken out to the ship, and there laid; "for I will," 
 said he, " have all the bodies taken to Eriksfjord in 
 the summer." Now it was not long before the 
 sickness came also into Thorstein's house, and his 
 wife, who bight Grimhild took the sickness first ; 
 she was very large, and strong as a man, but still 
 
 PC-.? 
 
 
 1 ;a ' 
 
 
 -y J . 
 
:ii 
 
 76 
 
 DISCOVEIIY OF AMERICA 
 
 did the sickness mabi,cr her. And soon after that, 
 the disease attacked Thorstein Erikson, and they 
 both lay ill at the same time, and Grimhild, the 
 wife of Thorstein the black, died. But when she 
 was dead, then went Thorstein out of the room, 
 after a plank to lay the body upon. Then said 
 Gudrid : " Stay not long away, my Thorstein I'* 
 he answered that so it should be. Then said 
 Thorstein Erikson: " Strangely now is our house- 
 mother* going on, for she pushes herself up on 
 her elbows, and stretches her feet out of bed, and 
 feels for her shoes." At that moment came in the 
 husband Thorstein, and Grimhild then lay down, 
 and every beam in the room creaked. Now Thor- 
 stein made a coffin for Grimhild's body, and took 
 it out, and buried it ; but although he was a large 
 and powerful man, it took all his strength to bring 
 it out of the place. Now the sickness attacked 
 Thorstein Erikson and he died, which his wife 
 Gudrid took much to heart. They were then all in 
 the room ; Gudrid had taken her seat upon a chair 
 beyond the bench, upon which Thorstein, her hus- 
 band, had lain ; then Thorstein the host took Gudrid 
 from the chair upon his knees, and sat down with her 
 upon another bench, just opposite Thorstcin'j? body. 
 He comforted her in many ways, and cheered her 
 up, and promised to go with her to Eriksfjord, with 
 her husband's body, and those of his companions ; 
 " and I will also," added he, "bring many servants 
 to comfort and amuse thee.*' She thanked him. 
 
 * Husfreyju 
 
KY Tlir. NORTHMEN. 
 
 77 
 
 Then Thorstein Erikson sat himself up on the 
 bench, and said : " When is Gudrid ?" Three 
 times said he that, but she answered not. Then 
 said she to Thorstein the host : " Shall I answer 
 his questions or not ?'* He counselled her not to 
 answer. After this, went Thorstein the host across 
 the floor, and sat himself on a chair, but Gudrid 
 sat upon his knees, and he said : •' What wilt thou 
 Namesake ?" After a little he answered : '* I wish 
 much to tell Gudrid her fortune, in order that she 
 may be the better reconciled to my death, for I 
 have now come to a good resting place ; but this 
 can I tell thee, Gudrid ! that thou wilt be married 
 to an Icelander, and ye shall live long together; 
 and have a numerous posterity, powerful, distin- 
 guished, and excellent, sweet and well favoured ; 
 ye shall remove from Greenland to Norway, and 
 from thence to Iceland ; there shall ye live long, 
 and thou shalt outlive him. Then wilt thou go 
 abroad, and travel to Rome, and come back again 
 to Iceland, to thy house j and then will a church 
 be built, and thou wilt reside there, and become a 
 nun, and there wilt thou die." And when he had 
 said these words, Thorstein fell back, and his 
 corpse was set in order, and taken to the ship. 
 Now Thorstein the host kept well all the promises 
 which he had made to Gudrid ; in spring* he sold 
 his farm, and his cattle, and betook himself to the 
 ship, with Gudrid, and all that he possessed ; he 
 made ready the ship, and procured men therefor, 
 
 • A. D. 1006. 
 
 
 •i •■■'', 
 
 i-^ 
 
 {•■■■■ i 
 
 I '.■.:■ .1 
 
 : *l 
 
 ' i It 
 ' I-.-' 
 
 
 11, 
 
 \r^m 
 
 » '' 
 
 ■ M 
 
m 
 
 p= 
 
 It 
 
 
 78 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 and then sailed to Eriksfjord. The bodies were 
 nov/ buried by the Church. Gudrid repaired 
 to Leif in Brattahlid, but Thorstcin the black made 
 himself a dwelling at Eriksfjord, and dwelt there 
 so long as he lived, and was looked upon as a very 
 able wan. 
 
 Iff 
 
 '1 , ■ 
 
 i(- '■' 
 
 This prophetic announcement of Thorstcin Erikson is 
 highly characteristic of the superstition of the times, and 
 although pertaining to the marvellous, is not the less cor- 
 roborative of the authenticity of the narrative. " Such 
 incidents," says Sir Walter Scott, "make an invariable 
 part of the history of a rude age, and the chronicles which 
 do not aftbrd these marks of human credulity, may be 
 grievously suspected as being deficient in authenticity."* 
 
 r'ii f -If 
 
 'l„! 
 
 • Abstract of Eyrbyggla Saga, MisccU. Prose works, Vo!. v. p. 3G5, This 
 interesting abstract first appeared in " Illustrations of Northern Antiqui- 
 ties," 4to. Edinb. 1814, a work of high value and great promise, but which 
 the want of public support compelled the distinguished compilers and anti- 
 quaries Jamieson and Weber, to discontinue. 
 
 ■'}t' 
 
m 
 
 BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 79 
 
 .'0.. 
 
 From iiib IIeimskringla, oh History op the Norwegian Kings, 
 According to the 2n(I Vellum Codex of the ARN/E-MAONi«AN 
 Collection, No. 46, Folio. 
 
 VINLAND THE GOOD IS DISCOVERED. 
 
 The same winter* was Leif, the son of Erik the 
 Red, with Kin^ Olaf, in good repute, and embraced 
 Christianity. But the summer that Gissur went 
 to Iceland, King Olaf sent Leif to Greenland, in 
 order to make known Christianity there ; he sailed 
 the same summer to Greenland. He found, in the 
 sea, some people on a wreck, and helped them ; the 
 same time discovered he Vinland the Good, and 
 came in harvest to Greenland. He had with him 
 a priest, and other clerks, and went to dwell at 
 Brattahlid with Erik, his father. Men called him 
 afterwards Leif the Lucky ; but Erik his father 
 said, that these two things went one against the 
 other, inasmuch as Leif had saved the crew of the 
 ship, but brought evil menf to Greenland, namely 
 the priests. 
 
 * A. D. 009—1000, Antiq. Amer. p. 191, note b. 
 t Skoemanniun. 
 
 "5i 
 
 ■«■■;■ 
 
 W Vi 
 
 "<:« 
 
 4 
 
 
I 
 
 80 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 FnoM TUB IIisTORTt OP Olav Tryogvason, CiiAi'. 231 , 2nd Vki.lum 
 Codex op AuNiu-MAdNyEAN Collection, No. 01, fi4, fi3. Folio. 
 
 
 ( J 
 
 LEIF CHRISTIANIZES GREENLAND. 
 
 The same spring* sent King Olaf, as is before 
 related, Gissur and Hjelte to Iceland. Then sent 
 the king also Leif Erikson to Greenland, to make 
 known Christianity there. The king gave him a 
 priest, and some other holy men, to baptize the 
 people there, and teach them the true faith. Leif 
 sailed that summer to Greenland ; he took up in the 
 sea, the men of a ship, which was entirely lost, anvi lay 
 a complete broken wreck ; and on this same voyage 
 discovered he Vinland the Good, and came in the 
 end of the summer to Greenland ; and went to live 
 at Brattahlid with Erik his ftither. People called 
 him afterwards Leif the Lucky, but Erik his father 
 said that these two things went against each other, 
 since Leif had assisted the crew of the ship, and 
 saved them from death, and that he had brought 
 injurious men (so called he the priests) to Green- 
 land; but still, after the counsel and instigation 
 of Leif, was Erik baptized, and all the people in 
 Greenland. 
 
 • A. D. 1000, Antiq. Amer. 193, note 0. 
 
 I- ; 
 
1 
 
 
 ; 
 
 /■■:> 
 
 J 
 
 ''-■ 
 
 
 t- . 
 
 ••5fiJ 
 
 Ssaqa of COorfinn ltarI0(fnr« 
 
 :| 
 
 j 
 1 f 
 
 !•* 
 
 |;Tv| 
 
 > 'v'l 
 
 
 ,-A 
 
 
 ''£ 
 
 ■_i 
 
 I'. 
 
 • 'i; 
 
 .^ 
 
 
 i 
 
 ' 
 
 ■ 
 
 .■;• 
 
 ."^^ 
 
 ^: 
 
 ft 
 
I. 'I 
 
 HH 
 
 lUSroVF.nV «»l' VAfTJUC.A 
 
 ftAQA of Cftotflinn KArl0(fiir* 
 
 Si ! 
 
 Next in importance; and interest to the Saga of 
 Krik the Rod, is that of Tiiorfinn, with the sig- 
 nificant surname of Karlskfne, i. e. destined to 
 hecome a great man. This distinguished individual 
 was a wealthy and powerful Icelandic merchant, 
 descended from an illustrious line of Danish, Swe- 
 dish, Norwegian, Irish, and Scottish ancestors, 
 some of whom were kings, or of royal hlood. The 
 narrative of his exploits is taken from two antient 
 Icelandic MSS. not previously known to the literati, 
 and one of which, there is every reason to helieve, 
 is a genuine autograph of the celebrated Hauk 
 Erlendson, who was Lagman or Chief Governor of 
 Iceland in ISf^.'J, and one of the compilers of the 
 Landnamabok : he was also a descendant of Karl- 
 sefne in the ninth generation. This very remarkable 
 Saga forms part of the Arnaj-Magnaean collection, 
 and besides short notices of the discoveries of the 
 earlier voyagers, which are more fully described in 
 the Saga of Erik the Red, gives detailed accounts 
 of voyages to, and discoveries in America, carried on 
 by Karlsefne and his companions for a period of 
 three years, commencing in IOO7. Some discre- 
 pancies and misnomers appear in those parts of 
 the narrative, which treat of the personages and 
 
UY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 88 
 
 events recovdod in tho prcccdinir Sa^si, but thov 
 arc only siicli as to procludo all suspicion of con- 
 federacy or fraud on the part of the writers, as all 
 the viaiu facts are substantially the same in both ; 
 and the circumstance of the Saga of Erik having 
 been written in Greenland, while that of Karlsefne 
 was written in Iceland, is sufficient to account for 
 those variations. The same circumstance, also, 
 renders the former the best authority in all matters 
 of detail connected with Greenland, while the other 
 must bo considered more correct respecting o<3cur- 
 rences relating to Iceland. These diflTerences are 
 pointed out in the notes, and where any minor 
 points of interesting detail connected with the 
 voyage of Karlsefne appear in the Saga of Erik the 
 Red, while they arc absent in Karlsefnc's Saga, 
 they have been supplied from that of Erik, the in- 
 terpolation being pointed out. 
 
 TorfsDus imagined that the Saga of Thorfinn 
 Karlsefne was lost, and the only knowledge he had 
 of its contents, was derived from some corrupt ex- 
 tracts contained in the collection of materials for 
 the history of antient Greenland, left by the Ice- 
 landic yeoman Bjorn Johnson of Skardso. 
 
 G 'J 
 
1 1' ,^ 
 
 84 
 
 DISCOVEIIY OF AMERICA 
 
 Jbaga of ^B^itorfinn itarljetrfnr* 
 
 
 I- !■■ . 
 
 GENEALOGY OF THORFINN KARLSEFNE, HIS VOYAGE TO 
 
 GREENLAND, AND MARRIAGE WITH GUDRID, THE WIDOW 
 
 OF THORSTEIN ERIKSON. 
 
 CoroERNiNO THoun r ' Hofda. 
 
 Thord hight a man who lived at H(3fda in 
 Hofda strand ; he married Fridgerda, daughter of 
 Thorer Hyma and Fridgerda daughter of Kjarval, 
 king of the Irish.* Thord was the son of Bjarni 
 Byrdusmjor, son of Thorvald Ryg, son of Asleik, 
 son of Bjarni Jarnsid, son of Ragnar Lodbrok. 
 They had a son called Snorri ; he married Thor- 
 hild Rjupa, daughter of Thord Gellar ; their son 
 was Thord Hesthofdi. Thorfinnn Karlsefne 
 hight Thord's son ; Thorfinn's mother hight 
 Thorum. Thorfinn ^ook to trading voyages, and 
 was thouoht an abl' seaman and merchant. One 
 summer Karlsefne fitted out his ship, and purposed 
 a voyage to Greenland. Snorri Thorb'^andson, of 
 Alptefjord, went with him, and there were forty men 
 in the ship. There was a man hight Bjarni Gri- 
 molfson, of Breidafjord; another hight Thorhall 
 Gamlason, an EastQordish man ; they fitted out 
 their ship the same summer for Greenland : there 
 were also forty men in the ship. Karlsefne and 
 
 * Ira konuni>'. 
 

 RY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 cS.'J 
 
 the others put to sea with these two ships, so soon 
 as they were ready. Nothing is told about how 
 long they were at sea, but it is to be related that 
 both these ships came to EriksQord in the autumn.* 
 Erikt rode to the ship together with several of the 
 inhabitants, and they began to deal in a friendly 
 manner. Both the ship's captainsj begged Erik 
 (Leif) to take as much of the goods as he wished ; 
 but Erik (Leif) on his side, shewed them hospi- 
 tality, and bade the crews of these two ships home, 
 for the winter, to his own house at Brattahlid. 
 This the merchants accepted, and thanked him. 
 Then were their goods removed to Brattahlid ; 
 there was no want of large out-houses to keep the 
 goods in, neither plenty of every thing that was 
 required, wherefore they were well satisfied in the 
 winter. But towards Yule Erik (Leif) began to be 
 silent, and was less cheerful than he used to be. 
 One time tu i.ed Karlsefne towards Erik (Leif) 
 and said : " Hast thou any sorrow, Erik, my friend? 
 people think to see that thou art less cheerful than 
 thou wert wont to be ; tliou hast entertained us 
 with the greatest splendour, and we are bound 
 to return it to thee with such services as we 
 
 
 il.*r 
 
 'J; 
 
 • A. D.IOOO, 
 
 t Thi» is evidently a misnomer tliroughout tlie Saga, uurl sliould be 
 Leif, wlio was now in possession of tlie paternal estate, I'is fatlier Rrik 
 having died, as stated in the former narrative, tlie winter aftt, LeiPs return 
 from Viuland( 1001), and couc.^uently, five years previous to the events 
 recorded here. The Saga of Erik tlie Red, il must be recollected, appears t«i 
 have been written in Greenland, and that nt' Thortinn Karisel'ne, in 
 Iceland, wliicli will account lor this and other discrepancies between tlie 
 two narratn cs. i Styrimcnn. 
 
86 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 
 
 jS 
 
 can command ; say now, what troubles thee ?" 
 Krik (Leif) answered : " Ye are friendly and thank- 
 ful, and I have no fear as concerns our intercourse, 
 that ye will feel the want of attention ; but, on the 
 other hand, I fear that when ye come elsewhere it 
 will be said that ye liave never passed a worse Yule 
 than that, which now approaches, when Erik the 
 Red entertained ye at Brattahlid, in Greenland." 
 "It shall not be so, Yeoman I"* said Karlsefne ; 
 ' * we have in our ship, both malt and corn ; take as 
 much as thou desirest thereof, and make ready a 
 feast as grand as thou wilt!" This Erik (Leif) 
 accepted, and now preparation was made for the 
 feast of Yule, and this feast was so grand that peo- 
 ple thought they had hardly ever seen the like pomp 
 in a poor land. And after Yule, Karlsefne dis- 
 closed to Erik (Leif) that he wished to marry 
 Gudrid, for it seemed to him, as if he must have 
 the power in this matter. Erik answered favour- 
 ably, and said that slie must follow her fate, and 
 that he had heard nothing but good of him ; 
 and it ended so that Thorfinn married Thuridf 
 (Gudrid), and then was the feast extended ; and 
 their marriage was celebrated ; and this happened 
 at Brattahlid, in the winter. 
 
 • Bondi. 
 
 t The daughter of Tliorbjorii is sometimes culled 'J'hiirid and sometimes 
 Gudrid, ill tliis narrative; uiid the Editor tliiiilcs it probable that she was 
 called by the Ibriner name during childhood, but that, afterwards, for reli- 
 gious reasons, the pagan name (derived from the God Thor) was laid 
 aside, and tliut of Gudrid adopted in its place. Autiq. Anier. p, lUO, 
 note a. 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 87 
 
 EXPEDITION TO AND SETTLEMENT IN VINLAND, 
 BY THORFINN KARLSEFNE. 
 
 A.D. 1007. 
 BEGINNING OF THE VINLAND VOYAGE. 
 
 7. In Brattahlid began people to talk nu.ch 
 about, that Vinland the Good should be explored, 
 and it was said that a voyage thither would be par- 
 ticularly profitable by reason of the fertility of the 
 land ; and it went so far that Karlsefne and Snorri 
 made ready their ship to explore the land in the 
 spring. With them went also the before-named 
 men hight Bjarni and Thorhall, with their ship. 
 There was a man hight Thorvard ; he married 
 Freydis, a natural daughter of Erik the Red ; he 
 went also with them, and Thorvald the son of Erik,* 
 and Thorhall who was called the hunter ;t he had 
 long been with Erik, and served him as huntsman 
 in summer, and steward in winter ; he was a large 
 man, and strong, black and like a giant, silent and 
 foul-mouthed in his speech, and always egged ont 
 Erik to the worst ; he was a bad Christian ; he was 
 well acquainted with uninhabited parts, he was in 
 the ship with Thorvard and Thorvald. They had 
 the ship which Thorbjorn had brought out [from 
 
 * Here is again evidently some confusiuu of names, as Tlioivuld Eriksoii's 
 death lias been picviously related in the Saga of Erik tlie Ued,«H4dKaai- 
 Mftie.wtts iiow uMt»MaA~ tttiiia^idow . Q w to id : it seems probable ttiat some 
 otlicr Tliorvald accuinpauicd Karlsefne on this voyage. Sec Autiq. Amcr. 
 I'ruifatio, p. xiv. 1 Vcidimadr. i Eggjadi. 
 
 i 
 
 m 
 
 -■''■- 
 
 ) ■ 
 
 , 'I 
 
 1 <•■ 
 
 
88 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 Iceland]. They had in all 160 men,* when they 
 sailed to the western settlement, and from thence to 
 Bjanney. Then sailed they two daysf to the 
 south ; then saw they land, and put off boats, 
 and explored the land, and found there great 
 flat R tones, ;|: many of which were 12 ells broad: 
 foxes were there. They gave the land a name, 
 and called it Helluland.§ Then sailed they two 
 days, II and turned from the south to the south- 
 east, and found a land covered with wood, and 
 many wild beasts upon it ; an island lay there out 
 from the land to the south-east ; there killed they 
 a bear, and called the place afterwards Bear 
 island,^ but the land Markland. Thence sailed 
 they far to the southward along the land, and came 
 
 
 * Literally *' 40 men and a hundred" [40 manna oh hundrad] but the 
 great or long hundred must bo understood, consisting of 12 decades, or 120. 
 Antiq. Amer. p. 137, note b. Thus Teyner, describing the drinking hall of 
 Frithiof: — 
 
 " Ei femhundrade mtin [til tio tolfter pa hundrat] 
 
 Fyllde den rymliga sal, ndr dc samlats att dricka om Julen." 
 
 FrithiofsSagalll.p. 18. 
 
 Not five hundred men (though ten twelves you count to the hundred;, 
 Could fill that wide hall, when they gathered to banquet at Yule. 
 
 t 2 Da?gr. t Hellur storar, see ante, p. 60, note §. 
 
 § The whole of the northern coast of America, west of Greenland, was 
 called by the antient Icelandic geographers Hellulnud it Mikla, or Great 
 Heliuland ; and the island of Newfoundland simply Hcliuland, or Litla 
 Hclluland. See Plate II. and Antiq. Amer. p. 419. || 2 Doegr. 
 
 % Djannoy, from Bjorn a bear, gen. bjarnar, and cy island ; hence 
 Bjarney contracted from rjarnarey ; but the common pronunciation of the 
 latter is Bjadney or Bjanney. Antiq. Amer. p. 138, note c. This would 
 appear to have been Cape Sable Island on the 8. coast of Nova Scotia, but 
 the same name was also given by the Northmen to the present island of 
 Disco. See supra, and Antiq. Amer. pp. 413 — 424. 
 
 i 11 
 
' t 
 
 BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 89 
 
 to a ness ; the land lay upon the right ; there 
 were long and sandy strands. They rowed to land, 
 and found there upon the ness, the keol of a ship, 
 and called the place Kjalarness,* and the strands 
 they called Furdustrands,f for it was long to sail 
 by them. Then became the land indented with 
 coves J'! they ran the ship into a cove. King Olaf 
 Tryggvason had given Leif two Scotch people, a 
 man hight Haki, and a woman hight Hekja ; they 
 were swifter than beasts. These people were in the 
 ship with Karlsefne ; but when they had sailed 
 past Furdustrands, then set they the Scots on shore, 
 and bad them run to the southward of the land, 
 and explore its qualities, and come back again 
 within three days.§ They h&d a sort of clothing 
 which they called kjafal,|| which was so made that 
 
 » Se ante, Saga of Erik the Red, p. 71. 
 
 t Furdustrandir, from furda, gen. furdu, wonderful, and strand, pi. 
 strandir, beach. This name scenia to have been given to the eastern rihore!> 
 of the peninsula of Barnstable or Cape Cod, including Nauset, C'.iatham, 
 and Mouomey beach, and to have had its origin cither in the remarkably 
 white sands mentioned by Hitchcock, or in a natural phenomenon, thus de- 
 scribed by the same author : — " In crossing the sands of the Cape, I noticed 
 a singular mirage or dece])tiiin. In Orlcins, for instance, we seemed to be 
 ascending at an angle of three or four degrees ; nor was I convinced that 
 such was not the case, until turning about, I perceived that a similar ascent 
 appeared in the readjust passed over.'' — Anticj. Am. p. 427. 
 
 \ Vugskorid. § 3 Doigr. 
 
 II A remarkable similitude is pointed out by the Editor between this term 
 and the Anglo-Saxon word ceaval, by which the Greek Ko^ivotj, (a basket,) 
 is rendered in the (Gospel of St. Matthew, c. xiv. v. 20, and St. Mark, c. vi. 
 V. 45,) Anglo-Saxon version of the Bible. From the different inflections of 
 the word given by Professor Rafn, namely, cavl, caul, couuel, — in con- 
 junction with the description in the text, it seems also probable that the 
 English word coiol is derived from the same source. Antiq. Anier. p. 140, 
 note a. 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 k;-;' 
 
 ,; J 
 

 90 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 I ! 
 
 
 V "^ 
 
 ■f-J 
 
 a hat was on the top, and it was open at the sides, 
 and no arms to it ; fastened together between the 
 legs, with buttons and clasps, but in other places it 
 was open. They staid away tlie appointed time, 
 but when they came back, the one had in the hand 
 a bunch of grapes,* and the other, a new sowen ear 
 of wheat :t these went on board the ship, and after 
 that sailed they farther. They sailed into a frith -, 
 there lay an island before it, round which there 
 were strong currents, therefore called they it Stream 
 island.;]: There were so many eider ducks§ on the 
 island, that one could scarcely walk in consequence 
 of the eggs. They called the place Stream-frith. || 
 They took their cargo froni the ship, and prepared 
 to remain there. They had with them all sorts of 
 cattle. The country there was very beautiful. 
 They undertook nothing but to explore the land. 
 
 * Viiiberja kiiiignl 
 
 t Ilvcitiax nysi'iid. This wan, no doubt, the inuizc or Indian corn, — 
 tlic '* friigcs non seminatas" of Adam of liremcn, — which, as well as beans, 
 pumpkin?, and squashes, were found growing in the State of Massachusetts, 
 wli.u first visited by the whites. Sec Report of Rhode Isl. Hist. Soc. 
 Antiq. Anier. p. 308. 
 
 t Straumey. 
 
 ^ " Eine ausserordentliche mcngc von wilden Giinscn und Entcn, untcr 
 welchen der Eider vogel auf den unbewohnten Inseln hiiufig ist." Ebeling. 
 Geschich. v. Amer. vi. p. 210. 
 
 II Straumfjord and Straumey, from atraw/ir a current, ey island, aaA fjord 
 frith, the former appears to have been Buzzard's Bay, and the island that of 
 Martha's Vineyard, then probably united to Nantucket. The strong currents 
 clearly denote tlie great " Gulph stream," which, rushing from the Gulph 
 of Mexico, with impetuous force, passes between Cuba and the southern 
 point of East Florida, where, turning northward, it shapes its course between 
 the eastern continent and the Bahama isles, until changed again to the 
 eatitwurd by the shoals of Nantucket, it is finally lost among the extended 
 barrens of Newfoundland. 
 
IJY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 91 
 
 They were there for the winter without having pro- 
 vided food beforehand. In the summer the fishing 
 declined, and they were badly off for provisions •, 
 then disappeared Thorhall the huntsman. They 
 had previously made prayers to God for food, but 
 it did not come so (juick as they thought their 
 necessities required. They searched after Thorhall 
 for three days,* and found him on the top of a 
 rock ; there he lay, and looked up in the sky, and 
 gaped both with nose and mouth, and murmured 
 something ; they asked him why he had gone 
 there ; he said it was no business of theirs ; they 
 bade him come hoine with them, and he did so. 
 Soon after, came there a whale, and they went 
 thither, and cut it up, and no one knew what sort 
 of whale it was ; and when the cook dressed it, 
 then ate they, and all became ill in consequence.t 
 
 * 3 Da;gr. Tlicrc eccuih to be considerable unibiguif y about the Icelandic 
 words d;ijr and dwgr, which are arbitrarily used to express eitlier the 
 natural day of 24 hours, or the artiiicial day of 12 hours. Throughout this 
 iind tliu preceding narrative, dwgr is considered by tlie Editor to mean the 
 artiiicial day, and dagr the natural day, hence 2 dcegr is rendered "u 
 day and night" [Dan. "en Dag og en Nat'' — Lat. "noctem dicmque"] 
 and 3 ilccgr, " three half natural days" (30 hours) [Dun. " trc halve 
 Dbgn.'' Lat. "tria nychthcmeriuir ."] But in a subsequent narrative: — 
 (De Ario Mario Tilii, Antiq. Anier. p. 211,) we And VI dcegr renJered, in 
 the Danish version " G Diign," and, in the Latin, " sex dierum," thus ap- 
 plying the word dagr to the natural day of 24 hours. Finn Magnusen, 
 also, expressly states that the artificial day was called dagr, and the natural 
 day dagr. See Mem. de la Soc. Roy. des Antiq. du Nord. 1836-1837, 
 p. lt)5. 
 
 t This whale was probably a species of the Balsena physalis of Linnaeus, 
 which was not edible, and being rarely seen in the Greenland and Iceland 
 seas, was unknown to the Northmen. A kind of whale called Ualsona mys- 
 ticetus is mentioned by Ebeling, us having been formerly found on the 
 coasts of Rhode -oland and Massachusetts, re-visiting the more southern 
 
 I! 
 
 
 Mi 
 
92 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 Ei '0 
 
 J ,1 
 
 Then said Thorhall : *' The red bearded* was more 
 helpful than your Christ ; this havo I got now for 
 my verses that I sung of Thor, my protector j sel- 
 dom has he deserted me.'* But when they came to 
 know this, they cast the whole whale into the sea, 
 and resigned their case to God. Then the weather 
 improved, and it was possible to row out fishing, 
 and they were not then in want of provisions, for 
 wild beasts were caught on the land, and fish in 
 the sea, and eggs collected on the island. 
 
 ; 1 
 
 In the account of these transactions, given in the Saga 
 of Erik the Red, it is stated that a son was born to Gudrid 
 during this autumn (1007); which statement is corrobo- 
 rated in a subsequent part of the present narrative. The 
 child was called Snorri, and from this first of European 
 
 latitudes in winter, and returning nortliwards in the spring ; in after timen, 
 however, they disappeared altogether from the coasts ; and in the present 
 day the number of whales in northern latitudes has much -iiminished. Off 
 the mouth of the Pettaquamscut River, in Narraganset Bay, is a rock 
 called Whale Rock. See Plate I- and Antiq. Amer. p. 444. 
 
 * Thor the eldest son of Odin and Frigga, the strongest of the Aser, and 
 next to Odin in rank. 
 
 " Therj sits on golden throne 
 Aloft the god of war, 
 Savj Odin, yields to none 
 'Mongst gods great Aser, Thor." 
 
 Oehlenschliiger — Pigott's Translation. 
 
 The introduction of Christianity being but recent in Iceland, many of the 
 Northmen still believed in Thor, or embracing the new religion with a 
 wavering faith, applied to the Aser gods in cases of difficulty. " The re- 
 mains of the worship of Tlior lingered longer in the North than those of any 
 of the other Scandinavian deities. In Nial's Saga, a female Skald says to a 
 Christian — ' Do yuu not know that Thor has challenged your Christ to 
 single combat, and that he dares not fight him ?' " Pigott's Scandinavian 
 Mythology, p. 101. 
 
 » 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 93 
 
 blood born in America, the celebrated sculptor Thorvald- 
 son, as well as many other eminent Scandinavians, is 
 lineally descended.* 
 
 OF KARLSEFNE AND THORHALL. 
 8. So is said, that Thorhall would go to the north- 
 ward along Furdustrands, to explore Vinland, but 
 Karlsefne would go southwards along the coast. 
 Thorhall got ready, out under the island, and there 
 were no more together than nine men ; but hW the 
 others went with Karlsefne. Now when Thorhall 
 bore water to his ship, and drank, then sung he 
 this song : — 
 
 People told me when I came 
 Hither, all would be so fine ; 
 The good Vinland, known to fame, 
 Rich in fruits, and choicest wine ; 
 Now the water pall they send ; 
 To the fountain I must bend, 
 Nor from out this land divine 
 Have I quaffed op'j drop of wine. 
 
 And when they were ready, and hoisted sail, then 
 chaunted Thorhall : — 
 
 Let our trusty band 
 Haste to Fatherland ; 
 Let our vessel brave, 
 Plough the angry wave. 
 While those few who love 
 Vinland, here may rove, 
 Or, with idle toil, 
 Fetid whales may boil, 
 Here on Furdustrand 
 Far from Fatherland.t 
 
 * See Genealogical Tables in Appendix. 
 
 t In the original all these verses bear the stamp of the 10th and 11th 
 centuries. Antiq. Amer. p. 144, note a. 
 
 m 
 
 
 - « I 
 
'S I 
 
 94 
 
 UISCOVKUY OF AMEUICA 
 
 After that, sailed they northwards ])ast Furdu- 
 strands, and Kjalarness, and would cruize to the 
 westward ; then came against them a strong west 
 wind, and they were driven away to Ireland, and 
 were there beaten, and made slaves, according to 
 what the merchants have said. 
 
 9. Now is to be told about Karlsefne, that he 
 went to the southward along the coast, and Snorri 
 and Bjarni, with their people. They sailed a long 
 time, and until they came to a river, which ran out 
 from the lund, and through a lake, out into the sea. 
 It was verv shallow, and one could not enter the 
 river without high water. Karlsefne sailed, with 
 his people, into the mouth, and they called the 
 place Hop.* They found there upon the land, 
 self-sown fields of wheat,t there where the ground 
 was low, but vines there where it rose somewhat. 
 Every stream there was fuP of fish. They made 
 holes there where the land commenced, and the 
 waters rose highest ; and when the tide fell, there 
 
 * I Hopi, from the Icelandic word hopa to recede, and may signify here, 
 citlier the recess formed by the confluence of a river and the sea, or the 
 mouth of the river, or merely tlie inlet of the sea into which tlie river falls. 
 This description corresponds exactly with the situation of the present Mount 
 Hope Bay, through which the Taunton river flows, being connected with 
 the sea by the Pocasset river and Seaconnet Passage (see Plate !.)• Hence 
 the name of Hop given by the Northmen to tliis settlement, which, it is 
 probable, was situated upon a beautiful elevation that rises above the bay, 
 and which was afterwards called by the Indians Mont'Haup (pron. Hope). 
 It appears also from a communication made to Professor Rafn by the Secre- 
 tary of the Rhode Island Historical Society, that a tradition was current 
 amongst tlie oldest Indians, of a wooden house swimming upon the river 
 Assoonct ( Pocasset), and containing men of onother country, who fought 
 the Indians with great success. Autiq. Amer. p. 374. 
 
 t Sjolfsarta hveitiakrnr. Sec p. 90, note t. 
 
 i!t' 
 
 "I* 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 95 
 
 were sacred fish* in the holes. Tliero were a great 
 number of all kinds of wild beasts in the woods. 
 They remained there a half month, and amused 
 themselves, and did not perceive any thing [new] : 
 they had their cattle with them. And one morn- 
 ing early, when they looked round, saw they a 
 great many canoes, and poles were swung upon 
 them, and it sounded like the wind in a straw- 
 stack, and the swinging was with the sun. Then 
 said Karlsefnc : '* What may this denote?" Snorri 
 Thorbrandson answered him : " It may be that this 
 is a sign of peace, so let us take a white shield, and 
 hold it towards them ;" and so did they. Upon 
 this the others rowed towards them, and looked 
 with wonder upon those that they met, and went up 
 upon the land. These people were black, and ill 
 favoured, and had coarse hair on the head ; they 
 had large eyes and broad cheeks.f They remained 
 
 I .-.;■ 
 
 ■-.-.J • 
 
 ■ .** 
 ■.J. 
 
 * Helgir flskar. This is supposed to liavc been tlie species of flounder or 
 fiai Hah called by the English, HoIibut(PIeuroncctes hippoglossus Linn. Hip- 
 poglossus vulgaris Cuv.) and which is still called in Iceland "holy fish," 
 (heilagfiski) a name given, according to Pliny, in consequence of the pre- 
 sence of these flsh being considered to denote safe water. Speaking of the 
 danger to be apprehended from the dog-fish, he adds : " Certissima est se- 
 curitas vidisse pianos pitees, quia nunquam sunt, ubi malefictB bestioe : qua 
 de causa urinantes saerot appellant cos." — Hist. Nat. Lib. ix. The Report 
 of the Rhode Island Historical Society states that « The flat flsh, and most 
 of the Pleuronectes, including the Ilolibut, frequent our waters ;'* and War- 
 den says : — " II y a une grande abondance de poissons de presquc toutes les 
 especes. On en voitjusqu' & quatre-vingts differcntes hu march^de New- 
 port. La morue, leflitau, I'esturgeon, I'alose, et d'autres poissons fourmil- 
 lent autour des iles Nantucket." I. pp. 608. 201. Ebeling also says: — 
 " Alle Fliisse sind sehr fischreich." See Antiq. Amer. pp. 148, 367, 445. 
 
 t This description of tlic Skrcelings corresponds exactly with the appear- 
 ance of the present Esquimaux. 
 
 ( ■.■ 
 
96 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMKRICA 
 
 In < 
 
 there for a time, and gazed upon those that they 
 met, and rowed, afterwards, away to the southward, 
 round the ness. 
 
 10. Karlsefno and his people had made their 
 dwellings above the lake, and some of the houses 
 were near the water, others more distant. Now 
 were they there for the winter ; there came no 
 snow, and all their cattle fed themselves on the 
 grass.* But when springt approached, saw they 
 one morning early, that a number of canoes rowed 
 from the south round the ness j so many, as if the 
 sea was sowen with coal ; poles were also swung on 
 each boat. Karlsefhe and his people then raised 
 up the shield, and when they came together, they 
 began to barter; and these people would rather 
 have red cloth [than any thing else] ; for this they 
 had to offer skins and real furs. They would, also, 
 purchase swords and spears, but this Karlseftie and 
 Snorri forbad. For an entire fur skin the Skrae- 
 lings took a piece of red cloth, a span long, and 
 
 t- • 
 
 i . 
 
 * " Most winters a scanty subsistence might be procured by cattle ; but 
 this is not depended on. Farmers generally house their cattle in winter ; 
 but wV 'ther this was formerly the case or not, we cannot say : we do not 
 consir f i< it absolutely necessary ; although a prudent husbandman will do 
 it. Some individuals in that vicinity, do not shelter their sheep, and say 
 they thrive well and become robust. On the island of Nantucket, east of 
 Martha's Vineyard, one of the most bleak, sterile, and to the agriculturist, 
 forbidding spots we have, the sheep ure not, and have not been, since its 
 first settlement, housed or protected in any manner whatever. Severe win- 
 ters, of course, hundreds die of cold and hunger. In the Narraganset 
 country, situated west of the Bay, sheep are sometimes kept in the open 
 air through the winter season." — Rep. of Rhode Island Hist. Society, 
 Antiq. Amer. p. 308. Compare ante, p. 64, 
 
 t A.D. 1009. 
 
 
n 
 
 ■ n 
 
 »Y THK NOIITIIMKN. })7 
 
 bound it round their heads. Thus went on their 
 traffic for a time ; then the cloth be<ran to f<»ll 
 short among Karlsefnc and his people, and the^ 
 cut it asunder into small pieces, which were not 
 wider than the breadth of a finger, and still the 
 Skrajlings gave just as much for that as before, and 
 more. 
 
 The Saga of Erik the Red, in giving an acooutit of this 
 transaction, adds that Karlscfno, on the cloth being ex- 
 pended, hit upon the expedient of making the women take 
 out milk porridge to the Skrailings, wlio, as soon as they 
 saw this new article of commerce, would buy the porridge 
 and nothing else. " Thus," says the Saga, " the traffic of the 
 Skra;lings was wound up by their bearing away their pur- 
 chases in their stomachs, but Karlsefne and his companions 
 retained their goods and skins."* 
 
 11. It happened that a bull, which Karlsefne 
 had, ran out from the wood and roared aloud ; 
 this frightened the Skrajlings, and they rushed to 
 their canoes, and rowed away to the southward, 
 round the coast : after that they were not seen for 
 three entire weeks. But at the end of that time, a 
 great number of Skraelings' ships were seen coming 
 from the south like a rushing torrent ; all the poles 
 were turned from the sun, and they all howled very- 
 loud. Then took Karlsefne's people a red shield, 
 and held it towards them. The Skrselings jumped 
 out of their ships, and after this, went they against 
 each other, and fought. There was a sharp shower 
 of weapons, for the Skraelings had slings. t Karl- 
 
 Antiq. Amer. pp. .'59-CO. 
 
 t Valslongiir. 
 
 I:: 
 
 
 11 
 
 lis I;. ■;• 
 
 • M (,-: 
 
 H 
 
' ,' ^]l 
 
 98 
 
 DISCOVERY or AMERICA 
 
 
 sefne's people saw that they raised up on a pole, an 
 enormous large ball, something like a sheep's 
 pauncl% and of a blue colour; this swung they 
 from the pole over Karlsefne's men, upon the 
 ground, and it made a frightful crash as it fell 
 down.* This caused great alarm to Karlsefne and 
 all his people, so that they thought of nothing but 
 running away, and they fell back along the river, 
 for it appeared to them that the Skrajlings pressed 
 upon them from all sides ; and they did not stop 
 until they came to some rocks, where they made a 
 stout resistance. Freydis came out and saw that 
 Karlsefne's people fell back, and she cried out: 
 " Why do ye run, stout men as yo are, before these 
 miserable wretches, whom I thought ye would 
 knock down like cattle ? and if I had weapons, 
 methinks I could fight better than any of ye." 
 They gave no heed to her words. Freydis " "uld 
 go with them, but she was slower, because she was 
 pregnant ; however she followed after them into 
 the wood. The Skra3lings pursued her ; she found 
 a dead man before her ; it was Thorbrand Snorra- 
 son, and there stood a flat stone stuck in his head ; 
 the sword lay naked by his side ; this took she up, 
 and prepared to defend herself. Then came the 
 Skraelings towards her ; she drew out her breasts 
 
 • The nature of this missile does not exactly appear, but it probably had 
 some affinity with the harpoon used by the Esquimaux i>i fishing, and to 
 ^rhlch is attached a bladder, as well for the purpose of directing the weapon, 
 as of marking its position after having been thrown. In the present in- 
 stance, stoues would appear to have been added to this contrivance. 
 Antiq. Amer. p. 152, note b. 
 
 I\- 
 
15V Tin: NORTHMEN. 
 
 99 
 
 
 from under lier clothes, and dashed them against 
 the naked sword ; hy this the Skrajlings l)ccamo 
 frightened, and ran off to their ships, and rowed 
 away. Karlsefns and his people then came up, 
 and praised her courage. Two men fell on Karl- 
 sefne's side, but a number of the Skrajlings. Karl- 
 sefne's band was overmatched, and they now drew 
 home to their dwellings, and bound their wounds ; 
 and they thought over what crowd that could have 
 been, which had pressed upon them from the land 
 side, and it now appeared to them that it could 
 scarcely have been real people from the ships, but 
 that these must have been optical illusions.* The 
 Skrajlings found also a dead man, and an axe lay 
 by him ; one of them took up the axe, and cut 
 wood with it, and now one after another did the 
 same, and thought it was an excellent thing, and 
 bit well ; after that one took it, and cut at a stone, 
 so that the axe broke, and then thought they it, 
 was of no use, because it would not cut stone, and 
 they threw it away. 
 
 12. Karlsefnc and his people now thought they 
 saw, that although the land had many good qua- 
 lities, still would they be always exposed there to 
 the fear of hostilities from the earlier inhabitants. 
 They proposed, therefore, to depart, and return to 
 their own country. They sailed northwards along 
 the coast, and found five Skrailings clothed in skins, 
 sleeping near the sea. They had with them vessels 
 containing animal marrow mixed with blood. 
 
 * Sjonhverflngar, 
 H f2 
 
 ii'*^"' 
 
 
 ■I- 
 
 '^ th 
 
 
 1:^ y 
 
i 
 
 ii i': 
 
 : ; :■ -ii 
 
 8? ^^■ 
 
 100 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 Karlsefne's people thought they understood that 
 these men had been banished from the land : tliey 
 killed them. After that came they to a ness,* and 
 many wild beasts were there, and the ness was 
 covered all over with dung, from the beasts .vhich 
 had lain there during the night. f Now came they 
 back to Straumfjord,;]: and there was abundance of 
 every thing that they wanted to have. It is some 
 mens sa?/j that Bjnrni and Giidrid remained be- 
 hindy and 100 men with them^ and did not go further ; 
 but that K arise fne and Sr^orri went southwards^ 
 and 40 men ivith themf and were not longer in 
 Hope than barely two months, and, the same sum- 
 mer, came back.^ Karlsefne went then with one 
 sliip to seek after Thorhall the hunter, but the rest 
 remained behind, and they sailed northwards past 
 Kjalarncss, and thence westwards, and the land 
 was upon their larboard || hand ; there were wild 
 woods over all, as far as they could see, and scarcely 
 
 * Perhaps Cliipijinoxct Point. This would appear to allude to a short 
 expedition made up Narraganset Bay, after their departure from Hope. See 
 Plate I. 
 
 t " Numerous animals formerly inhabited these parts, particularly the 
 De/T (Cervus Virginianus), Fox, both red and gray (Canis Vulpes, fulvus et 
 Virsinianiis), Wolf (Canis Lupus occidentalis), Woodchuck (Arctomys 
 monax) . . . the Weasel (Mustela), Skunk (Mephitis Amerie.) Wolverine 
 (Gulo Inscus), and the Black Bear (Ursns Amerie). A great variety of 
 other animals were common here before the woods were cleared, and the 
 State very generally settled." — Rep. Rhode Ts^ Hist. Soc. Antiq. Amer. 
 p. 3fi4. I A.D. 1009. 
 
 ^ This passage is evidently the statement of an imperfect tradition, to 
 which the writer of the Saga gave no credit ; and although only ihvolving 
 a question of time, it must be rejected as inconsistent with the previous 
 details : its insertion, however, is strongly characteristic of the candour and 
 honesty of the writer, who is obviously desirous of stating all that he has 
 heard upon the subject. || Hakborda. 
 
HY THK NOUTIIMFV. 
 
 101 
 
 any open places. And when thtv had long sailed, 
 a river fell out of tlie land from east to west ; they 
 put in to the mouth of the river, and lay by its 
 southern bank. 
 
 .hv. 
 
 W ::.,1 
 
 DEATH OF THORVALD ERIKSON. 
 
 •h 
 
 lie 
 
 las 
 
 13. It happened one morning that Karlsefne and 
 his people saw, opposite an open place in the wood, 
 a speck which glistened in their sight, and they 
 shouted out towards it, and it was a uniped,* which 
 thereupon hurried down to the bank of the river, 
 where they lay. Thorvald Erikson stood at the 
 helm, and the uniped shot an arrow into his bowels. 
 Thorvald drew out the arrow, and said : '* It has 
 killed nie ! — to a fruitful land have we come, but 
 hardly shall we enjoy any benefit from it." Thor- 
 vald soon after died of this wound.t Upon this 
 the uniped ran away to the northward ; Karlsefne 
 and his people went after him, and saw him now 
 
 * Eilifoetlngr, from ein, one, and fotrfoot. This term appears to have 
 been given by antient writers to some of the Indian tribes, in consequence 
 of the peculiarity of their dress, which Wormskiold describes as a triangular 
 cloth, hanging down so low, both before and beliind, that the feet were 
 concealed. In an old miscellaneous work, called Riinbegla, published at 
 Copenhagen iu 1780, a people of tiiis denomination, inhabiting Blaland in 
 Ethiopia, arc thus described: — " Einfoctingar hafa svti mikinn fot vid jord, 
 at their skyggja str mcd honum vid solarhita i svefni," i. e. says Professor 
 Rafn : — " Unipedes plantam pedis tam nmplam habent, ut ipsis dormien- 
 tibns sit umbraculi." Antiq. Amer. p. 158, note a. 
 
 t This is either an incorrect version of the death of Thorvald Erikson, 
 which is given in the Saga of Erik the Red, pp. 72-73, or an account of »he 
 fate of some other Thorvald, who accompanied the expedition. 
 
 ;ii; 
 
 ly 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 r-v";'l 
 
 I,.-,.:- 
 
1()'2 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 r r 
 
 and then, and the last time they saw him, he ran 
 out into a bay. Then turned thev back, and a man 
 chaunted these verses : — 
 
 It T 
 
 I 5 . ■" 
 
 The people chased 
 A Uniped 
 
 Down to the beach, 
 Hut lo ! he ran 
 Straight o'er the sea — 
 Hear thou, Thortinn ! 
 
 They drew off then, and to the northward, and 
 thought they saw the country of the Unipeds ; they 
 would not then expose their people any longer. 
 They looked upon the mountain range that was at 
 Hope ; and that which they now found, as all one,* 
 and it also appeared to be equal length from 
 Straumtjord to both places. The third winter! 
 were they in Straumtjord. They now became much 
 divided by party feeling, and the women were the 
 cause of it, for those who were unmarried would 
 injure those that were married, and hence arose 
 great disturbance. There was born the first au- 
 tumn,! Snorri, iCarlsefne's son, and he was three 
 years old when they went away. When they 
 sailed from V inland they had a south wind, and 
 came then to Markland, and found there five 
 Skraslings, and one was bearded ; two were fe- 
 males, and two boys ; they took the boys, but the 
 others escaped, and the Skra^lings sank down 
 
 * Probably the Blue Hills in iVorfolk county, which stretch from 
 Milton southwards towards the Taunton river. See Plate I. 
 t A. n. lOOO-lOlO. i A. U. 1007, see ante p. 92. 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 103 
 
 '■.'^i 
 
 in the ground.* These two boys took they 
 with them ; they taught them the language, and 
 they were baptized. They called their mother 
 Vathelldi, and their father Uvsege. They said 
 that two kings ruled over the SkrsBlings, and that 
 one of them was hight Avalldania, but the other 
 Valldidida. They said that no houses wore there ; 
 people lay in caves or in holes. They said there 
 was a land on the other side, just opposite their 
 country, where people lived who wore white clothes, 
 and carried poles before them, and to these were 
 fastened flags,, and they shouted loud ; and people 
 think that this was White-man's-Land, or Great 
 
 iRELAND.t 
 
 1 i. Bjarni Grimolfson was driven with his ship, 
 into the Irish ocean, and they came into a worm- 
 sea,:j: and straightway began the ship to sink under 
 them. They had a boat which was smeared with 
 seal oil, for the sea- worms do not attack that ; they 
 went into the boat, and then saw that it could not 
 hold them all ; then said Bjarni : " Since the boat 
 cannot give room to more than the half of our men. 
 
 
 
 i ■■•;■* 
 
 I ,.. : 
 
 * Probably retired into caves where they dwelt. Sec infra. 
 
 t llvitratnannaland eda Irland ed mykla. See Minor Narratives, Part 
 
 iTi. 
 
 X Madksjo. Probably waters infested with the teredo navalis, from 
 which the ships of Columbus received such injury in a more southern lati- 
 tude. "The seamen were disheartened by the constant opposition of the 
 winds and currents, and by the condition of the ships, which were pierced 
 on all parts, by the teredo or worm.'' Irving's Columbus, p. 287. '• Con- 
 tiiming along the coast eastward, he was obliged to abandon one of the 
 caravels in the harbour of Puerto Bello, being so pierced by the teredo, 
 that it was impossible to keep her afloat." lb. p. 303. The teredo luivalis 
 and its destructive eft'ects may still be seen on the south coast of Ireland. 
 

 mm 
 
 ' 
 
 \0'h 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 I : 
 
 it is my counsel that lots should he drawn, for those 
 to go in the hoat, for it shall not be according to 
 rank." This thought they all so high-minded an 
 offer, that no one would speak against it ; they 
 then did so that lots were drawn, and it fell upon 
 Bjarni to go in the boat, and the half of the men 
 with him, for the boat had not room for more. 
 But when they had gotten into the boat, then said 
 an Icelandic man, who was in the ship, and had 
 come with Bjarni from Iceland : " Dost thou in- 
 tend, Bjarni, to separate from me here?" Bjarni 
 answered : "So it turns out." Then said the 
 other : " Very different was thy promise to my 
 father, when I went with thee from Iceland, than 
 thus to abandon me, for thou said'st that we should 
 both share the same fate." Bjarni replied: " It 
 shall not be thus ; go thou down into the boat, and 
 I will go up into the ship, since I see that thou 
 art so desirous to live." Then went Bjarni up 
 into the ship, but this man down into the boat, 
 and after that continued they their voyage, until 
 they came to Dublin in Ireland,* and told there 
 these things ; but it is most people's belief that 
 Bjarni and his companions were lost iii the wormr 
 sea, for nothing was heard of them since that 
 time. J 
 
 * At this period tlic Nortlimen were still numerous in the sea-port towns 
 of I.'elancI, Sitric the Dane being King of Dublin. See Moore, Vol. II. 
 p. 106. 
 
 ' ■ I- 
 
 
IJY THE NORTHMliN. 
 
 105 
 
 POSTERITY OF KARLSEFNE AND THURID HIS WIFE. 
 
 15. The next summer* went Karlsefnc to Ice- 
 land, and Gudrid with him, and he went home to 
 Reynisness. His mother thought that he had 
 made a bad match, and therefore was Gudrid not 
 at home the first winter. But when she observed 
 that Gudrid was a distinguished woman, went she 
 home, and they agreed very well together. The 
 daughter of Snorri Karlsefnesson was Hallfrid, 
 mother to Bishop Thorlak Runolfson. They had 
 a son who Thorbjorn bight, his daughter hight 
 Thorunn, mother to Bishop Bjorn. Thorgeir hight 
 the son of Snorri Karlsefnesson, father to Yngvild, 
 mother of Bishop Brand the first. A daughter of 
 Snorri Karlsefnesson was also Steinum, who mar- 
 ried Einar, son of Grundarketil, son of Thorvald 
 Krok, the son of Thorer, of Espihol ; their son was 
 Thorstein Ranglatr ; he was father to Gudrun, who 
 married Jorund of Keldum ; their daughter was 
 Halla, mother to Flose, father of Valgerde, mother 
 of Herr Erlend Sterka, father of Herr Hauk the 
 Lagman.t Another daughter of Flose was Thordis, 
 mother of Fru Ingigerd the rich ; her daughter was 
 Fru Hallbcra, Abbess of Stad at Reinisness. Manv 
 other great men in Iceland are descended from 
 Karlsefnc and Thurid, who are not here mentioned. 
 God be with us ! Amen I 
 
 • A.D. 1011. In another narrative of Karlsefnc, which follows the 
 .present in the Autiquitatea Americance, as well as in the short account of 
 these same occurrences contained in ^he Saga of Erik the Red, it is stated 
 that Karlsefnc passed the winter of 1010 at EriksQord iu Greenland. 
 Compare Antiq. Amer. pp. G4-183. 
 
 t Hauk £rIend3on,the last contributor to the Landuumabok. Sec pp. xi-82. 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 ■ 
 
 I 
 
 
 t .■■7. 
 
 t : ... 
 
 _i \ 
 
■^ 
 
 lOf) 
 
 njSCOVEUY OF AMERICA 
 
 VOYAGE OF FREYDIS, HELGI, AND 
 FINNBOGI. 
 
 A.D. ion. 
 
 FREYDIS CAUSES THE BROTHERS TO BE KILLED.* 
 
 6. Now began people again to talk about expedi- 
 tions to Vinland, for voyages thereto appeared both 
 profitable and honourable. The same summer that 
 Karlsefne came from Vinland, t came also a ship 
 from Norway to Greenland ; this ship steered two 
 brothers, Helgi and Finnbogi, and they remained 
 for the winter in Greenland. These brothers were 
 Icelanders by descent, and from Austfjord. It is 
 now to be told that Freydis, Erik's daughter, went 
 from her home at Garde to the brothers Helgi and 
 Finnbogi, and bade them that they should sail to 
 Vinland with their vessels, and go halves with her 
 in all the profits which might be there made. To 
 this they agreed. Then went she to Leif her bro- 
 ther, and begged him to give her the houses, which 
 he had caused to be built in Vinland ; but he an- 
 swered the same as before, that he would lend the 
 houses, but not give them. So was it settled be- 
 tween the brothers and Freydis, that each should 
 
 * This nurrative is contained In the Saga of Erik tlie Red (Antiq. Amer. 
 p. 65, seq.) but has been transferred to this place, as well to make the 
 chronological order of the various voyages more perspicuous, as on account 
 of the further particulars relating to Karlsefne and Qudrid, with which it 
 concludes. t A. D. 1010. See ante, p. 61, 
 
 
IJV THE NOKTHMEN. 
 
 107 
 
 have thirty fighting men in the ship, besides 
 women. But Froydis broke this agreement, and 
 had five men more, and hid them ; so that the 
 brothers knew not of it before they came to Vin- 
 land. Now sailed they into the sea, and had before 
 arranged that they should keep together, if it could 
 so be, and there was little difference, but still came 
 the brothers somewhat before, and had taken up 
 their effects to Leifs houses. But when Freydis 
 came to land, then cleared they out their ships, and 
 bore up their goods to the house. Then said 
 Freydis: "Why bring ye in your things here?*' 
 "Because we believed," said they, "that the 
 whole agreement should stand good between us.'* 
 " To me lent Lcif the houses," quoth she, *' and 
 not to you." Then said Helgi : "In malice are we 
 brothers easily excelled by thee.'' Now took they 
 out their goods, and made a separate building, and 
 set that building further from the strand, on the 
 edge of a lake, and put all around in good order : 
 but Freydis had trees cut down for her ship's 
 loading. Now began winter, and the brothers pro- 
 posed to set up sports, and have some an-usement. 
 So was done for a time, until evil reports an^ discord 
 sprung up amongst them, and there was an end of 
 the sports, and nobody came from the one house to 
 the other, and so it went on for a long time during 
 the winter. It happened one morning early that 
 Freydis got up from her bed, and dressed herself, 
 but took no shoes or stockings ; and the weather 
 was such that much dew had fallen. She took her 
 
 
 
 -VI; 
 
 ■. .■1 
 
 > V 
 
108 
 
 niSCOVERY OF AMEIIICA 
 
 ii 
 
 husband's cloak, and put it on, and then went to 
 the brothers* house, and to the door ; but a man 
 had gone out a little before, and left the door half 
 opcR. She opened the door, and stood a little time 
 in the opening, and was silent ; but Finnbogi lay 
 inside the house, and was awake ; he said : " What 
 wilt thou here, Frcydis ?" She said: "I wish 
 that thou wouldest get up, and go out with me, 
 for I will speak with thee.'* He did so; they 
 went to a tree, that lay near the dwellings, and sat 
 down there. " How art thou satisfied here ?" said 
 she ; he answered : " Well think I of the land's 
 fruitfulness, but ill do I think of the discord that 
 has sprung up betwixt us, for it appears to me that 
 no cause has been given." '• Thou sayest as it is," 
 said she, " and so think I ; but my business here 
 with thee, is that I wish to change ships with 
 thy brother, for ye have a larger ship than I, and it 
 is my wish to go from hence." " That must I 
 agree to," said he, *' if such is thy wish." Now 
 with that they separated ; she went home, and 
 Finnbogi to his bed. She got into the bed with 
 cold feet, and thereby woke Thorvard, and he asked 
 why she was so cold and wet. She answered, with 
 much vehemence : ** I was gone,'* said she, *' to the 
 brothers, to make a bargain with their about their 
 ship, for I wished to buy the large ship ; but they 
 took it so ill, that they beat me, and used me 
 shamefully j but thou I miserable man ! wilt surely, 
 neither avenge my disgrace or thine own, and it is 
 easy to see that I am no longer in Greenland, and 
 
 
nV THE NOnTIIMEN. 
 
 109 
 
 I will separate from thee if thou avengest not this." 
 And now could he no longer withstand her re- 
 proaches, and bade his men to get up, with all 
 speed, and take their arms ; and so did they, and 
 went straightway to the brothers' house, and went 
 in, and fell upon them sleeping, and then took and 
 bound them, and thus led out one after the other ; 
 but Freydis had "^ich of them killed, as he came 
 out. Now were all the men there killed, and only 
 women remained, and them would no one kill. 
 Then said Freydis: " Give me an axel" So was 
 done ; upon which she killed the five women that 
 were there, and did not stop until they were all 
 dead. Now they went back to their house after 
 this evil work, and Freydis did not appear other- 
 wise than as if she had done well, and spoke thus to 
 her people : " If it be permitted us to come again 
 to Greenland," said she, " I will take the life of 
 that man who tells of this business ; now should we 
 say this, that tliey remained behind when we went 
 away." Now early in the spring made they ready 
 the ship that had belonged to the brothers, and 
 loaded it with all the best things they could get, and 
 the ship could carry. After that they put to sea, 
 and had a quick voyage, and came to Eriksfjord 
 with the ship early in the summer. Now Karlsefiie 
 was there, and had his ship quite ready for sea, and 
 waited for a fair wind ; and it is generally said, 
 that no richer ship has ever gone from Greenland 
 than that which he steered. 
 
 
wr 
 
 If 
 
 no 
 
 DISCOVER Y OF AMEIUCA 
 
 It 
 
 t ;■. 
 
 OF FREYDIS. 
 
 7. Freydis repaired now to her dwelling, which, 
 in the meantime, had stood uninjured ; she gave 
 great gifts to all her companions, that they should 
 conceal her misdeeds, and sat down now in her 
 house. All were not, however, so mindful of their 
 promises to conceal their crimes and wickedness 
 but that it came out at last. Now iinally it reached 
 the ears of Leif, her brother, and he thought very 
 ill of the business. Then took Leif three men of 
 Freydis's band, and tortured them to confess the 
 whole occurrence, and all their statements agreed. 
 " I like not,"' said Leif, " to do that to Freydis, my 
 sister, which she has deserved, but this will I pre- 
 dict, that thy posterity will never thrive." Now 
 the consequence was, that no one, from that time 
 forth, thought otherwise than ill of them. Now 
 must we begin from the time when Karlsefne got 
 ready his ship, and put to sea : he had a prosperous 
 voyage, and came safe and sound to Norway, and 
 remained there for the winter, and sold his goods, 
 and both he and his wife were held in great honor 
 by the most respectable men in Norway. But the 
 spring after, fitted he out his ship for Iceland ; 
 and when he was all ready, and his ship lay at the 
 bridge, waiting for a fair wind, then came there a 
 southern to him, who was from Bremen in Saxony, 
 and wanted to buy from Karlsefne his house broom.* 
 
 • Husasnotni. Some doubts have arisen as to the meaning of this word, 
 which Finn Magnusen thinks, is liere intended to express a vane or wcather- 
 
 Ki iU\ 
 
 :: I ■ X 
 
^ 
 
 I»Y TFIE NOflTHMKV. 
 
 Ill 
 
 *' I will not sell it," said lu?. •* I will give thee a 
 half mark gold for it,'* said the German. Karl- 
 sefne thought this was a good offer, and they closed 
 the hargain. The southern went off with the house 
 broom, but Karlsefne knew not what wood it was ; 
 but that was mausur,* brought from Vinland. 
 Now Karlsefne put to sea, and came with his ship 
 to Skagafjord, on the northern coast, and there was 
 the ship laid up for the winter. But in spring 
 bought he Glaumba>land, and fixed his dwelling 
 there, and lived there, and was a highly respected 
 man, and from him and Gudrid his wife has sprung 
 a numerous and distinguished race. And when 
 Karlsefne was dead, took Gudrid the management 
 of the house with her son Snorri, who was born in 
 Vinland. But when Snorri was married, then 
 went Gudrid abroad, and travelled southwards, and 
 came back again to the house of Snorri her son, 
 and then had he caused a church to be built at 
 Glaumba?. After this, became Gudrid a nun and 
 
 cock, such appendages having been formerly ornamented by tlie Nortlimcn, 
 at great cost, and placed on the top of the house. Tlic price given (about 
 £16. sterling) is also more accordant with this interpretation. Torfa3iis 
 calls it " coronis domu?," which secns to imply some ornamental appen- 
 dage of tlic kind : the Editor iius followed the Lexicon of Bjbrn Haldorson. 
 See Antiq. Amer. p. 441, note c. and Lexicon Islandico-Latino-Daniciim 
 Biornonis Haldorsonii ex manuscriptis Lcgati Arna Magnceani cura, 
 R. K. Raskii editum. IlafnioJ, 1814, 4to. 
 
 * This is supposed to have been one of those beautiful varieties of the red 
 maple (acer rubrura) or sugar maple (acersaccharinum) called " bird's eye," 
 or " curled maple," and which, according to Dr. Webb, " is found in Massa- 
 chusetts, and thought by many to rival the finest mahogany." Antiq. 
 Amer. p. 307. The old German name for maple of maashotderbaum, as 
 well as the Swedish masur speckled wood, and masurerad, applied to old 
 and knotty or marble-Iike wood, tends also to confirm this supposition. 
 
 •■•'I. 
 
 '■1 
 
112 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA. 
 
 \-j :l 
 
 i 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ' 
 
 \m 
 
 recluse, and remained so whilst she lived. Snorri 
 had a son who Thorgeir hight ; he was father to 
 Ingveld, mother of E'shop Brand. The daughter 
 of Snorri Karlsefnesson hight Hallfrid ; she was 
 mothor to Runolf, father to Bishop Thorlak.* 
 Bjorn hight a son of Karlsefne and Gudrid ; 1 e 
 was father to Thorunn, mother of Bishop Bjarn. 
 A numerous race are descended from Karlsefne, 
 and distinguished men; and Karlsefne has accu- 
 rately related to all men the occurrences on all 
 these voyages, of which somewhat is now recited 
 here. 
 
 * "To the learned Pishop Thorlak Runolfson," says Professor Rafn," we 
 are principally indebted for the oldest ecclesiastical code of Iceland, pub- 
 lished in the year 1123 ; and it is also probable that the accounts of these 
 voyages were originally compiled by him." Antiq. Amer. Abstract of Hist. 
 Evid. p. xxxiv. 
 
GEOGRAPHICAL NOTICES, 
 
 ■t'. ■ 
 
 IN 
 
 ANTIKNT ICELANDIC MSS. 
 
 B -Fragment of Vellum Codex, No. 192, rivo. Anti.i. An.fr. p. '290. 
 Suppoxtd to have been written about the md of the \Uh Century. 
 
 Next to Denmark is the lesser Sweden, then is 
 Oeland, then Gottland, then Helsingeland, then 
 Vermeland, and the two Kvendlands, which lie to 
 the north of Bjarraeland. From Bjarmeland 
 stretches uninhabited land towards the north, until 
 Greenland begins. South of Greenland is Hellu- 
 land ; next lies Markland ; thence it is not far to 
 Vinland the Good, which some think goes out from 
 Africa;* and if it be so, the sea must run in be- 
 tween Vinland and Markland. It is related that 
 Thorfinn Karlsefne cut wood here to ornament his 
 house,t and went afterwards to seek out Vinland 
 the Good, and came there, where they thought the 
 land was, but did not eflPect the knowledge of it, 
 and gained none of the riches of the land. Leif 
 the Lucky first discovered Vinland, and then he 
 met some merchants in distress, at sea, and, by 
 
 • Hence may be seen bow far smithwards the Northmen oonsidcre.l the 
 newly discovered land to extend. 
 
 t Husasnotrutre. See ante p. 11 1 , and note. The word hisasnotru, .ays 
 Professor Rafn, may be rendered scopis, tritonibr.s, or ventilogiis. Ant.q, 
 Amer. p. 291 , note d. 
 
 I 
 
 i %- 
 
 W:-'^ 
 
 m 
 
 ^:-4 
 
I'l» 
 
 pi 
 
 ■ '1^ 
 
 1 
 
 ! ' !■ 
 
 1, 
 
 ;•' 
 
 114 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 God's mercy, saved their lives ; and he introduced 
 Christianity into Greenland, and it spread itself 
 there, so tliat a Bishop's seat was established in the 
 place called Gardar. England and Scotland are 
 an island, and yet each is a kingdom for itself. 
 Irland is a great island. Iceland is also a great 
 island north of Irland. These countries are all in 
 that part of the world, which is called Europe. 
 
 C. GUI PL A.* 
 
 Codex, No. 115, 6vo. Antiq. Amer. p. 293. 
 
 Bavaria is bounded by Saxony ; Saxony is bounded 
 by Hoi stein, then comes Denmark ; the sea flows 
 through the eastern countries. Sweden lies to the 
 east of Denmark, Norway to the north ; Finmark 
 north of Norway ; thence stretches the land out to 
 the north-east and east, until you come to Bjarme- 
 land ; this land is tributary to Gardarige. From 
 Bjarmeland lie uninhabited places all northward to 
 that land which is called Greenland, [which, how- 
 ever, the Greenlanders do not confirm, but believe to 
 have observed that it is otherwise, both from drift 
 timber, which it is known, is cut down by men, and 
 
 * This remarkable geographical fragment is contained in the celebrated 
 Greenlandic collection of Bjorn Johnson, and was evidently written before 
 the time of Jolumbus. The name is supposed to be derived from the word 
 gripa, to snatch, the collection being of h miscelliineous character. Antiij. 
 Amer. pp. 280-1. 
 
 :i "» 
 
UY THE NOUTflMKN'. 
 
 115 
 
 also from Reindeer, which have marks upon the ears, 
 or bands upon the horns, likewise from sheep, which 
 stray thither, of which there now are remains in 
 Norway, for one head hangs in Throndhjem, 
 another in Bergen, and many '■uore besides are to be 
 found]* But there are bays, and the land stretches 
 out toward the south-west ; there arc Jokels and 
 Fjords ; there lie islands out before the Jokels ; 
 one of the Jokels cannot be explored ; to the other 
 is half a month's sail, to the third a week's sail ; 
 this is nearest to the settlement hight Hvidscrk ; 
 thence stretches the land toward the north ; but he 
 who wishes not to miss the settlement, steers to the 
 south-west. Gardar hight the Bishop's seat at the 
 bottom of Eriksfjord ; there is a church dedicated 
 to the holy Nicholas; XII churches are upon 
 Greenland in the eastern settlement, I III in the 
 western. 
 
 Now is to be told what lies opposite Greenland, 
 out from the bay, which was before named : Fur- 
 dustrandir hight a land ; there are so strong frosts 
 that it is not habitable, so far as one knows ; south 
 from (li, nee is Helluland, which is called Skraelings- 
 land ; from thence it is not far to Vinland the 
 Good, which some think goes out from Africa ; 
 between Vinland and Greenland is Ginnungagap,t 
 which flows from the sea called Mare oceanum, and 
 surrounds the whole earth [Hcbc verbotenus Gripld], 
 
 ■ -t-'. 
 
 I ■ 
 
 ' ''v> 
 
 r.;r 
 
 • The whole of this passage is considered by Professor Rafn to l)e aii 
 interpolation by njbrn Johnson, or some other commentator. Antia> 
 Amer. p. 294, note a. + Davis's Straits. See Plate III. 
 
 I 2 
 
 ( ■■■ 
 
i ■ 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 ■ll 
 
 i 
 
 ''''I 
 
 if 
 ll 
 
 "' l": 
 
 ■•! ' ' 
 
 
 '''■'■ 
 
 'i'f 
 
 V 'di 
 
CORltOBORATIVE OF THE 
 
 DISCOVERIES OK THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 ;i 
 
 
 PART II. 
 
 
 MONUMENTS & INSCRIPTIONS, 
 
 'W 
 
 I ■ ' . 
 
5 
 
 it 
 
 '•*. 
 

 \4' 
 
\ \ LJ 
 
 INSCRIPTION UPON THE AS80NET OR 
 Jccortiin^ a> tkeJiramn^ /node wide/' ike s^o&wtmdfnce- ofe^^iM 
 
Vi.m.fo/^rr^w.' >;: 
 
 PON THE AS80NET OR OIGHTON ROCK. 
 
 S<? si^0'in(tndence- afe^^Mode Ziland^ Mstopiad. -Sotzefy. A. J). JS30. 
 
 thJuvArfO-h/smiik-, ZztX/>, 
 
 ni 
 
i • \r 
 
 H 
 
 111 
 
 ftfr 
 
 |i' 
 
 I' ' 
 
 I i 
 
 
 If i?'. 4; 
 
 If I ' . ; 
 
 ;<1 'f 
 
 
 ifl^ 
 
 • ■ 
 
 y ! 
 
 CC 
 
 m 
 
 Accordi 
 
 
PART II. 
 
 .^ ■ . 
 
 MONUMENTS AND INSCRIPTIONS. 
 
 THE DIGHTON WRITING ROCK. 
 
 Some remarkable monuments and inscriptions 
 have been found on the eastern shores of North 
 America, which bear testimony to the voyages and 
 settlements recorded in the preceding narratives, 
 and complete the mass of evidence that has been so 
 ably brought forward by Professor Rafn, upon this 
 interesting subject. The Rhode Island Historical 
 Society have applied themselves to the examination 
 of these remains, with a degree of zeal and ability 
 worthy of the occasion, and details of high interest 
 and valuehave been made known to the corresponding 
 Danish members, through the medium of the dis- 
 tinguished American secretary, Dr. Webb. From 
 these communications it appears that, in the west- 
 ern part of the county of Bristol in the State of 
 Massachusetts, may still be seen numerous and 
 extensive mounds, similar to the tumuli that are so 
 often met with in Scandinavia, Tartary, and Russia; 
 " also the remains of fortifications that must have 
 required for their construction, a degree of in- 
 dustry, labour, and skill, us well as an advance- 
 
 it":^: 
 
 ''i- 
 
 'J. ■ ►.'/ 
 

 l^^U 
 
 DIKCOVKIIY OK AMERICA 
 
 •«- 
 
 meiit in the arts, that iievor (;li{irju;tei'iyx'(l uny of 
 the Indian tribes. Various articles of pottery are 
 found in them, with the mevhod of manufacturinjr 
 which they were entirely unacquainted. But above 
 all, many rocks, inscribed with unknown cha- 
 racters, apparently of very antient ori<;in. have 
 been discovered scattered through different parts of 
 the country : rocks, the constituent parts of which 
 are such as to render it almost impossible to en- 
 grave on them such writings without the aid of 
 iron, or other hard metallic instrument. The 
 Indians were ii^norant of the existence of these 
 rocks ; and the manner of working with iron they 
 learned from the Europeans, after the settlement of 
 the country by the English." 
 
 Of such remains, the most important that has 
 yet been discovered is the Assonet rock, or " Digh- 
 ton writing rock," which is thus described in the 
 Report of a Committee that was appointed by the 
 Rhode Island Historical Societv, to examine and 
 report upon this remarkable stone, and who visited 
 it in the month of February, 1830 : — 
 
 " It is situated six and a half miles south of 
 Taunton, on the east side of Taunton river, a few 
 feet from the shore, and on the west side of Assonet 
 neck, in the town of Berkely, county of Bristol, and 
 Commonwealth of Massachusetts ; although, pro- 
 bably from the fact of its being generally visited 
 from the other side of the river, which is in 
 Uighton, it has always been known by the name of 
 the ' Dighton Writing Rock.' It faces north-west. 
 
»V Tin: NOHTH.MliN. 
 
 1^21 
 
 towards the hvd of the river, unci is covored by tlie 
 water two or three feet at tlio hi«»hest, and is left ten 
 or twelve feet from it at the lowest tides : it is also 
 completely immersed twice in twenty-four hours. 
 The rock does not occur in situ, but shews indubit- 
 able evidence of having occuj)ie(l the spot where it 
 now rests, since the period of that great and exten- 
 sive disruption, which was followed by thi- trans- 
 portation of immense boulders to, and a deposit of 
 them in places at a vast distance from their orig:' nal 
 beds. It is a mass of well characterized fine 
 grained greywachc. Its true colour, as exhibited 
 by a fresh fracture, is a blueish grey. There is no 
 rock in the immediate neighbourhood that would at 
 all answer as a substitute for the purpose for which 
 the one bearing the inscription was selected, as they 
 arc aggregates of the large conglomerr.te variety. 
 Its face, measured at the base, is eleven feet and a 
 half ; and in height, it is a little rising five feet. 
 The upper surface forms, with the horizon, an in- 
 clined plane of about sixty degrees. The whole of 
 the face is covered, to within a few inches of the 
 ground, with unknown hieroglyphics. There ap- 
 pears little or no method in the arrangement of 
 them. The lines are from half an inch to an inch 
 in width ; and in depth sometimes one-third of an 
 inch, though generally very superficial. They were, 
 inferring from the rounded elevations, and inter- 
 vening depressions, picked in upon the rock, and 
 not chiselled or smoothly cut out. The marks of 
 human jower, and manual labour are indelibly 
 
 .;H 
 
 
II 
 
 11^ -• 
 
 ]Q'2 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 stamped upon it. No ono who examines atten- 
 tively the workmanship, will believe it to have been 
 (lone bv the Iniaans. Moreover, it is a well at- 
 tested fact, that no whore, throughout our wide 
 spread domain, is there a single instance of their 
 recording, or having recorded, their deeds or history 
 on stone."* 
 
 This remarkable monument had long been an 
 object of interest to American aniiquaries, and 
 several drawings and examinations were made of 
 the rock and inscription, at various periods, be- 
 ginning in the year 1680, but without any satis- 
 factory result ; and it remained for Professors Finn 
 Magnusen and Rafn to shew that the whole was a 
 Runic inscription^ containing various cryptographs, 
 and rude combinations of figures illustrative of the 
 settlements of the Northmen, among which devices, 
 may be yet traced the name of Thorfinn, and the 
 figures CXXXI. being the number of Karlsefne's 
 associates (151),t which after the departure of 
 Thorhall, accompanied him to Hope.;]: 
 
 If' 
 
 • Rep. Rhode Isl. Hist. Soc. Antiq. Amer. pp. 350-358. 
 
 t Twelve Decades being reckoned to tlie hundred, hence, called by tlie 
 Icelanders and Scandinavians st(>rt hundrad (great hundred). Antiq. 
 Amer. p. 385. ante, p. 88, note ♦. 
 
 X See ante, p. 93. Professor Rafn has gone into an elaborate disser- 
 tation upon this inscription, proving by unanswerable arguments its Scan- 
 dinavian origin. (Antiq. Ainer. p. 378, seq.) In this lie is fully borne out 
 by the eminent Runologist Finn Magnusen, who shews that the whole of 
 the apparently unmeaning hieroglyphics are illustrative of the Icelandic 
 settlement in Hope : — The well known Runic Iftter I> (Th) on the left hand, 
 at once stamps its Scandinavian or Icelandic origin ; the combined letters 
 which foil >w the numerals may be decyphered N. M. the initials of norronir 
 menn (Northmen); tlte I'.evices above this, represent the shields (p. 95), 
 
 
UY THE NORTH MKN. 
 
 1^23 
 
 A perspectii'e representation of this remarkable 
 rock, together with fac-siniiles of the several draw- 
 ings that have been made of the inscription, ending 
 with the most recent and accurate, made by the 
 Committee of the Rhode Island Historical Society 
 in 1830, are appended to the Antiquitates Ameri- 
 canae ;* and the analogy between these and inscrip- 
 tions, which have been found both in Sweden and 
 Iceland, is shewn by contiguous representations of 
 the Scandinavian remains. The same plate con- 
 tains also, the delineation of a curious fragment of 
 metallic tessera^ found near Dublin, upon which is 
 inscribed a monogram similar to that seen upon the 
 Assonet Rock, as well as the Runic letter >[i (H), 
 shewing the Scandinavian origin of the fragment, 
 which may be ascribed to the 9th or 10th cen- 
 tury. 
 
 The Rhode Island Historical Society have also 
 forwarded to Professor Rafn desci-iptions and de- 
 lineations of several other remains which bear a 
 striking analogy to that at Dighton ; among these 
 
 under which lies a helmet reversed, indicative of peace. The figure below 
 the name may be intended for a bullock, or some domestic animal, illus- 
 trative of their daily pursuits, — the outline of a ship is blended with these ; — 
 the figures ofGudrid and her child Snorrl appear on the right; Kurlsefne, 
 protected by a shield from the attacks of the Skroelings, upon the left, while 
 the bows, and missiles of their assailants, more particularly the large ball 
 mentioned in page 08, are clearly discernible. Altogetlicr the analogy 
 which this inscription presents to those upon well known Runic monuments — 
 the facility with which the various devices may be made to apply to the 
 incidents and circumstances connected with the Icelandic settlement, and 
 the distinct Roman or Latin letters which form the numerals— leave no 
 reasonable doubt as to its being the work of the Northmen. 
 ♦ Ste Plate 111. 
 
 .11 
 
 •hv- 
 
 * , i 
 
 
 ;' k , ■■ 
 
 ^ ;"1 
 
1 1 
 
 Hi 
 
 1 
 
 124 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 the Portsmouth and Tiverton Rocks form interesting 
 subjects for examination and comparison.* 
 
 I - ^ 
 
 I ? •"' 
 
 It'' 
 
 I 
 
 tf 
 
 RUNIC STONE AT KINGIKTORSOAK. 
 
 But traces of the adventurous spirit, and early 
 voyages of the Northmen are to be found in much 
 higher, and far less inviting latitudes, shewing the 
 progress of their course through regions, which 
 even in the present age of high scientific advance- 
 ment, and maritime enterprise, have tested, and 
 not unfrequently baffled the skill and hardihood of 
 our most distinguished navigators. 
 
 In the year 1824, a remarkable Runic stone was 
 found upon the island of Kingiktorsoak, lying in 
 72° 55' north latitude and 56" 5' west longitude. 
 
 The following is a representation of this remark- 
 
 * Since tlie publication of the Antiquitates Americante, a still further 
 addition to American monuments has been discovered in the neigh- 
 bourhood of Bahia, as appears from a communication made to the Royal 
 Society of Northern Antiquaries by Dr. Lund, one of its members, residing 
 at Lagoa Santu in Brazil : — It appears, on the authority of a Journal pub- 
 lished by a Society lately established at Rio Janeiro, under the name of 
 Instituto Historico BrnzUiero, that the remains of an antient city, built of 
 hewn stone, have been recently discovered in the neighbourhood of Bahia, 
 and that Professor Schiick, one of the members of the Institution, guided 
 by Professor Rafn's work, lias deduced from the inscriptions, the Scandi- 
 navian origin of these remains. Among the ruins is stated to be a 
 huge column, bearing a remarkable figure, wliich stretches out the right 
 hand, and points w ith tlie fore-finger towards the north pole. Dr. Lund 
 hud not seen the monument at the period of his communication, but in- 
 tended to undertake a journey to the place, and make a minute examina- 
 tion of the ruins and inscriptions, the result of which may be expected to 
 appear in a future number of the iiroceedings of the Northern Antiquaries. 
 Abstract of the proceedings of the Quarterly Meeting of the R. 8. N. A. 
 30th April, 1840, in Berlingske politiske og Avertissemcnts Tidendc, Kjri- 
 benhavn, May 4, 1840. 
 
 E la 
 
BY THF NORTHMEN. 
 
 12.5 
 
 able monument which was transported to Copen- 
 hagen, and found on examination, to present a 
 complete inscription in Runic characters : — 
 
 which in modern Icelandic orthography would run 
 thus : — 
 
 ELLIGR • SIGVA i,S : SON : R • OK : BJANNE : TORTARSON : 
 OK-.ENRIdI • ODSSON:LAUKARDAK :IiV : FYRIRGAKNDAG 
 HLOtU • YARD ATE • OKRYDU:MCXXXV. 
 
 or 
 Erling Sighvatsson and Biarni Thordarsson, and 
 Eindrid Oddsson, on the seventh day,* before the 
 day of Victory,! erected these stones, and explored. 
 MCXXXV 
 
 Some doubts have been expressed by Runic scho- 
 lars as to the signification of the characters represent- 
 ing the date, but the peculiar formation of the Runes, 
 and other unerring indications shew that the inscrip- 
 tion cannot be later than the 12th century. J 
 
 It appears from various Icelandic documents 
 given in Professor Rafn's work, that the Northmen 
 
 * Saturday, Dies Saturni. 
 
 + A festival kept by the Northmen previous to the 12th century: it fell 
 on the 2.'>th of April. Antii). Amcr. pp. 352-1. 
 I Antiq. Amer. p. 364. 
 
 .-■*', 
 
 
 ■11 
 
 .',:-r -I. 
 
:|'i 
 
 12(i 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 
 
 had two principal stations in the Arctic regions, 
 the one called Greipar, lying immediately south 
 of the island of Disco in Davis' Straits, and the 
 other called Kroksfjardarheidi, situated on the 
 north-side of Lancaster's sound.* Their general 
 name for these regions was Nordrsetur, to which 
 vessels were dispatched from Greenland for the 
 purpose of carrying on the operations of hunting 
 and fishing. But voyages of discovery were also 
 made in this direction ; and a clear account of 
 such an expedition, undertaken in the year 1266, 
 follows the narratives which have been given in the 
 preceding pages. It is contained in a letter ad- 
 dressed by a clergyman named Halldor, to a brother 
 ecclesiastic named Arnold, f who, after having lived 
 in Greenland, had become chaplain to king Magnus 
 Lagabseter in Norway ; and the voyage appears to 
 have been made under the auspices of some clergy- 
 men of the Bishopric of Gardar in Greenland. 
 The object of the expedition is stated to have been, 
 to explore regions lying more to the northward than 
 those which they had been hitherto accustomed to 
 frequent,consequently further north than Lancaster's 
 sound. They sailed from Kroksfjardarheidi, but 
 meeting with southerly winds, and thick weather, 
 were obliged to let the vessel run before the wind ; 
 on the fogs clearing off, they descried several 
 islands, and saw many seals, whales, and bears. 
 They penetrated into the innermost part of the 
 
 • See Plate II. 
 
 t Antiq. Amer. p. 209, seq. and Abstract of Hist. Evid. p. xxxviii. gcq. 
 
 # 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 1^27 
 
 gulph, and saw icebergs lying to the southward, as 
 far as the eye could reach ; they observed traces of 
 the Skrselings having inhabited tlteso regions in 
 former times, but were unable to knd, in conse- 
 quence of the bears. They, therefore, went about, 
 and sailed bnck for three days,* when they again 
 found traces of the Esquimaux, upon some islands 
 lying to the southward of a mountain, which they 
 call Snsefell. After this, on St. James's Day (2.5th 
 July), they proceeded southwards, a long day's 
 rowing (einn mikin dagrodr). It froze during the 
 night, but the sun was above the horizon both 
 night and day ; and '* it was not higher when on 
 the meridian than that, when a man lay across a 
 six oared boat, towards the gunwale, the shade of 
 that side of the boat which was nearest the sun, 
 fell on his face ; but at midnight was it as high as 
 at home in the settlement, when it is in the north- 
 west."! The expedition afterwards returned to 
 Gardar. 
 
 These observations are of course very loose and 
 uncertain ; the relative depth of the man's position 
 with regard to the gunwale of the boat, would be 
 necessary in order to be able to make anything of 
 the first observation, and the result of the other can 
 only be deduced by presuming the day of the 
 summer solstice to be implied. This, however, is 
 
 • ni. doegr. 
 
 t " Ok var eigi hajiri, .i>a er hun var i siidri, ef madr lagdist um ^veruii 
 scxaering iit at bordinu, |)U bar skuggann i andlit honum af ^vi bordiiiu, cr 
 titer var solinni ; en um midiia'tti var hun 8Vi\ ha sein heima i bygd, da er 
 hun er i utnordri."— Antiq. Amer. pp. 272, 273. 
 
 H 
 
 P': 
 
 I.;:.-* 
 
 
 I '.-,.■■ 
 
 .' '1. 
 
 u 
 
128 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 ^\l 
 
 11' 
 
 « 
 
 W 
 
 m 
 
 not an unreasonable supposition, more particularly 
 when we find so many other circumstances corroho- 
 rative of the locality which is tlience determined, 
 and Professor Rafii, proceeding upon this assumj)- 
 tion, draws out the following result: — 
 
 •* In the 13th century, (m the 25th July, the 
 
 Sun's declination was . , 17" 54' North 
 Inclination of the Ecliptic . 23 ' 32' 
 
 If we now assume that the colony, and particu- 
 larly the episcopal seat of Gardar, was situated on 
 the north side of Igaliko frith, where the ruins of a 
 large church, and of many other buildings, indicate 
 the site of a principal settlement of the antient colony, 
 consequently in 60" 55' n. lat. then at the summer 
 solstice, the height of the sun there, when in the 
 N. W. was 3° 40', which is equivalent to the mid- 
 night altitude of the sun on St. James's day (25th 
 July) in the parallel of 75" 46'."* Now the parallel 
 of 7«5" 46' north latitude, would fall to the north- 
 ward of Wellington Channel, the highest latitude 
 reached by Parry in his most favourable expedition 
 in search of a North-west passage ; and the de- 
 scription of the land seen, and objects met with on 
 the voyage, corresponds well with the characteristics 
 of these regions, as given by the distinguished Eng- 
 lish navigator. The Northmen sail from Kroksf- 
 jardarheidi, a name implying a frith bounded by 
 barren highlands (heidi,) and known to be on the 
 north side of Lancaster's sound ; this frith must have 
 
 * Aritiq. Amer. p. xxxix. 
 
 '■■■■• f 
 
'm^t 
 
 ,, "'IB 
 
 BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 129 
 
 been of considerable extent, as three days sailiny 
 are specifically mentioned in that part of the nar- 
 rative describing their return ; — they descry several 
 islands, and meet with many seals, whales, and 
 bears ; — they see ice-bergs lying to the southward, 
 as far as the eye can reach ; — they observe traces 
 of the Esquimaux (Skraelings) in various directions ; 
 the sun was above the horizon both night and day, 
 and although in the month of July, it froze dur- 
 ing the night. There is little doubt, therefore, 
 that these early explorers of the arctic regions, start- 
 ing from Lancaster's sound, were driven through 
 Barrow's straits, and Wellington Channel, into 
 the Polar sea, from whence they saw the North 
 Georgian Islands, and where they naturally fell in 
 with a multitude of seals, whales, and bears.* 
 It is a startling conclusion, and somewhat mor- 
 
 * "We had the first distinct view of both sides of tlie sound (Lancaster's 
 sound), that on tlie south side consisting of high aud peaked mountains, 
 completely snow-clad, except on the lower parts, while the northern coast 
 has generally a smoother outline . . . the high bold land on the north side 
 of this magnificent inlet (Lancaster's sound) . . . the magnificent view of the 
 lofty fiyam Martin mountains . . . the land had opened out on the opposite 
 shore to the northward and westward of Cape Warrender (entrance of 
 Barrow's straits) consisting of high mountains, and in some parts of table 
 land ... a great number of whales were seen in the course of this day's run . . . 
 several black whales, and multitudes of white ones, were seen in the course 
 of the day, also several narwhals, and seals, and one bear : there was an 
 ice-berg in sight, (P. Regent's inlet) . . . part of the vertebroe of a whale was 
 found at some distance from tlie beach, but this had probably been carried 
 there by bears, the tracks of whom were visible on the moist soil. (Lat. 72 
 45' 13", Long. 89" 41' 22") . . . there was just light enough at midnight to 
 enable us to write and read in the cabin." (Hobhouse inlet, Barrow's straits, 
 Aug. 1819). Journals of Voyages for the discovery of a North-west passage 
 by Sir William Edward Parry, from the years 1810 to 1825. pp. 24, 31, 33, 
 .33, 39, 48, first Voyage, and p. 21, third Voyage, 4to. Ed. 
 
 1^1 
 
 V^'^ 
 
 '(■■ 
 ■I, 
 
 I .■,5 
 
 '■v;;l 
 
 w .' 
 
 .■■;« 
 
1 ■ 
 
 r 
 
 
 1 
 * 
 
 I 
 
 ; 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 'll'l. 
 
 1^ ; 
 
 ]>• 
 
 1^ 
 
 130 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 tifying to national pride, to find that these simple 
 navigators of the 13th century, in their humhle 
 barks, rivalled the most distinguished arctic ex- 
 plorers of the present day,* but however unwilling 
 we may be to admit the evidence of a progress in 
 maritime discovery, which tends to dim the lustre 
 of our own enterprising age, the simple documents 
 in support of these early voyages carry a degree of 
 conviction to the mind which disarms scepticism, and 
 compels us to admit their credibility. 
 
 It is a great mistake, however, to s appose that 
 the Northmen of this period were altogether ignorant 
 of astronomical science, and still greater, as some 
 writers have done, to confound them with the Vi- 
 kings or Pirates of a more barbarous age. The dis- 
 coverers of America were Merchants, their ships 
 were called trading ships [Kaupskip] ; sea-roving had 
 been almost altogether discontinued by the North- 
 men before the voyages of Bjarni Hcrjulfson and the 
 descendants of Erik ;')' and all the expeditions which 
 
 • " Captain Parry, by the most vigilant exertions indeed, succeeded, during 
 the brief interval of an open season, to advance from Baffin's Bay, by Lan- 
 caster's Sound, above 400 miles westward, through floating masses of ice, on 
 the parallel of 75 degrees; but this distance is probably not the third part 
 of the whole space between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. All the sub- 
 sequent attempts of that able navigator to penetrate any further in the same 
 direction proved unsuccessful ; and his last laborious effort to reach the 
 Pole, by dragging boats over an expanse of rough and broken ice, com- 
 pletely failed. The utmost exertions of the crews scarcely enabled him to 
 proceed, in 1827, three degrees northward from Spitzbergen, and attain the 
 latitude of 82*>. 45', not far beyond the usual resort of the Greenland 
 whalers." Polar Seas and Regions by Sir John Leslie, Professor Jameson, 
 and Hugh Murray, Esq. F.R.S.E. Ed. Cab. Lib. Vol. I. 4th ed. pp. 62, 53. 
 
 t Leif Erikson, it will also be remembered, was brought up and instructed 
 by the southern German Tyrker, and Thorfinn Karlsefne was not only de- 
 
BY THE NOnniMEN. 
 
 131 
 
 arc related in these Sagas were undertaken either 
 for the purposes of discovering new countries, or 
 making settlements in, or trading with, countries 
 that had been already discovered. In the antient 
 Icelandic work called Ilimbegla, which has been 
 before quoted, many rules are given for the mea- 
 surement of time, the study of astronomy, geomcLj, 
 &c. and although these are probably translations or 
 compilations from foreign works, they correspond 
 with what the Icelandic clergy taught their people, 
 after the introduction of Christianity. Among these 
 are found scientific rules for finding the course of 
 the sun, moon, and stars, also the division of time 
 thereon depending ; information respecting the as- 
 tronomical quadrant, and its proper use ; dififerent 
 methods for ascertaining the spherical figure of the 
 earth ; the longitude and latitude of places, and of 
 calculating their distances from each other; the 
 sun's declination ; the earth's magnitude and cir- 
 cumference, the times when the ocean could best be 
 navigated, &c.* 
 
 Early in the eleventh century (1018 — 1026) the 
 rich chieftain Raudulf, of Oesterdal, in Norway, 
 taught his son Sigurd the science of computing the 
 course of the sun and moon, and other visible celes- 
 tial bodies, and particularly to know the stars which 
 
 scended from princely lineage, but had derived knowledge and experience by 
 trading voyages to various countries in Europe, Ireland amongst the rest, 
 where science and learning flourished long before the Northmen set foot 
 upon her shores, but where they then held the chief sea ports. Sec Moore, 
 Vol. I. p. 279.; II. p. 76. 
 
 * Finn Magnusen ap. Mem. de la Soc. des Antiq. du Nord, 183G-1837, 
 pp. 181-182. 
 
 K 2 
 
 M 
 
 i ■; 
 
 
 ■ol 
 
132 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 (1 
 
 ••■ ,i 
 
 H'i 
 
 mark the lapse of time, that he might be able to 
 ascertain the time both by day and by night, when 
 neither the sun or moon were visible. Even in 
 heathen times we have similar accounts of Icelandic 
 chieftains and their sons, nay even of simple pea- 
 sants, who paid sedulous attention to the motions of 
 the heavenly bodies, in order from thence to ascer- 
 tain the true lapse of time ; also of their belief in 
 astrolog)^ which was intimately connected with old 
 Scandinavian mythology. Olaus Magnus said that 
 in his time (about 1520) it was generally acknow- 
 ledged in Sweden, that the common people in antient 
 times had more knowledge of the stars than they 
 possessed in his days.* 
 
 Some idea may be formed of the character and 
 acquirements of the Scandinavian merchants in 
 the 11th and 12th centuries from the Speculum 
 Regale, a work written in the latter period. Here 
 the merchant is exhorted to make himself acquainted 
 with the laws of all countries, especially those re- 
 garding commerce and navigation, as well as with 
 foreign languages, particularly the Italian and 
 Latin, which were then in more general use. He 
 was also enjoined to obtain a complete knowledge 
 of the places and motions of the heavenly bodies, 
 the times of the day, the division of the horizon 
 according to the cardinal and minor points, the 
 movement of the sea, the climates, the seasons best 
 adapted for navigation, the equipping and rigging 
 
 * Finn Magnusen ap. Mem. de la Soc. des Antiq. da Nord, 1836-1837. 
 pp. 181-182. 
 
 I'* 
 
 it 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 \ir3 
 
 of vessels, arithmetical calculation, etc. Moreover, 
 to distinguish himself hy a becoming and decorous 
 way of living, both as to moral conduct, manners, 
 and attire, etc. : and thus it may be safely inferred 
 that the better educated of the northern merchants 
 in the 10th and 11th centuries were not so inferior 
 to their southern neighbours, as may be generally 
 supposed.* 
 
 The extended voyages and commercial inter- 
 course of the Northmen must have also contributed 
 to the amelioration of their habits and character. 
 From the 8th to the 11th centuries they carried on 
 a more active com^^ierce, and a more extensive ma- 
 ritime communication with foreign countries than 
 any other nation in Europe. Such intercourse 
 appears quite incompatible with that extreme degree 
 of ignorance and barbarity in which so many writers 
 would clothe all their actions and enterprises. 
 England, Ireland, Italy, Sicily, France, Spain — 
 were visited by these daring adventurers ; true, in 
 the character, and with the spirit, for the most part, 
 of reckless invaders, but that they should have con- 
 tinued to return from such enterprises without ex- 
 hibiting some modification of that ferocity, which 
 might be expected to yield to the salutary influence 
 of association with more civilized countries, seems 
 scarcely credible. Their long continued intercourse 
 of more than 200 years, with Ireland alone, a coun- 
 try which in the 8th century enjoyed a European 
 
 Finn Magnuscn, ap. Mem. dcs Antiq. du Nord, p. 183. 
 
11?)' 
 
 h •" 
 
 131. 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 reputation for intellectual eminence,* cannot but 
 liavc had a beneficial influence upon their character 
 and habits, and we should receive with caution all 
 
 wS 
 
 I 
 
 * "In tlio 8th century, indeed, the high reputation of the Irish for 
 scholarsiiip had become cstablislicd tliroughout Europe." Moore, Vol. I. 
 p. 289. " Ah DruiUism fell into disrepute, Christian seminaries multiplied 
 I . . . Soon after the first foundation, wc read of a most noble city and 
 seminary founded at Cionard near the Boyne. In tlic days of St. Finanus, 
 A. C. [tOO, we find it to contain no less than 3000 scholars, among whom 
 were some of the first eminence for piety and Icarniiiji,-. Colgan calls it a 
 repository of nil knowledge . . . About the same time, tlic academy of Ross, 
 called Ross-Ailitliri, in the county of Cork, was formed by St. Fachunus, 
 as Ware notes, and Ilanmer, in his Chronicle, tolls us, that here St. Urandan 
 taught tiic liberal nrts .... The schools of Clonfert, Bangor, Rathene, 
 Cushel, Sic, were not less remarkable . . . Was a man of letters missing on 
 the continent or in Britain, it became a proverb : Amandatus est, ad dU- 
 eiplinam in Ilibernia t" O'llalloran, Vol. I. p. 1C7, scq. " It is evident," 
 says Ware, "from antient writnrs of undeniable credit, that there were 
 formerly in Ireland several eminent schools, or as wo now call them. Uni- 
 versities, to which the Irish and Britons, and at Icngtii the Gauls and 
 Saxons flocked, us to marts of good literature; of whicli see Bcde, Alcuin, 
 Erik of Auxerre and the life of Sulgenus. Among these schools, as that of 
 Armagh was the most antient, so it was the most eminent .... the names 
 of some of the readers and proelectors thereof, even in the times of the 
 Danish tyranny in Ireland, are still extant." Antiq. of Ireland by Sir 
 James Ware, translated by Harris, Vol. II. pp. 240, 241. But Lismore 
 appears to have borne the palm among the Irish seminaries, as may be 
 collected fi'om the lines of Bonaventura Moronus, who tlius describes the 
 crowd of foreign scholars that flocked tlicre from all parts of Europe : — 
 
 Undique conveniunt proccres, quos dulce tiahcbat 
 
 Discendi studium, major num cognita virtus 
 
 An laudata forct. Cclcres vastissima Rhcni 
 
 Tam vada Teutonici, jam dcserucre Sicambri : 
 
 Mittit ab extremo gelidos aquilonc Boiemos. 
 
 Albis et Arvcrni ccRunt, Batavique frcqucntes, 
 
 Et quicunque colunt alta sub rupc Gebenas 
 
 Non omnes prospectat Arar, Rhodaniquo flucnta 
 
 Helvctios : multos desidcrat ultima 'i'hulc. 
 
 Certatiin lii properant, divcrso tramite ad urbeni 
 
 Lismonam, jiiven'is primos ubi transigit annos. 
 
 Life of St. Catlialdus, B. I. 
 
1»Y Tin: NOUTIIMEN. 
 
 [35 
 
 statements upon a subject to which national or 
 religious feeling is likely to have given an exag- 
 gerated colouring. Our knowledge of the excesses 
 of the northern invaders is chiefly derived from the 
 evidence of monkish chroniclers, whose Christian 
 faith and feelings were no less outraged by the 
 deeds than the infidelity of the Pagan ravagers, 
 and who writing in many cases long after the 
 events, would naturally aid defective evidence with 
 a fervid zeal and fertile imagination. The parti- 
 cular periods, also, and tribes to which this brutal 
 ferocity of the Northmen is referred, should be 
 more clearly distinguished. The peaceful Norwe- 
 gian settlers in Iceland, for instance, in the 9th 
 century were very different from those fierce in- 
 vaders, who, in the same age, shook the kingdoms 
 of Edmund and of Alfred to their centre, and com- 
 mitted barbarities which have called forth the just 
 animadversions of the distinguished historian of the 
 Anglo-Saxons.* Flying from the despotic rule of 
 Harald Haarfager, the Norwegian emigrants sought 
 peace and freedom in a remote and sterile island, 
 where the labours of the field, and the trading 
 intercourse necessary to their isolated position, were 
 relieved by the relaxation of innocent domestic re- 
 
 * Sharon Turner, Hist. Anglo-Saxons, Vol. I. B. iv. And yet if we are 
 to judge by the barbarous sentence of death inflictel by Ella upon Rugnar 
 Lodbrok, and the Huecesslve assassinations of the Northumbrian kings, the 
 Anglo-Saxon chieftains of the 0th century would appear to have only dif- 
 fered from their northern assailants in exhibiting less open vioknc-c and 
 personal daring. Sec Ibid. pp. 473, 507. Albcrich describes the incur- 
 sions of the Northmen as " modo voliemcntior, modo tolcrubilior." Albcric. 
 Chron. A. D. 837, p. 174. 
 
 .3: 
 
 .( 
 
r 
 
 ,. -( 
 
 136 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 m< : , if; !, 
 
 it' 
 
 
 4.1' r 
 
 unions, and intellectual pursuits ; and although 
 some ardent spirit, greedy of fame or plunder, or 
 stimulated by the more honourable ambition of ac- 
 quiring knowledge and experience by intercourse 
 with foreign lands, might occasionally join the 
 fierce band of the reckless viking, the voyages of the 
 Icelandic Northmen were almost exclusively con- 
 fined to trade, or discovery, or the formation of 
 peaceful settlements on those shores, which their 
 own enterprise, perseverance, and skill had opened 
 to their connection. 
 
 It may, perhaps, be urged in disparagement of 
 the early voyagers in the Polar Seas, that the sea- 
 sons were then more favourable to arctic discoveries, 
 than they have been in later ages, and that there- 
 fore the difficulties encountered by modem navi- 
 gators, were unknown to their predecessors ; but the 
 popular belief of a milder and more genial climate 
 having formerly prevailed in Europe, is not sup- 
 ported by any satisfactory evidence : indeed the opi- 
 nions of scientific enquirers would lead to a directly 
 opposite conclusion,* and there is, at least, ev^ry 
 
 * '' It is very difficult to ascertaiu tho precise condition of tlie weather in 
 distant ages. Tlie tliermometer was nut invented till 1590, hy the cele- 
 brated Sanctorio; nor was that valuable instrument reduced to a correct 
 standard before tlie year 1724, by the skill of Fahrenlieit. We have hence 
 no observations of temperature which go fu.ther buck than a century. 
 Prior to this period, we must glean our information from the loose and 
 scanty notices which are scattered through tlie old chronicles relative to 
 the state of the harvest, the quality of the vi.itage, or the endurance of 
 frost and snow in the winter. Great allowance, however, should be made 
 for the spirit, of cxuggeration and the tone of the marvellous which infect 
 all these rude historical monuments. On ghmcing over the incidental 
 notices of the state of the weather, it is obvious that no material change has 
 
 k'* 
 
 \ii) 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 137 
 
 reason to believe that the periodical changes, which 
 so often call forth complaints, and retrospective com- 
 parisons from the aged and infirm, respecting the 
 altered condition of the seasons in the present day, 
 were not less frequent or severe in those favoured 
 periods on which their praises are bestowed. 
 
 The supposed settlement on the eastern coast of 
 Greenland, (Eystribygd) now nearly inaccessible, 
 has tended to give currency to the popular notion of a 
 less rigorous climate prevailing in those regions, at 
 the period of the Icelandic emigration to that coast, 
 but the able and arduous investigation of Captain 
 Graah has dispelled that illusion, and there is now 
 little doubt, that the so called eastern settlement 
 extended little further than the south-eastern point 
 of the Greenland coast, the chief and almost only 
 habitations being seated upon the western shore.* 
 
 
 '■; J 
 
 r\i\ 
 
 taken place for the last thousand years in the climate of Europe ; but we 
 may coiyecture that it has gradually acquired rather a milder character ; 
 at least, instances of excessive severity appear on the whole to be of rarer 
 occurrence .... If the climate had undergone any real change in the more 
 temperate parts of Europe, a corresponding alteration, with very distinct 
 features', must inevitably have taken place in the Arctic regions. But a 
 dispassionate enquiry discovers no circumstances, which at all clearly point 
 at such a conclusion." Sir John Leslie, Profess. Nat. Phil. Univer. Edinb. 
 ap. " Polar Seas and Regions." Ed. Cab. Lib. Vol. I. pp. 55-67. 
 
 * Captain Graah of the Danish Navy was commissioned by his govern- 
 ment to explore the east coast of Greenland In 1828, and determine the 
 long mooted question of the locality of the Eystribygd, but after a most 
 perilous and difficult expedition he reached the latitude of 65o 18' n. without 
 flnding " the most trifling ruin, or trace of former civilization." After 
 bringing forward a mass of evidence in proof of the conclusion to which he 
 had arrived from the result of this journey, he thus sums up his able in- 
 vestigation : — 
 
 " Naur mar overveier alle disse Grunde, og tillige betsenker, at de Oamles 
 Coursfot'skrifter ere apocryphiskc, at dc, for dct Meste ere optegnede efter 
 
 '■■'I 
 
 ■ ;■-) 
 
 
m^ 
 
 in" 
 
 i 
 
 II! 
 
 It' .} 
 IJ'j ; 
 
 1'}^ 
 
 138 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 Of their remains Captain Graah has given highly 
 interesting and minute descriptions, enabling us 
 
 mundtlig ForttBlIing, at de forst cru samledc og komme for Lyset 100 Aar 
 efterat Seiladsen paa Gronland var ophort, at de ere samlede af Walchen- 
 dorff, der havde en forudfattet mening om Bygderens Beliggenket [en 
 mening der forresten hos ham var saare naturlig, saasom lian ikke kiendte 
 Beliggenheden af Cap Farvel, eller maaskee dromte om, at Gronland 
 havde nogen Vestkyst] at de forskieilige Afskrifter af disse Coursforskrifter 
 lyde forskielligt efter de forskieilige Afskriveres Fortolknings maade og 
 individuellc Meninger, at derimod GniPLAog Bjorn Jonsens Chorographie 
 baere umiskiendeligt Prseg of Oilgthed j saa mener jeg enhver upartisk 
 maae antage, at Oesterbygdcn ikke kan have ligget paa GriJnlands oeatlige 
 kyst." 
 
 " When we reflect upon all these points, and at the same time, consider 
 that the sailing directions [Coursforskrifter] of the antients are apocryphal, 
 that they for the most part, are taken down from oral relation, — that they 
 were first collected and brought to light 100 years after the communication 
 with Greenland had ceased, — that they have been put together by Walchen- 
 dorff, who had a preconceived opinion about the situation of the Colony (an 
 opinion which, moreover, was very natural for him, as he did not know the 
 position of Cape Farewell, nor, perhaps, had ever dreamed of Greenland 
 having any west coast at all) — that th^various copyists of these sailing 
 directions "cry according to the mode o" interpretation of tlic different 
 copyists, and their individual opinions, — that on the other hand, the Cho- 
 rography of Grlpla and Bjorn Jonson bear the unequivocal stamp of 
 genuineness, — I am of opinion that every impartial person will conclude 
 that the Eastern settlement could not have been situated on the east coast 
 of Greenland." 
 
 Undersogelse Reise til Oestkysten af Gronland efter kongolig Befalning 
 udfdrt i Aarene 1828-31, af \V. A. Graah, Capitain-Lieutenant i Soe- 
 Etaten. Kiobenhavn, 1832, pp. 187, 183. 
 
 Notwithstanding the clear and conclusive publication of Captain Graah, 
 some doubts have still been expressed upon this mysterious subject [Ed. 
 Cab. Lib. xxviii, p. 252] which appear to be founded chiefly upon Graah's 
 description of the appearance of the natives whom he met, and whose 
 features he found to differ from those of their countrymen on the western 
 coast, and to present a greater resemblance to Europeans. But an insur- 
 mountable objection to the existence of a colony on the east const of Green- 
 land is presented by the impracticable nature of the country intervening 
 between this coast and the west, and the impossibility of a mutual intercourse 
 being maintained between two settlements separated by a chain of lofty 
 mountains covered with perpetual snow, and obstructed by precipices and 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 139 
 
 from these and more recent examinations of several 
 localities on the west coast of Greenland, to trace 
 the vestiges of the old colonies from the most south- 
 em tjord at Cape Farewell, up to the neighbourhood 
 of Holsteinborg. 
 
 KAKORTOK CHURCH. 
 
 The remains in the vicinity of Juliana Hope (Ju- 
 lianeshaab), supposed by Graah to be the original 
 Eastern settlement, exceed in number and import- 
 ance all others in Greenland. In this district are 
 the remarkable ruins of Kakortck church, which 
 furnish evidence of a degree of civilization, that 
 could scarcely have been expected to exist at the 
 distant period of its construction. This ruin is 
 situated upon an arm of Igalikko :Qord, about 
 twelve English miles from Juliana Hope, and stands 
 upon a piece of table land near the water, bounded 
 on the other side by perpendicular rocks, beyond 
 which snow-clad mountains rise 3 to 4000 feet 
 above the level of the sea. It presents the remnant 
 of a simple but tasteful style of architecture ; the 
 walls are formed of large and partly hewn stones, 
 which were doubtless taken from the neighbouring 
 rock, both being of similar quality, and each stone 
 has been placed carefully at the side of and above 
 
 ■ ravines. See Graah, p. 12. The Editors of " Polar Seas and Regions," 
 have erroneously placed the principal localities of the Eystribygd [Eriks- 
 fjord, Oarda, and rierjulfsness,] all N. e. of Cape Farewell, whereas their 
 position as determined by Graah and Rafn is on the s. w. coast. Compare 
 Plate II. and " Cliart of Polar Seas." Ed. Cab Lib. Vol. I. 
 
 ■ .f-> 
 
 
 
 !•(• 
 
 ,>,5 
 
I'fli.'i 
 
 
 i. 
 
 140 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 the other ; no traces of any connecting medium arc 
 visible on the external wall, but small pieces of a 
 hard white material, apparently mortar, are seen, 
 here and there, among the stones on the inside. 
 The principal part of the church, which looks 
 towards the south, and upon the water, has four 
 rectangular window openings, and two door-ways, 
 the eastern of which is nearly one foot and a half 
 lower than the other, and probably served to admit 
 the officials of the church, while the western was 
 used by the congregation. In the northern front, 
 only one window-opening is perceptible, the wall in 
 which the corresponding apertures were placed, 
 having fallen down. The principal entrance appears 
 to have been at the western end, over which is a 
 large window; and upon the same level at the 
 eastern end is another very skilfully arched. Some 
 small rectangular niches appear in the interior 
 walls, which probably served or were intended to 
 hold tablets, with biblical texts, or images of saints, 
 carved in wood or bone.* 
 
 This remarkable building, which altogether ex- 
 hibits as much skill as taste in the construction, is 
 fifty-one feet in length by twenty-five feet in breadth ; 
 the northern and southern walls are over four feet 
 thick, and the height varies from seven to thirteen 
 feet, the thickness of the end walls is nearly five feet ; 
 the height of the eastern wall, which in the year 
 1777 was twenty-two feet, is now only eighteen feet 
 three inches, the western, nearly sixteen feet. The 
 
 ^ Graah, ap. Nord. Tidsk. for Oldkynd. B. 1, p. 151. scq. 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 141 
 
 principal entrance is three feet and a half wide, six 
 feet and a half high ; above the latter lies a large 
 stone twelve feet long, twenty-five inches broad, and 
 seven to eight inches high. The small niches are 
 twenty-three inches long, seventeen inches deep, 
 and fourteen inches high ; the vaulted window, on 
 the outside, three feet nine inches high, and two 
 feet one inch and a half broad : inside five feet four 
 inches high, four feet four inches broad ; the cor- 
 responding one in the western wall, — outside three 
 feet one inch and a half high, and one foot three 
 inches broad; and the four in the principal front, 
 together with the one in the north wall, — outside 
 two feet eleven inches high, and one foot four inches 
 wide ; inside four feet four inches high, and four 
 feet two inches wides : round the whole building, 
 at the distance of fifty or sixty feet, are traces of a 
 stone fence or boundary, which, however, is now 
 altogether in ruins.* 
 
 It is remarkable that no vestige of any artificial 
 floor or flagging was found by Captain Graah on 
 his examination of this i*uin, nor did a long and 
 careful examination of the ground within the walls 
 lead to the discovery of any objects of interest : 
 earth and stones of every shape and form lay inter- 
 mingled without order, wherever the excavation 
 was carried on, and neither monumental stones or 
 inscriptions were brought to light. It has hence 
 been concluded that Kakortok church was never 
 finished. Some of the stones, such as that over the 
 principal entrance, seem to have been expressly 
 
 * Graah, ap. Nord. Tiflsk. for Olclkyiid, B. I. p. 153. 
 
 V' 
 
 ^■if 
 
 I :•■■■>, 
 
 I ,'■ '.-:' 
 
 "•.i-\\ 
 
U2 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 intended to receive inscriptions ; but the circum- 
 stance of the church never having been completed 
 would account for their present condition. On the 
 whole, these ruins, compared with the other remains 
 in the same district, shew that Kakortok church was 
 one of the last, if not the very last building erected 
 in Greenland by the Icelandic colonists.* 
 
 
 
 
 
 1-1 i' 
 
 RUNIC STONE AT IGALIKKO. 
 
 A Greenlander named Christian, who lives in 
 Igalikko, about nine Danish miles from the colony 
 of Juliana Hope, and had adopted European habits, 
 went to look for some stones to repair his house, 
 amongst a heap of ruins, which lay closely piled to- 
 gether, and covered with turf and stones, at the end 
 of the remains of a building, which was supposed to 
 have been a church, and there met with a stone 
 which was marked with traces of writing. Shortly 
 after this he visited the Danish colony at Juliana 
 Hope, and mentioned the circumstance to the Di- 
 rector, Mr. Mathiesen, who immediately concluded 
 that it was a Runic stone. With true antiquarian 
 zeal he instantly took measures to ascertain the 
 fact, and having prevailed upon the discoverer to 
 convey the stone by water to the colony, he trans- 
 mitted it to Copenhagen by an opportunity which 
 fortunately happened to present itself at the moment, 
 prudently retaining a copy of the inscription. In 
 the spring of 1830 this remarkable memorial 
 reached Copenhagen, and was submitted to the 
 
 * Graah, p. 165. 
 
■'hi 
 
 BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 143 
 
 examination of the leading Runologists, who found 
 the following characters admitting of a clear Ice- 
 landic interpretation : — 
 
 MR: 
 
 
 which, in Roman letters, would be ; — 
 
 VIGDis M.D. HVILIR HEIR-.GLEDE GUD SAL HENNAR. 
 
 The name of Vigdis occurs frequently in old 
 Icelandic narratives, and is still used in Iceland ; 
 the initials M. D. are intended to shew whose 
 daughter this particular Vigdis was, M. being the 
 initial of the father. Now among the various Ice- 
 landic names beginning with M. those of Mur, 
 Markus, and Magnus are the most common ; the 
 initials mean therefore Mars dotter, Markus dotter, 
 or Magnus dotter, and the inscription may be 
 read : — 
 
 " Vigdis Mdrs dotter hvilir her : Gledii Gud sal hennar." or — 
 " Vigdis Mars dauglitcr rests here : May God gladden her soul. " 
 
 This remarkable monument, affording such 
 striking evidence of Christian worship and religious 
 faith, may be ascribed to the 11th or 12th century; 
 the stone is thin and flat, and of the red sandstone 
 
 5.1 
 
 i^J, 
 
I'l!! ' 
 
 I 
 
 i: 
 
 .11 
 
 I 
 
 I'M: 
 
 144 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 formation ; the part below the inscription has been 
 broken off, leaving a length of two feet fifteen inches 
 by fourteen inches, with a thickness of two inches ; 
 from the top of the stone to the beginning of the in- 
 scription, it measures two feet, and the lower extre- 
 mity was probably the same length.* 
 
 RUNIC STONE AT IKIGEIT.f 
 
 About two English miles north of Friederichsthal, 
 on the other side of the neighbouring fjord, Lat. 
 60" N. where a number of antient ruins are still 
 visible, the Rev. Mr. de Fries, Principal of the Mis- 
 sion of the United Brethren, who had established a 
 settlement on the coast in 1733, found, in the year 
 1831, a monumental stone, over the entrance of a 
 Greenlander's house, where it had long lain. He had 
 it immediately conveyed to the Colony of Juliana 
 Hope, from whence Mr. Mathiesen, the chief of the 
 Danish settlement there, secured its removal to Co- 
 penhagen. This stone is flat, and of an oblong form, 
 being three feet and a half in length, by two feet at 
 the top, and one foot and a half at the bottom, where 
 it has been broken off. The thickness is five 
 inches at the upper and two inches at the lower 
 end ; it is of hard granite, but the upper surface 
 appears to have been defaced by long exposure 
 to rain and sleet. Above is a circular figure, and 
 
 * Noi'disk Tidskriftfor Oldkyndiglied, B. 1. p. 221. Antiq. Amer. p. 
 344. 
 
 t Supposed by Graah to be the antient Herjulfaness. Undersbgelse 
 Reise, ^ . 189. 
 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 145 
 
 immediately ^clow, a long cross bounded by an 
 oval. Under the horizontal arm of the cross, and 
 parallel with the perpendicular limb, is an Icelandic 
 inscription in the old northern Latin letters, 
 which were in use at the beginning of the middle 
 ages. This inscription is contained in two lines, 
 one being on each side of the perpendicular, or 
 lower arm, and the letters are exactly similar to 
 those that are met with in Northern inscriptions of 
 the 12th centurv, beinjj as follows : — 
 
 HER : HVILIR : IIRO/ 
 KOLGRIMS: S. 
 
 Above the oval boundary are traces of another, 
 probably older inscription, the greater part of 
 which is defaced, or broken off; on that which 
 remains the word IDUS is visible. It is probable, 
 therefore, thai here the day of the month was 
 given, according to the Roman calendar, which 
 was in general use amongst the northern clergy, in 
 the middle ages. After the letter O in the prin- 
 cipal inscription, appears an oblique line, which 
 could scarcely have belonged to any other letter 
 than an A. and the inscription may therefore be 
 read : — *' Her Hvilir Hroaldr (or Hroar) Kol- 
 grimsson" — " Here rests Hi'oar Kolgrimsson." 
 The name of Hroaldr or Hroar, as well as that of 
 Kolgrimr is genuine old northern, and both are 
 often met with in the narratives of earlier times, 
 although now, almost entirely gone out of use : the 
 name of Kolgrimr appears to have been continued 
 
 L 
 
 !:■'::.':' 
 1 / ' 
 
 t 
 
 ,■!'! 
 
 • ■ M 
 
146 
 
 DISCOVBKY OF AMERICA 
 
 ¥"> 
 
 ii!' 
 
 ■I 
 
 amongst the Greenlanders of Norwegio- Icelandic 
 descent down to the later years of the colony.* 
 
 These are but a few of the numerous evidences 
 of the antient Icelandic colony which are still 
 visible. Captain Graah enumerates no less than 
 six or seven places where the traces of churches 
 have been found on the western coast of Green- 
 land,! and the labours of the Antiquarian Society 
 of Copenhagen are every year bringing to light 
 some new and interesting d -tail connected with the 
 history of the early settlors.! 
 
 The final fate of this colony is, however, still in- 
 volved in mystery. After having existed a flourish- 
 ing settlement for more than 400 years, during the 
 whole of which period a communication appears to 
 have been kept up with the several branches in 
 the western hemisphere, — it vanishes altogether 
 from the page of history ; nor was it until the 
 pious, ardent, and indefatigable Hans Egede, after 
 years of patient and ineffectual endeavour, at length 
 succeeded in obtaining permission from the Danish 
 government to form a settlement on the coast, that 
 Greenland, in the beginning of the 18th century, 
 again became known to Europe. 
 
 The scanty notices of its history from the end of 
 the period embraced by the Sagas, up to the time 
 of Egede's pious mission shall now be briefly related ; 
 
 J 
 
 * Nordisk Tidskr. f. Oldkyndig. B. 1. p. 221 , seq. Antiq. Amer. p. 340-1 . 
 t Undersogelse Reise, p. 187. See also Pingel ap. Nord. Tldsk. f. Old- 
 kynd. p. 313, seq. 
 i SeeGronland's Historiske Mindesmserker, passim. 
 
 iM 
 
nV TH15 NOKTHMKN. 
 
 147 
 
 but as tho oarlior accounts aro derived from untieiit 
 Icelandic manuscripts, a simple reference to which 
 might not, perhaps, be satisfactory to the general 
 reader, it becomes necessary to follow Professor 
 Rafn,* and shew the nature of the documents on 
 which these annalistic records are founded : — 
 
 1. Annalcs Islandorimi Reg'd, being Annals of 
 Icelandic History from the time of Julius Cajsar to 
 the birth of Christ, and thence by another writer 
 to the year 1328, where they terminate. From a 
 passage in the title, which states that the record 
 contains occurrences from the time of Ctesar down 
 to the 5th year of the Emperor Frederic I. it is 
 inferred that the writer of the first part lived in 
 the year 115G, after which the annals were copied 
 and brought down by another hand to 1307, to 
 which period the copy may be referred : the re- 
 mainder was then continued by a third compiler 
 to 1328. (R.) 
 
 2. Annalcs Vetustissirni. From the bi»th of 
 Christ to the year 1313, witten in the 14th cen- 
 tury. (V.) 
 
 3. Annoles Skalholtini. (Skalholts annal hinn 
 forni) Antient Annals of the Bishopric of Skalholt 
 in Iceland, written in the middle of the 14th cen- 
 tury. These are supposed to have commenced 
 with the birth of Christ, but the part previous to the 
 year 140 is wanting, and they terminate with 1350. 
 
 4. Uogmanns Annall. Annals of the Lagmen or 
 Governors of Iceland. The first part is lost ; 
 
 * Exccrptaex Annalibus Islanaoriim Antiq. Amcr. p. 2r)'>. 
 
 l2 
 
 
 \f'- ! 
 
 1J..I 
 
 (^m 
 
 

 1 
 
 
 V .1 
 
 B: 
 
 1^ :;■''':' 
 
 148 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 the remainder extendi^ from 272 to 1392, the 
 interval from 400 to 050 being also deficient. 
 These annals accord with the MS. called by Bishop 
 Brynjulf Svcinson, who lived in the middle of the 
 17th century, " Skalholfs annai hyna nyut' or 
 *' Revised Annals of Skalholt," which extend from 
 A. D. 70 to 1430. These two series were united by 
 Arnas Magnussen to form the codex, No. 427, 4to. 
 so that the Lagmen's Annals, as far as they extend, 
 may be considered the foundation of the series : to 
 these also properly belongs the paper codex. No. 417, 
 which extends from a. m. 39 IG to a. d. 1427- (L.) 
 
 5. Annates Reseniini, so called in honour of the 
 eminent Resenius, Councillor of State, and Pro- 
 fessor of Icelandic Literature, by whom they were 
 preserved. They embrace the period extending 
 from 228 to 1295, and appear to have been auto- 
 graphs written at the termination of the period. 
 (Res.) 
 
 6. Annales Flateyensis, so called from having 
 been found in the Codex F'lateyensis. They were 
 written by the ecclesiastic Magnus Thorhallson, 
 and include a period of time extending from the 
 creation of the world to the year 1395. (F.) 
 
 7. Annales HolenseSf obtained by Torfaeus from 
 the episcopal seat of Holum in Iceland. In 1689 
 he gave them to Arnas Magnussen, in whose col- 
 lection they are now to be found. No. 412, in 4to. : 
 they extend from 636 to 1394. (H.) 
 
 8. Annales Groenlandicij compiled by Bjorn 
 Johnson of Skardsoe, and inserted at the end of his 
 
BY Tin; NOIITMMKN. 
 
 no 
 
 
 Annals of Greenland (Greenland's anniill) under the 
 title of: Stuttllfjir atjrips annular um Grmiland 
 i vlssu (htali, or " Short Annals of Greenland for 
 certain years." 
 
 From these various contemporary documents, 
 which will he distinguished hy the final letters or 
 syllahles appended above, the following chronolo- 
 gical details have been obtained : — 
 1121. Erik, Bishop of Greenland, went to seek 
 o'-** Vinland. R.F. 
 Bishop Erik sought out Vinland. Res. 
 Bishop Erik Upse sought Vinland. L. 
 Bishop Erik Upse went from Greenland to 
 
 seek out Vinland. cxscr. 417. 
 Erik, Bishop of Greenland, sought Vin- 
 land. H. 
 Erik, Bishop of Greenland, went to seek 
 Vinland. G. 
 1285. A land is discovered west from Iceland. V.F. 
 New land is found - - - .f H. 
 Adalbrand and Thorvald, the sons of Ilelge, 
 
 found the new land. R. 
 Adalbrand and Thorvald, Helge's sons, found 
 
 new land west from Iceland. G. 
 The feather islandsj are discovered. S.L. 
 1288. Rolf is sent by King Erik to seek out the 
 new land, and called on people from Ice- 
 land to go with him. C. 
 
 * " For at leita." Erik is mentioned in Rimbcgla, p. 320, as the first 
 Bishop of Grecnlaiul, nlso in the Landnami'ibck, Lib. I. c. 13, as " Groenlan- 
 dinga biskup." Antiq. Ainer. p. 2ri8. 
 
 t " Fannst nyja Imid," the rest is wanting in the M.S. 
 
 \ Di'meyjar, probably Penguin and Bacaloa islands, N.Ii;. coast of Anieiicn. 
 
I,' IV 
 
 41 
 
 •111 J' 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 .'1 
 
 t ' 
 
 .,^/ 
 
 11 
 
 il? 
 
 m 4^ 
 
 ■■ ■■■^ it _ 
 
 1.5() 
 
 DISCOVIiUY OF AMERICA 
 
 rj8<). Kiiiir Erik sends Rolf to Iceland to seek out 
 the new land. F. 
 
 19JJ0. Rolf travelled through Iceland, and called 
 out men for a voyage to the new land.* F. 
 
 1295. Landa-Rolf died.t F. 
 
 1317. There came XIII. sea-ships to Iceland. 
 The Eindrida was lost to the westward 
 on Langaness ; the men and the greater 
 part of the goods were saved. The Bes- 
 salang went to pieces off Sida ; of her 
 crew were drowned Halldor Magri and 
 Guthorm Stall, and in all XIX men ; 
 there was also much damage done to the 
 cargo. There were besides VI ships 
 driven back. There came also a ship 
 from Greenland smaller in size than the 
 small Icelandic craft ; it came into the 
 outer Streamfjord ; it had lost an an- 
 chor ; therein were XVII men, who had 
 been to Markland, but on their return, 
 were driven in here. In all were here for 
 the winter XVI 11 sea-ships, besides the 
 two that were lost in the summer. S. 
 
 * The notices of " Nyja land,'' and " Diinejjar,'' would seem to refer to 
 il ro-discovcry of some pnrts of the eastern coast of America, which had 
 been previously visited by earlier voyagers. The original Icelandic ap- 
 pellation of Nyja land, or Nyja fundu land, would have naturally led to 
 the modern English name of Newfoundland, given by Cabot, to whose 
 knowledge the discovery would have come through the medium of the com- 
 mercial intercourse between England and Iceland in the ISth century. 
 
 tThe Lagmans Annals make mention of continued storms and pestilential 
 disease, followed by famine, in 1287, (Antiq. Amer. p. 261), which may iic- 
 count for tlip imperfect records of this period. From tiio cognomen of La iicld 
 or Explorer, aiiplied to Holf, (.11 tiiis; octusion, tlie expi'dition would appear 
 to iiave taken place. 
 
 i^:,;:,'. 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 151 
 
 There came a ship from Greenland, which 
 had sailed to Markland, and therein eigh- 
 teen men. F. 
 
 Thus far the contemporary Annals of Iceland. 
 We are next informed that during the episcopate of 
 Bishop Alf, who lived in the year 1349, or accord- 
 ing to others, 1379, the Western settlement of 
 Greenland was attacked by the Skrselings or Esqui- 
 maux, when eighteen Greenlanders of Icelandic 
 descent were killed, and two boys carried off pri- 
 soners. On this being made known in the Eastern 
 settlement, Ivar Bere, or Bardson, who appears to 
 have been bailiff or superintendent at the Bishop's 
 residence, was dispatched to the assistance of the 
 neighbouring colony, but found it deserted, and 
 meeting with nothing but cattle, he had these 
 conveyed to the ship, and returned : with this event 
 closes the history of the Vestribygd.* 
 
 But of the Eastern settlement we have tidings 
 down to the middle of the 15th century : trade was 
 carried on between it and Denmark until towards 
 the end of the 14th century, although the colony was 
 not annually visited, as appears from the circum- 
 stance that when in 1388, Bishop Hendrick went 
 to Greenland, he received orders to have the royal 
 dues lodged in a specified place, as no ship had 
 gone to the country that year. The last Bishop, 
 according to TorfsBus, was Andreas, or Endride 
 Andreasson, who was appointed to the office in 
 1406, but whether he ever reached the countrv was 
 
 * Graah, p. 4, scq. 
 
 (■■•^ 
 
I;**; ...ft'. 
 
 id'i 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 ■ ' 
 
 \:\ 
 
 V'i 
 
 B* 1/ 
 
 W. 
 
 
 unknown until Professor Finn Magnusen, a few 
 years since, discovered that three ye?rs subsequent 
 to that period, nameh in 1409, he filled the OxHce at 
 the episcopal seat of Gardar, and there prepared, or 
 was a party to the contract of a marriage, from which 
 the -learned Runologist himself, as well as many 
 other disting dished Icelanders owe their descent. 
 After this period all communication between Green- 
 land and the rest of the Danish territory, and con- 
 sequently between Greenland and America, appears 
 to have ceased, for Queen Margaret and King Erik 
 forbade their subjects to trade to the country. 
 The war which then raged in the north of Europe 
 also prevented vessels from visiting the coast, and 
 thus no knowledge of the colony could be ob- 
 tained.* Meantime some further light has been 
 thrown upon the fate of the settlers by the discovery 
 in the Papal archives, of a brief from Nicholas V. 
 to the Bishops of vSkalholt and Holum, li^ritten in 
 the vear 1448, which runs as follows : — 
 
 *' With reference to my beloved children, who 
 are natives of and dwell in the great island of 
 Greenland, which is said to lie on the extremest 
 boundaries of the ocean, northwards of the king- 
 dom of Norway, and in the district of Throndjem, 
 have their pitiful complaints greatly moved my ear, 
 and awakened our sympathy, seeing that the inha- 
 bitants, for almost six hundred years, have held 
 the Christian faith, which, by the teaching of 
 their first instructor, King Olaf, was established 
 
 ' < iraiiii, p. .J. 
 
BY THE NOUTHMEN. 
 
 153 
 
 amongst them, firm and immoveable under the 
 Roman See, and the Apostolic forms ; and seeing 
 that, in after years, from the constant and ardent 
 zeal of the inhabitants of the said island, many 
 sacred buildings, and a handsome cathedral, have 
 be*^n erected in this island, in which the ervice 
 ot God was diligently performed, until heathen 
 foreigners from the neighbouring coast, thirty years 
 since, came with a fleet against them, and fell with 
 fury upon all the people who dwelt there, and 
 laid waste the land itself and the holy buildings 
 with tire and sword, without leaving upon the island 
 Greenland, other than the few people who are said 
 to lie far off, and which they, by reason of high 
 mountains, could not reach, and took off the much 
 to be commiserated inhabitants of both sexes, par- 
 ticularly those whom they looked upon as convenient 
 and strong enough for the constant burden of 
 slavery, and took home with them those against 
 whom they could best direct their barbarity. But 
 now since the same complaint further saith that 
 many, in the course of time, have come back from 
 said captivity, and after having, here and there, 
 rebuilt the devastated places, now wish to have the 
 worship of their God again established, and set 
 upon the former footing j and since they, in con- 
 sequence of the before named pressing calamity, 
 wantino- the necessary means themselves, have 
 hitherto not had the power to support their priest- 
 hood and superiors, therefore, during all that 
 period of thirty years, hav(^ been in want of the 
 
 .\^ 
 
 . 'iV 
 
1 1 ' " 
 
 154 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 consolations of the Bishops and the services of the 
 Priests, except when some one through desire of 
 the service of God, has been willing to undertake 
 tedious and toilsome journeys to the people whom 
 the fury of the barbarians has spared, — Seeing that 
 we have a complete knowledge of all these things, 
 so do we now charge and direct ye brethren, who, 
 we are informed, are the nearest Bishops to the 
 said island, that ye, after previously conferring with 
 the chief Bishop of the Diocese, if the distance of 
 the place allows of it, to nominate and send them a 
 fit and proper man as Bishop."* 
 
 Captain Graah conjectures that the fleet thus 
 alluded to in the Papal brief, came from England, 
 which country having, about that time, suifered a 
 great decrease in her population by the pestilential 
 disease known by the name of the " black death," 
 sought to repair the injury by seizing the inhabit- 
 ants of those northern lands that were preserved 
 from this plague. Many complaints, he says, were 
 made upon this subject by Margaret of Denmark and 
 her successors, until, in 1433, a treaty was made 
 between England and Denmark, containing the 
 conditions that "whatever people have been car- 
 ried from Iceland, Finmark, Helgoland, and other 
 places. His Majesty of England shall provide that 
 wherever they are found in his dominions, they 
 shall go back, and shall receive payment for their 
 services, and so order that thev come free to their 
 
 Extract from Vatican Aichivcs in Paul Egcdcs Eftorrctningcr, p. t>7, 
 
 scq. 
 
13Y THE NOUTHMEN. 
 
 155 
 
 homes again ; and it shall be made known over all 
 England within a year and a day after the date of 
 these letters, of the said captives release."* This 
 opinion is strengthened by the circumstance of Pope 
 Eugenius IV. having in this same year (1433) 
 nominated one Bartholomaius to the Bishopric of 
 Greenland.f 
 
 But the fate as well of thos;e who escaped the fury 
 of the hostile invaders, as of those who afterwards 
 returned from captivity, is still involved in mystery. 
 Probably they were attacked and exterminated by 
 the Esquimaux like their countrymen of the Western 
 settlement, or being so reduced in numbers bv the 
 above mentioned aggressions, and unprovided with 
 the Ministers of their religion, became heathens, and 
 amalgamated with the natives : or they might have 
 
 * Undei'sogclse, Reise, p. 7. Capt. Graah gives no authority for tin's ex- 
 tract ; and I have been unable to find any reference to the alleged treaty, 
 either in the Statutes, Chronicles, or State Papers for the reign of Henry 
 VI., to which period the extract refers: Grafton's Chronicle, however, as 
 well as the Statutes, so far favour the statement as to record a destructive 
 plague in and in the neighbourhood of London, in the y»ar 1405, and a repa- 
 rative treaty with Denmark in 142i}j which contain the following passages : — ■ 
 
 " 1405 — 7. Tliis summer the plague of pestilence reigned so sore in the 
 Citie of London, and in the eountrie round about the Citie, that the King 
 durst not repayre thither." Graft. Chron. ''It is ordeyned that none 
 of his liege jieople nor subirctes of his realme of England, by audacitie of 
 thoyr fo!y, presume to enter the roiilmes, landes, domynyont:, striytes, terri- 
 tories, jurisdictions, and places of the sayd King of Denmarke, against the 
 ordynons, prohybycyon, and interdictyon of the same his uncle above re- 
 nionibeied, and in contemj)! of the same, upon paine of forfayture of all 
 thcyr movable goodes and imprysonment of theyr person at the Kynge's 
 will." Stat. 8th Henry VI. (1429.) 
 
 t \ at. Arcli. ap. P. Egede, p. 86. According to Crantz, the suilrugau 
 Hishop of Uoeskilde subscribed himself Hishop of Greenland in 153:3 See 
 Hist, of Greenland, Vol. I. p. 253. 
 
 j 
 
■I 
 III' 
 
 :k ■ 
 
 ¥ r 
 
 156 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 voluntarily left the country, on finding that all trade 
 with it was discontinued, for being dependent upon 
 foreign ships for their supplies, they were necessa- 
 rily reduced to great privations on this intercourse 
 being arrested. The following, however, is the 
 story current in the country itself: — 
 
 •* Many winters after the old Northmen had been 
 cleared from the land and destroyed by the Green- 
 landers, there still lived some on the northern arm 
 of Igalikofjord, among whom was a large old man, 
 of more than ordinarv strength, whose name was 
 Igaliko, after whom the fjord was named by the 
 Greenlanders. He was as chief over all the other 
 Northmen at the Qord, and had sons, one of whom 
 was yet in his childhood. The Greenlanders had 
 many times sought to destroy him and his family, 
 but had always rciturned in disgrace from the at- 
 tempt, and some of them on such occasions had 
 fallen. But having determined to extirpate the 
 Northmen from their land, as they called it, they 
 planned new means of effecting their design, which 
 were attended with success : — During the summer, 
 the wind generally blows up the fjords, consequently 
 into Igaliko fjord, and on this wind was their chief 
 dependance. Several of the Greenlanders got into 
 one of the boats usually worked by women in that 
 country, and covering themselves in white skins, 
 lay down in the bottom of the boat, so that none of 
 them were visible. Thev took with them arms, 
 lances and harpoons, dry moss, and other convenient 
 materials for ignition, and thus provided, allowed 
 
 ■J :f - 
 
BY TUK NORTHMEN. 
 
 157 
 
 the boat to be driven by the wind up the fjord. 
 These white boats and men, were looked upon by 
 the Northmen as blocks of ice, and excited no alarm. 
 Towards midnight the Greenlanders leaving the 
 boat, crept to the dwellings of the Northmen, and 
 fired the houses while the inmates slept, then stand- 
 ing at the outside ready to moet the unfortunate 
 settlers, as they attempted to escape, killed them on 
 the spot. All fell, except the aged warrior Igaliko 
 and his younger son, for he seeing that his comrades 
 were slain, took up his ci\ild, and fled to the moun- 
 tains. The Greenlanders followed ; but old as the 
 chieftain was, and rendered still less able to cope 
 with his pursuers by the burden of his child, he 
 succeeded in eluding their grasp, and efifected his 
 escape. What afterwards became of him is un- 
 known, as neither he nor his son was ever seen or 
 heard of more."* 
 
 Years passed without Greenland being thought 
 of by the Danish government, which became too 
 much occupied with domestic dissensions and de- 
 structive wars, to regard the interests of so distant 
 and unprofitable a settlement; at length in the 
 reign of Christian II. (1523) Erik Walchendorff, 
 Archbishop of Throndhjem, probably excited by the 
 recent discoveries in the Western hemisphere, con- 
 ceived the project of revisiting the neglected colony, 
 and having collected all the old accounts and tradi- 
 tions relating to the land, constructed a chart for 
 
 M- 
 
 * Arctander, ns quoted by Graah in Nordisk. Tidskr. for Oldkyndig, 
 B. l.p. 165. 
 
wrr 
 
 ' <- ' ""■ 
 
 
 ht I 
 
 i'j 
 
 ■l: :i 
 
 
 158 
 
 DISCOVERY OK AMERICA 
 
 the guidan^-c of mariners, and proposed to the (lo- 
 vernment a rediscovery of the (Greenland coast, and 
 a resumption of the trade; he even offered to de- 
 fray the cost of the expedition from his private 
 means, on being secured the profits of the trade for 
 a period of ten years. But the offer was rejected, 
 and Walchendorff incurring the enmity of the power- 
 ful Sigbret, fell into disgrace, and died at Rome. 
 
 Upon Walchendorff's compilations are principally 
 founded the opinions of those who have not only 
 placed the Eastern but Western settlement on tlu^ 
 east coast of Greenland ; an opinion general in his 
 time ; and very natural, for Davis' Straits had no* 
 then been discovered, and the configuration of the 
 coast was unknown : at least no more known than 
 that it was the nearest land west of Iceland, and 
 that Erik the Red had steered westwards when he 
 discovered the country.* 
 
 Christian III. (1559) removed the prohibition 
 established by Queen Margaret against trading to 
 Greenland, and sent out ships to explore the coun- 
 try, but without success ; several attempts were 
 made in the succeeding reigns down to that of Fre- 
 derick III. (I67O) with similar results : ice ren- 
 dered the east coast altogether inaccessible, and the 
 ferocity of the inhabitants on the western side, 
 where some of tlie explorers landed, and adopted 
 the most unlikely means to conciliate a suspicious 
 and barbarous people, precluded all possibility of 
 friendly intercourse on that boundary, and now 
 
 * Graah, p. 8. 
 
IW TUli NOUTHMKN. 
 
 ir>[) 
 
 again, for a series of years, Greenland was like the 
 region of romance. 
 
 Then stood forth Hans Egcde, Pastor of Vaag, 
 in the northern district of Norway, and with him 
 commences a new era in the annals of Greenland. 
 This remarkable man was at once the rc-discoverer 
 of the land, and the Apostle of Christianity to its 
 inhabitants. The dream of a deserted Christian 
 colony on those distant shores, cut oiF by a stormy 
 ocean, and an icy barrier, from all communication 
 with their fellow countrymen in the parent state, 
 and relapsed, perhaps, into Paganism from the want 
 of teachers and ministers of religion, passed in vivid 
 colouring before his mind, not long after he had 
 taken possession of his benefice in 1708 ; and soon 
 completely engrossed his thoughts, and engaged all 
 his sympathies. In I7IO, he drew up a memorial 
 to the Danish Government on the subject, and ad- 
 dressed letters to the Bishops of Trondhjem and 
 Bergen, soliciting their support in aid of his propo- 
 sition, that steps should be taken to inquire into 
 and relieve the spiritual and temporal wants of the 
 supposed neglected colony. The Bishops promised 
 fair, but put forward, in a strong light, the various 
 dangers and difficulties with which such an expedi- 
 tion must necessarily be attended : meantime the 
 novel proposition became public and met with the 
 greatest outcry and derision. Egede's more inti- 
 mate friends, and relatives in particular, raised the 
 strongest objections to the plan, and instigated his 
 wife and family to turn him from his purpose ; this 
 
 .4 
 
 
ff" 
 
 f*' 
 
 
 il. 
 
 
 i!:- *■ 
 
 Ih; ■■■'■', ; ' 
 
 lOO 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMEniCA 
 
 gave rise to much domestic pain, and the tears and 
 remonstrances of a beloved partner, acting upon 
 an affectionate heart, shook his resolution to such 
 an extent that he made a powerful effort to sacrifice 
 his philanthropic project to her peace of mind. 
 But the 37th verse of the tenth chapter of St. 
 Matthew,* he says, roused him to a sense of duty; 
 his mental agitation was renewed, and he became a 
 stranger to repose either by day or by night. Mean- 
 time a change had come over the feelings of his 
 wife, and she suddenly expressed her readiness to 
 accede to his wishes. Now all difficulties appeared 
 to vanish ; he looked forward with sanguine confi- 
 dence to the success of his benevolent plan, and 
 joyfully renewed his petitions and solicitations to 
 the Bishops and superior authorities. But, now he 
 was put off on the plea of deferring the matter to 
 more peaceable times, and again the whole scheme 
 was characterized as wild and visionary. This led 
 him in 1715, to draw up a vindication of his con- 
 duct, which was quite unanswerable, but still every 
 effort was made to turn him from his purpose : the 
 rigour of the climate, — the dangers of the voyage 
 and abode in a barbarous countrv, — the madness of 
 giving up a certainty for an uncertainty, — every 
 argument, in short, that could by ingenuity be 
 brought to bear upon the imprudence of the ex- 
 pedition was carefully put before him ; nor were 
 there wanting those who (inconsistent as it might 
 
 * " He that loveth father or mother more than me is not worthy of 
 me,'' &c. 
 
 i*. 
 
«Y THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 IGI 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 be) cast imputations of vain and worldly motives 
 upon his proposed self-expatriation in so disin- 
 terested a cause. 
 
 Wearied by vain promises and calumnious reports, 
 Egede at length resolved upon pleading his own 
 cause in person before the King (Frederick IV.) ; 
 and throwing up his benefice in I7I8, he tore him- 
 self from a congregation by whom he was adored, 
 and repaired to Bergen. Here he was looked upon 
 as a fanatic, but heedless of the ridicule that was 
 sought to be thrown upon his benevolent design, 
 he proceeded to Copenhagen, presented his memo- 
 rial to the College of Missions, and received the 
 gratifying intelligence that the King would take the 
 subject into his gracious consideration. 
 
 The result was that, in November, 1719, a Royal 
 Ordinance was addressed to the magistrates of 
 Bergen, directing them to enquire into and report 
 upon the practicability ana advantages of forming 
 a settlement on the coast of Greenland ; but no 
 encouragement was derived from this enquiry, and 
 Egede again beheld himself the object of scorn and 
 mockery : at length by individual application he 
 succeeded in persuading some merchants to enter 
 into a subscription in aid of the proposed expedi- 
 tion ; and one commercial gentleman of Hamburg 
 undertook to furnish a large proportion of the re- 
 quired capital ; but this individual soon after with- 
 drew from his engagement, and Egede, baffled and 
 disappointed in the completion of those plans which 
 appeared to be on the eve of execution, had also to 
 
 'A "I 
 
 ■'A' I 
 
 A 
 
 M 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 
 // 
 
 ^ 
 
 // ^/>, 
 
 < V.^^ 
 
 Z 
 
 
 m 
 
 %° 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 
 
 20 
 
 1.8 
 
 U III! 1.6 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 y; 
 
 .'^? 
 
 '/ 
 
 w 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 \ 
 
 iV 
 
 ^ 
 
 <^ 
 
 
 ^J'^?^ 
 
 ^^^* 
 
 c> 
 
 23 WfST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716)873-4503 
 

 i 
 
 J 
 
 Is 
 
 * 
 
pi V ■ 
 
 J 
 
 162 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 bear the weight of the increased slander and evil 
 rumours, which his failure called forth. Thus 
 passed another year; but this ardent minister of 
 religion was not disheartened: he continued his 
 petitions and solicitations as well to the Govern- 
 ment as to private individuals, and at length suc- 
 ceeded in prevailing upon a certain number of the 
 Bergen merchants to come forward with a subscrip- 
 tion of about 40/. each : to this he added the whole 
 of his owii little property, about 60/. more, making 
 altogether the sum of 10,000 dollars, or 2,000/. 
 sterling, a capital ill proportioned to the extent of 
 the undertaking ; nevertheless a ship was bought ; 
 two more were also freighted for the voyage, the 
 one for the whale fishery, and the other to bring 
 back tidings of the expedition, and in the ensuing 
 spring Egede had the unspeakable gratification of 
 seeing his perseverance rewarded by the announce- 
 ment that the King of Denmark approved of the 
 undertaking, and appointed him chief of the colony, 
 and missionary to Greenland, with a salary of 60/. 
 a year, besides 40/. for his equipment.* 
 
 Thus after ten years of protracted, discouraging 
 endeavour, did this admirable minister of a philan- 
 thropic faith, unawed by the terrors of a frozen zone 
 and a barbarous people, — of physical privations, and 
 an isolated unfriended position, far from the social 
 comforts of a tranquil home, — go forth to spread the 
 blessings of the Gospel in a heathen land I 
 
 * Otnstmndelig og iidforlig Relation ani>aande Den Gronlandske Misnious 
 Bcgyndchc og Fortsicttelse, &c. of Hans Egedc, Kiiibenhavn, 1738. 
 
••vf 
 
 nV THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 163 
 
 Kgede embarked at Bergen on the ^nd of May, 
 1721, taking with him his wife and four children, 
 the eldest of whom was only twelve years of age, and 
 after a long and perilous voyage of eight weeks, 
 reached an island at the entrance of Baal's river, in 
 lat. G4" on the western coast of Greenland, and 
 called the place Good Hope. The settlers were at 
 first well received, but their preparations for re- 
 maining were viewed by the natives with distrust 
 and alarm, and various means were employed to 
 deter them from the formation of a colony: the 
 Angekkoks or wizards, in particular, seeing their 
 influence endangered by the pi opagation of an ex- 
 alted doctrine, which prostratod the pretensions of 
 human power, used various spells and incantations 
 to expel the colonists, and prevent the progress of 
 their religious labours ; but the prudent, mild, and 
 conciliating measures and demeanour of Egede en- 
 abled him, after a time, to overcome these preju- 
 dices, set on foot a commercial intercourse, and 
 eventually to make considerable progress in the 
 good work which he had so zealously undertaken. 
 The physical fatigues and privations, however, to 
 which the settlers were obliged to submit, were of a 
 most harassing and trying character; their chief 
 dependence for food was upon ships from home, and 
 the non-arrival or delay of these vessels often placed 
 them on the verge of famine, and naturally created 
 a mutinous and discontented spirit among those of 
 his associates who were less prepared to withstand 
 these trials than the pious Miss'.onary and his 
 
 M 2 
 
If 
 
 1()4 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA 
 
 ^i'lk 
 
 i • V 
 
 
 family. " For almost one entire year,'' writes Paul 
 Egcdc, "rye meal porridge was ou/ only food." 
 "This year (I726) wo were again in great want, 
 owing to the non-arrival of the ships ; our food was 
 generally the flesh of the seal, which gives no 
 nourishment, so that our men could not row for an 
 hour without the oar.^ falling from their hands."* 
 On all these occasions his exemplary parent exhi- 
 bited a model of Christian faith and fortitude, and 
 regardless of his own necessities, was alone distressed 
 by the sufterings of those around him. " In this 
 need," writes the son, "my dear father, who cared 
 for us all, undertook a difficult journey to the south 
 bay, about fifty miles (200 English miles) north of 
 the colony, to see if he could there meet with some 
 Dutch vessels, from which he mi'TL; be able to pro- 
 cure supplies, and disencumber hi.iiself of nine of 
 the men. After an absence of fourteen days, he re- 
 turned, having found twelve ships in the bay. They 
 took the men, but could give little help to the 
 twenty-one who remained. Eight men were now 
 obliged to live on the allowance of one. Groats for 
 seal soup were weighed out in a pair of silver scales. 
 
 'J^hese great privations of ours sunk deep in 
 
 my fa,iher's heart. As concerned himself, he had, 
 like St. Paul, learned to be equally satisfied as well 
 with plenty as with want j but his wife and children 
 lay nearest to his heart, and the murmurs and impa- 
 tience of the people made this still more bitter ."t 
 
 * Efterrrtiiiiigcr om Gronland af P.uil Egcde, Kiiibenliavii, 1788. p. 31. 
 t Ibid. p. ;)2. 
 
1 'f^ 
 
 BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 10^ 
 
 re- 
 
 in the midst of the trying privations here detailed, 
 a ship providentially arrived from Copenhag(;n, 
 *• and now all the bread that was intended for the 
 year's consumption, was devoured at breakfast."* 
 On the accession of Christian VI. of Denmark in 
 1730, that monarch decided upon giving up the 
 Cireenland trade and mission ; and in the following 
 year, sent out two ships, with orders to bring back 
 all the settlers except the Minister and his family, 
 and any of the sailors whom he might be able to 
 persuade to stay with him : it was also distinctly 
 made known that no prospect could be held out of 
 any further aid from Denmark. 
 
 But although thus threatened with abandonment 
 by both his country and his King, the faithful Egcdc 
 would not desert his Christian converts, and con- 
 trary to the advice and earnest expostulations of all 
 his friends, he resolved to continue with his family, 
 in the land of his labours, and only begged as many 
 men as were necessary for his absolute wants, toge- 
 ther with provisions for one year. With great 
 difficulty he prevailed upon eight men to share his 
 fate J and putting his trust in that Providence 
 which had safely brought him through so many 
 trials, he addressed a feeling and energetic letter to 
 the King, setting forth the vain efforts of all the 
 exertions he had made, if the colony were now 
 {abandoned, and appealing to all the nobler feelings 
 of a monarch and a fellow man. 
 
 For one year the settlers waited in anxious un- 
 
 * Efterretninger om Griinland af Paul Egede, Kiobcnhavn, 1788, p 33, scq. 
 
^CBBBHRlin 
 
 IGG 
 
 nrscovEUY or America 
 
 certainty, but Christian VI. of Denmark, was a 
 wise, a patriotic and an enlightened prince, loved by 
 his subjects, and respected by his contemporaries, 
 and the powerful appeal of the Christian minister 
 met with a favourable reception at the foot of the 
 throne. The termination of the anxious period 
 brought with it the joyful announcement of the 
 king's intention to perpetuate the mission, and to 
 allocate 2000 dollars annually to its support.* 
 
 For fifteen long years did this exemplary man 
 continue to labour in the execution of a duty which 
 he had conscientiously imposed upon himself, and 
 when, at the end of this period, his mental suffer- 
 ings, and shattered health, increased by a domestic 
 calamity, which deprived him of a consolation and 
 support that had cheered his drooping spirits under 
 the severest trials,! obliged him to resign the 
 
 
 * Efterrctninger, &c. p. 43. 
 
 t Ttiis severe affliction is thus mentioned in the simple and expressive lan- 
 guage of his published Journal : — 2Ist December, 1724. " It pleased the all- 
 wise and good God, in addition to all my other misfortunes and difficulties in 
 Greenland, to afflict me by taking my dearest wife. Were it not "or the 
 consoling hope of a joyful re-union in God's heavenly kingdom, I could 
 scarcely be reconciled to ^^^lic loss of so pious and virtuous a partner. I will 
 not say how faithful and dear she was to me, or how good and k. nd a mother 
 to her children, but only how willing and affectionate she was to stibmit to 
 my wish when I had formed the resolution in God, to leave friends and 
 fatherland, and betake myself to Greenland, to teach Christianity to the 
 ignorant inhabitants. For, although kinsfolk and friends pressed her hard, 
 and industriously represented to her, that for her own, and my sake, and 
 that of our little children, she ought to oppose and prevent me from en- 
 gaging in such a rash and foolish undertaking, yet out of love to God and 
 me, she rather let herself be persuaded to approve of my design, and like a 
 true Sarah, went with her Abraham from her kinsfolk and her father's 
 house, to a strange, nay, to a barbarous and heathen laud. How patiently 
 and peaceably she, since that time, lias withstood with me, all the labour 
 
 ilii 
 
BY THE NORTHMEN. 
 
 IC7 
 
 charge of the mission into the hands of his son, it 
 smote his heart to leave his cherished converts ; and 
 the little that he had accomplished, and the neces- 
 sity for his departure, embittered his thoughts, and 
 weighed upon his mind up to the moment of his last 
 farewell.* 
 
 Virtuous Egede I If patience and perseverance 
 in a holy cause ; — if an ardent and untiring zeal 
 in the propagation of truth ; — ^if an exalted piety j 
 
 ,,1. 
 
 and oppobition which the good God has suffered to oppress us, is known to 
 many; yea, often comforted and cheered my m<nd, when it was faint and 
 desponding from so many difficulties." — Omsttendeligogudforlig Re1&tion,&c. 
 * " 1736, July 29, Sunday. I preached my farewell sermon from Esa. 
 40, V. 4, thereto moved by the bad result of my in God well meant projects, 
 which have made me so completely cast down, and hopeless of a better 
 success under the nature of the present existing circumstances ; yet hoping, 
 at my safe return, to be able to contribute more to forward the design, than 
 if I had remained in Greenland. That this, and nothing else, was my aim 
 is known to the Almighty God, and not to seek any ease, or reward for 
 past trouble and labour, which cannot help me ; for as I have not come to 
 Greenland for temporal gain or advantage, so d" I not return for temporal 
 gain, but for God'b honour alone ; and the f, jghtenment of these poor 
 ignorant people, has and shall be my only object, nay, the innermost wish 
 of my heart until my death. I must confess that the poor Greenlanders 
 were not well pleased at my going away, wherefore also, it went as near, 
 and nearer to my heart to leave them ;, but as I saw that my remaining 
 could little help them, after I was so rauch weakened both in mcrtal and 
 bodily power, that I could hold out no longer, I thought it my duty, at the 
 moment I was about to leave, to provide, as far as lay in my povcar, for 
 their eternal welfare, and make all necessary arrangements thereto ; giving 
 them over, for the rest, to God's unceasing mercy and grace, and therewith 
 wish that he will awaken righteous means for their salvation, enlighten their 
 darkness, and drive from their minds the clouds of ignorance, and by the 
 power of his grace, finally endow them with knowledge, and a desire for 
 truth. Amen." Ibid. p. 404. On his return to Copenhagen, Egede was 
 placed at the head of the Committee for directing the affairs of the Green- 
 land Mission, and employed the remainder of his days in teaching the 
 Greenland language to young missionaries intended for that colony : he 
 died in the island of Falster, A.0. 1728. 
 
 .;i.. 
 
 h-i. 
 
m 
 
 r.'ijrl 
 t JW>| 
 
 ■hi 
 
 m 
 
 II 
 
 
 s *'^ 
 
 
 ■ll""' 1' 
 
 !'. 
 
 ■■ 1' 
 
 
 
 
 1 1 ^,i 
 
 
 1G8 
 
 DISCOVERY OF AMERICA. 
 
 — if an utter heedlessness of worldly honours, 
 and worldly wealth may aught avail man in that 
 mysterious kingdom which is hidden from his view, 
 — then surely, Egede, wilt thou have thy reward I 
 
 The present condition of the Danish settlements 
 on the West coast of Greenland offers every pros- 
 pect of civilization heing rapidly extended over that 
 circtic region ; there are thirteen colonies, fifteen 
 small mercantile estahlishments, and ten Missionary 
 Societies, four .>f which (New Hermhut, Lichten- 
 fels, Lichtenau, and Friederichsthal) belong to the 
 Moravian Brethren. The number of Europeans, 
 is 150, that of the whole population 6000, and 
 five or six ships trade annually to the coast.* 
 
 • Graah's Peise, p. 12, note. 
 
 V. 
 i 
 
 
 \ r y 
 
 r' 
 
 1 > 
 
 1 '■';.. 
 
 f'' 
 
 |!:-, 
 
 1 
 
 ■''■'} 
 
 1 
 


 (iniri«Hl Chai'l 
 D I S (' OVEK 1 K S (.F TiiK N O K 
 
 HI Uir 
 
 ''V AKCTIC BKGIONSanhA 
 
 ^: 
 
 
 
 
 .6 ir-^-n,^ . / V/ 
 
 
Fl II /« mt, I'm, ni. 
 
 (ieiiei'al C'hai 
 >VEK 1 K S OF TiiK NO K T H M K 
 
 in Uir 
 
 V BKGIONSan 
 
 f^mAir'i^f . 
 
 
 us* j 
 
 KTJ 
 
 \ 
 
 *f^^ 
 
 .«"" 
 
 \ 
 
 i,i»''' 
 
 
 "•VJ 
 
 »>: 
 
 r 
 
 
 ,> 
 
 ■"«^.v*-^"-'"" 
 
 
 *ri.y«v;f,v(a«^ f=L /fc/X,.,,/"' 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 .Bditl* 
 
 
 i-^ 
 
 ^,../:' 
 
 ao 
 
 ^JOul^^' 
 
 
 >'«;•»«' 
 
 «» 
 
 
 ssaKL^.'^,^V 
 
 If 
 
 J? 
 
 E 
 
 ■/wA". AiTowfimiOi, Litkt, 
 
»i f 
 
 \r I 
 
 II 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 .\/ 
 
 
 
 
 1 /m^/. 
 
 / ^ - 
 
 ft' ■// ^(^\^} 
 
 .j.^ 
 
 
 
 * **■'' Ziyis', i' 
 
 Mill"*' ,.,,,*' I 
 
 ,IiUfu. 
 
PART III. 
 
 ii( 
 
 
 \»o 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES, 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 NOTICES OF THE SETTLEMENTS OF THE IRISH IN ICELAND 
 
 AND TUB 
 
 WESTERN HEMISPHERE. 
 
 ai, .; 
 
i 
 
 :m 
 
1»ART III. 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 The following selections are made from that 
 division of the Antiquitates Americanae, entitled 
 " Breviores Relationes," being extracts, and short 
 narratives taken from various Icelandic manuscripts 
 row extant in the Royal and University Libraries 
 of Copenhagen. They will be found to contain 
 some interesting particulars of the traces of Irish 
 settlers found in Iceland previous to the occupation 
 of that island by the Norwegians in the 9th cen- 
 tury, as well as authentic accounts of voyages per- 
 formed by the Northmen in the years 999, and 
 1029 to that part of the Western hemisphere known 
 to them under the name of White Man's Land, 
 or Great Ireland [Huitramannalandederlrland 
 it Mikla]. 
 
!!•'■ 
 
 
 if 
 
 h 
 
 
 I 
 
 I ■■■ . i: 
 
 
 
 'II 
 
 
MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 
 A. FROM THE HISTORY OF KING OLAF 
 TRYGGVASON. 
 
 ACCORDINO TO 1MB SECOND VELLUM CODEX, No. 61. Fol. 
 
 Supposed to have been copud at the end of i as Uth or beginning ofth£ \&th 
 Century. Antiq. Amer. p. 202. 
 
 Thus says the holy priest Bede, in the chronicles 
 which he wrote concerning the regions of the 
 earth :* that the island which is called Thule in 
 the hooks, lies so far in the north part of the 
 world, that there came no day in the winter, when 
 the night is longest, and no night in summer, when 
 the day is longest. Therefore think learned men 
 that it is Iceland which is called Thule,t for there 
 are many places in that land, where the sun sets 
 not at night, when the day is longest, and in the 
 
 * De natura rerum et ratione temporum, Cap. 31, Colon. 1637. Fol. 
 
 t The locality of Thule is still a vexata questio witli Antiquaries, the 
 south coast of Norway, and north and north-west coast of Scotland having 
 been each assigned for its position, as well as Iceland. Bede speaks of 
 Thule according to the relation of Pytheas of Marseilles, Solinus, and Pliny, 
 but makes it only six days' sail from Britain, which ill accords with the 
 then state of navigation and nautical knowledge. Saxo would seem to refer 
 Thule to the district of Tellemark on the south coast of Norway ; for in enu- 
 merating the warriors at the battle of Braavalle, he speaks of those from 
 Thyle, which name is still to be found in that district : again, the particu- 
 lars given of Thule by the Irish monk Dicuil, who wrote in the year 825, 
 identify it with Iceland, and it seems probable that diflTerent parts of the 
 North received the name, which, in tlie Icelandic language, signifies, end- 
 extreme boundary (till) according as discovery was extended. Thule has 
 also been derived from the Irish word thuat, which signifies North. See 
 O'Brien's Irish-English Dictionary in voce Tuat. Island's Opdagelse, &c. af 
 N. M. Petersen, N. T. O. B. I. 
 
 
ti I 
 
 174 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 J' '.'■ 
 
 m 
 
 ik 
 
 same manner, where the sun cannot be seen by (hiy, 
 when the night is longest. But the holy priest 
 Bode died DCCXXXV years after the birth of 
 our Lord Jesus Christ, more than a hundred and 
 twenty years before Iceland was inhabited by the 
 Northmen. But before Iceland was colonized from 
 Norway, men had been there whom the Northmen 
 called Papas.* They were Christians ; for after 
 them were found Irish books, bells, and croziers,t 
 and many other things, from whence it could be 
 seen that they were Christian men, and had come 
 from the west over the sea :t English books§ also 
 shew that, in that time, there was intercourse be- 
 tween the two countries. 
 
 * Papa. The clerical order were called Papas by some Latin writers. 
 See Dii Fresnes Glossary ad script, mediaa et inflmffi Latiiiitatis, and thus 
 the Xorthmcn may have adopted the word from southern nations, " timi- 
 dus pra>gustes pocida Papas," Juv. Sat. iv. Du Fresnes shews also that tha 
 term was applied to Pocdagogus. 
 
 t Bffikr ir8kar,bjollur ok baglar. 
 
 t Til vcstan um haf. Ireland lying to the west of Norway, from whence 
 the Icelanders had emigrated, was generally spoken of by them with refer- 
 ence to their fatherland, and for the same reason they called the Irish 
 " westmen." According to a learned enquirer into the origin of the Irish, 
 the literal meaning of the word Ireland is Westland, the Celtic syllable iar 
 or er meaning the tcest. This, however, is disputed by O'Brien, who main- 
 tains that the original interpretation ot icr is ''after," or "behind," and 
 considers Eirin to be compounded of i and erin, the genitive of ere, iron, 
 signifying the island of iron or mines, for which Ireland had formerly been 
 famed, and hence ranked by antient writers among the Cassiterides. See 
 Wood's Inquiry, concerning the primitive inhabitants of Ireland, p. 1. ; 
 O'Brien's Irish Diet, in voce Eirin. 
 
 § The strongest testimony on this point is given by Dicuil, in a work en- 
 titled De mensura orbis terrte, wherein he shews that Iceland had been 
 visited by Irish ecclesiastics in 795, and the Farce islands in 725. See infra, 
 and Antiq. Amer. p. 204, note a. 
 
MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 \'75 
 
 B. FROM THE SCHEDiE OF ARI ERODE, 
 
 No. 54, Fol. 
 
 At that time was Iceland covered with woods, 
 between the mountains and the shore. Then were 
 here Christian people, whom the Northmen called 
 Papas, but they went afterwards away, because 
 they would not be here amongst heathens , and left 
 after them Irish books, and bells, and croziers, 
 from which could be seen that they were Irish- 
 men.* But then began people to travel much here 
 out from Norway, until King Harold forbade it, 
 because it appeared to him that the land had begun 
 to be thinned of i^mabitants. 
 
 • Menn irscir. 
 
 t *'! 
 
 'J ' 
 

 
 176 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 ti '--I 
 
 C. FROM THE PROLOGUE TO THE LANDNAMABOK, 
 
 No. 53, Fol. 
 
 1!' 
 
 
 
 >4 
 
 But before Iceland was colonized by the North- 
 men, the men were there whom the Northmen 
 called Papas; they were Christians, and people 
 think that they came from the west over the sea, 
 for there was found after them Irish books, and 
 bells, and croziers, and many more things from 
 which it could be seen that they were Westmen ; 
 such were found eastwards in Papey, and Papyli : 
 it is also mentioned in English books that in that 
 time, was intercourse between the countries. 
 
 The particulars given of Thule by the Irish monk Dicuil, 
 who wrote in the year 825, offer a remarkable confirmation 
 of the Icelandic manuscripts respecting the residence of the 
 Irish ecclesiastics in that region, which, in his work, is 
 evidently identified with Iceland. He speaks of Thule as 
 an uninhabited island, which, however, in his Hfetime, 
 about the year 795, had been visited by some monks, loith 
 whom he himself had spoken, and who had once dwelt 
 upon the island from the first of February to the first of 
 August. They denied the exaggerated statements that had 
 been made by antient writers respecting the perpetual ice, 
 continued day from the vernal to the autumnal equinox, 
 and corresponding interval of night, but stated that a day's 
 journey further northward, the sea was really frozen, and 
 
 
MINOR NAUKATlVi:S. 
 
 177 
 
 that with respect to the length of the days and nights, at, 
 and a few days before and after the summer solstice, the 
 sun sank so little below the horizon during the night, that 
 one could pursue their ordinary occuj^ations as well as by 
 day light. The author further describes several islands 
 lying in the north part of the British ocean, and which, 
 with a fair wind, might be reached from the north of 
 Britain in two days and a night; and states that here 
 nearly a hundred years before, namely a. d. 725, hermits 
 from Ireland had taken up their abode, but, disturbed by the 
 roving Northmen, had since departed, leaving the place 
 uninhabited.* These islands are further described as having 
 
 
 * For the satisfaction of those readers whose national feelings may per- 
 haps lead them to take more than ordinary interest in tids well authenticated 
 record of tlie early migration of the Irish to these remote islands, in the 
 Northern sea, the original passage from Dicuil has been transcribed : — 
 
 *' Trigesimus nunc anmii est a quo jmntiaverunt mihi clerici, qui a kl. 
 (kalendis) febrvarli usque kl. (kalendis) aiigusti in ilia insula (Thule> mnn- 
 serant quod, non solum in costivo solstitii, sed in diebus circa illud, in ves- 
 pertina liora, occidens sol abscondit se quasi trans purvulum tumulum : ita 
 ut, nihil tcnebrarum in minimo spatio ipso fiat ; sed quicquid homo operari 
 voluerit, vel pediculosus de camisia abstraiiere tanquam in prasscntia soils 
 potest: et, si in altitudine montium ejus fuissent, forsitau nunquam sol 
 absconderetur ab illis. In medio iliius minimi temporis, medium noctis fit 
 in medio orbis terrae; et idcirco mentientes falluntur qui eircum earn con- 
 cretum fere mare scripserunt, et qui a vernal. sEqninoctio usque ad autumnale 
 eontinum diem sine nocte, atque ab autumnali, versa vice, usque ad vernale 
 teqiiMioctium assiduam qnidcm nuctem, dum illi navigantes in natuvali 
 tempore magni frigoris earn intrabant, ac manentes in ipsa dies noctesque 
 semper, praster solstitii tempus, alternatim liabebant : sed navigatione unius 
 diei ex ilia ad boreaui congelatum mare invenerunt." 
 
 " Sunt alisE insulse mulla; in septentrionali Brittaniie oceano, quaj a sep- 
 tentrionalibus Brittannioe insulis duorum dierum ac noctiuni recte navig;\- 
 tione, plenis veils, assiduo feliciter vento adire queunt. Aliquis prbt. (pres- 
 byter) religiosus mihi retulit quod, in duobus aestivis diebus et una inter- 
 cedente nocte, navigans in duoram navicula transtrorum in unam illarum 
 introivit. lUse insulse sunt aliie parvuloe, fere cunctie simul angustis dis 
 antes fretis, in qmhas in centum ferme annis, heremitm ex nostra: Si-.otiae 
 navigantes luihitaverunt. Sed, sicnt a principio mundi desertae semper 
 
 N 
 

 
 U ^M 
 
 178 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 upon them a great number of sheep, which circumstance 
 leads to the conclusion that they were the Farce islands, 
 the name of which is known to be derived from the original 
 Icelandic term Fareyjar or sheep islands. 
 
 fuerunt, ita nunc, causa latronum Normannorum, vacuas anachoritis, plente 
 innumerabilibus ovibus, ac divcrsis genciibus multis niinis inarinarum 
 avium. Nanquam eos insulas in libris auctorum memoratas invenimus."— 
 Dicuili Liber de mensura orbis Ternfl ex duobus codd. MSS. Dibliothecaj 
 Imperialis, nunc primum in lucem editus a Car. Atlien. Walckenaer. Pa- 
 risiis M.DCCCVII. 
 
 . 11 
 
 ik 
 
 if 
 
 r i! 
 
 i 
 
 \ \ % 
 
 m 
 
 
MINOH NARRATIVES. 
 
 179 
 
 AlU MARSON'S SOJOURN IN GREAT IRELAND, 
 
 A. D. 082. 
 
 From the Lundnamaboh, No. 107, Fol collated with accounts of the same 
 transactions in Huuksbolt, No. 1 05, Fol. Melab6k, No. 100 and 1 1 -2, Fol. 
 and other MSS. in the Arnc-Munnman collection. 
 
 Ulf the squinter, son of Hogna the white, took 
 all Reykjanes, hetvveen Thorkafjonl and Hafrafell ; 
 he married Bji')'g, dauj^hter to Eyvind the Eastman, 
 sister to Helge the lean ; their son was Atli tlie 
 red, who married Thorbjorg, sister to Steiriolf 
 the humble ; their son was Mar of Holum, who 
 married Thorkatla, daughter of Hergil Ne- 
 prass; their son was Ari ;* he was driven by a 
 tempest to White Man's Land, which some call 
 Great Ireland ;t it lies to the west in the sea, 
 near to Vinland the Good, and VI days' sailing 
 west from Ireland.! From thence could Ari not 
 
 * Ari Marson is mentioned in tlie Kriatni Saga, C. 1, p. 0, amongst the 
 principal cliiefs in Iceland in the year 981, at which time Bishop Fridrick 
 and Thorvald Kodran^on came there to promulgate Christianity. He, and 
 his kinsmen are highly lauded in several Icelandic historical works [Silgu- 
 I>oedtir Islandiga, Holum, 1756, 4, p. 105.— Fosthrsudra Sasa, C. l,p. C] 
 His father Mar, and mother Katla figure in an antient poem, which is still 
 preserved among the common traditions of the Icelanders, under the name 
 of Kbthidraumr or Katla's dream, and may be seen in the Arnoe-Magnrean 
 collection, No. 154, 8vo. Antiq. Amer. p. 210, note a. 
 
 t "Til Hvitramannulands, tat kalla sumir Irland ed mikla." Antiq. 
 Amer. p. 211. 
 
 X " VI dsBgra sigling vestr frii Irlandi." Professor Rafn is of opinion 
 that the figures VI, have arisen through mistake or carelessness of the 
 transcriber of the original manuscript which is now lost, and were erroneously 
 inserted instead of XX, XI, or perhaps XV, which would better correspond 
 with the distance ; this mistake might have easily arisen from a blot op 
 defect in that part of the original MSS. Antiq. Amer. p 447. 
 
 N 2 
 
 -'j, ■.;■>(*'. 
 
m 
 
 it .'•-■ 
 
 , -1". 
 
 180 
 
 MINOU XARItATlVKS. 
 
 ^ot away, and was thcro baptized. This story first 
 told llat'n the Limerick merchant,* who liad long 
 
 
 ■■'i 
 
 % 
 
 
 n 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 
 * niymrcksfuvi, n surimmo rviiJently Kiven here to Rafii, in coiiscqiienoc 
 of liij trading; to F.iinorick, witli wliich us well us tlie otlier principal Iri'*!! 
 sea-ports, the Nortlnncii, culled by tlie Irisili, Dnni's, were iiccu9toine<l to 
 liold frequent communication from tlic end of the 8th century. Dublin, 
 Wnterf()rd,ttnd Limerick are called in the Icelandic, or old northern tongue, 
 D.iflin, Vondrafjiirdr, and Hllmrck, wliicli has probably led Cambrensis and 
 others to attribute the foundation of these cities to the Northmen, Ame- 
 lanus, Sitaracus, and Ivarns, or Anlaf, Sitric, and Ivar, in tlie year 804, 
 when they made a hostile expedition to the country, and settled in these 
 three towns respectively ; but O'llalloran shews that Dublin, Watcrford, 
 and Limerick were cities of note lon-j Ijefore that period, and that the tr.idc 
 of Dublin, in particular, was so great at the close of the 'ind century, that 
 a bloody war broke out between the Monarch Con, and the King of Munster, 
 to determine to wimm the duti(s ui)on exports and imports should belong. 
 lliAt. Ireland, Vol. Ill p. 17(^. Aloore, however, tjives Sitric tiic credit of 
 founding Waterlbrd. [II. p. 37.] iilthou^li its original Frisli nam(! of Port 
 Lairge, would seem to imply a place of some commercial importance before 
 the adoption of its northern title, from wliie'i the name of Watcrford is evi- 
 dently derivfcii. [Vsedrafjord, tlie fordable iHth.] Limerick, O'lJulioran tells 
 us, was so noted for its commerce from the earliest times, tliat it i3 never 
 mentioncfl by antient Iri-h writers witliout the epithet Long, a ship, and we 
 find Ceallaehan Cuisil, IsAws, of Munster, calling it Luimneach naLuin^ias, or 
 Limerick of the ships. (Hist. Ir. I. ji. 159, and III. p. 178.) According to Arcli- 
 bisliop Usher, the first invasion of tlie Danes or Northmen, t'lok place about the 
 year 7i)7, when the Annals of Ulster notice a descent on the isle of Ilechrin or 
 Raghlin, north of the county Antrim, ami their incursions continued, with little 
 intermission, until their final defeat by niicn Boirumlie or Doru, in tlie cele- 
 brated battle of Clontarff, April 23, 1014. The intervals of peace were 
 naturally applied to commercial intercourse betwt.n the two nations, and 
 the Northmen became established not only at the princijjal sea-ports, but 
 in the interior of the country. Hence wc find Iiinh names of persJons in 
 Iceland, and names of places, formed of Northern elements in Ireland ; the 
 Icelandic Niel or Njall is evidently the Irish Neil; Kjallaeh, Ceallach; 
 Kjaran, Kieran ; Bjurni, Barny, &c. Names of places are of a mixed 
 origin : to the Irijh Laighean, Munhain, Ulladli, the Northmen added 
 their .s/(/rfr (place), whicli afterwards become ster, and thus arose Leinster, 
 Munster, Ulster, &c. See De ^Idste, toge fra Nordcn til Irland of N. M. 
 Petersen, up. Annaler for Nordisk Oldlcyiidighed, 18:!6, p. 2-3. Tlie 
 (jreneral name of Danes could hardly have arisen from the invaders being 
 
MINOR NAUUATIVKS. 
 
 181 
 
 rst 
 
 Uvr 
 
 lived at Limerick in Ireland.* Thus said [also] 
 Tliorkell (icllersoii, ( that Icelanders had stated, 
 who had heard Thorfinn Jarl of the Orkney st re- 
 late, that Ari was recognised in White Man's Land, 
 and could not get away from chence, but was there 
 much respected. Ari married Thorgerd daughter 
 to Alf of Dolum, whose scms were Thorgils, Gud- 
 
 considered Danish, as tliey were a mixed nice of Dunes, Norwegian* 
 Swedes, Saxons, Frisians, and other Gothic trihcs from thoCinibric peninsula 
 and shores of tlio Baltic, and were distini^tiished by tlie Irisli accord- 
 ing to tiie colour of their liair or complexion, as I'ionne Gidl, the white 
 8tranj;ers, and Dubh Gail, the black stran'^'crs (hence proliably Finpal and 
 Donegal) ; tiie term Dane, whicli was sometimes ai)plied, is, therefore, more 
 lilicly to have been expressive of the character than the country of the in- 
 vaders, and to be derived from the Irish words i>ana, bold, impetuous, and 
 Fear, man : hence JJun-ou, the impetuous river, us the Danube is called in 
 antient Celtic. See O'llulloran, V. III. p. 149, Lnd O'Brien's Irish Diet, in 
 voce Dana. 
 
 * The pedigree of Rafn the Limerick merchant or Oddson, is given hi the 
 Landntimabuk, II, 21, p. 98, from which it appears that he was descended 
 from Duke Rolf of Norway, and on the maternal side, from Steinof the 
 humble, being thus connected as well with Ari Murson as Leif Erikson 
 [See Genealog. Tab. No. 1, App.] and lived about the middle or beginning 
 of the 11 til century. In the Stiirlunga Saga, I. c. 3, he is named amongst 
 the ancestors of Skard-Snorri, from whom the most distinguished Icelanders 
 trace their descent, and it is probable was the same indivirlual known some- 
 times by the name of Rafn the Red [Rafn hinn raudi], who accompanied 
 Sigurd, king of the Orkneys to Ireland in 1014, and was present at the 
 battle of Clontarff, Ap. 23, of the same year. Antiq. Am. p. 211. note a. 
 
 t Thorkell Gellerson was great-grandson of Ari Marson, and uncle to Ari 
 Frodc, the writer of this narrative. He resided at Helgafell in Iceland, 
 and was well known as a wealthy, honouri ble, and brave yeoman, who, de- 
 sirous of knowledge, had travelled much in his youth. He related many 
 things to his kinsman Ari Frode, who appears to have had the fullest con- 
 fidence in his statements, and often gives his express words, together with 
 his name, as a security for the truth of the narrative. Antiq. Amer. p. 212, 
 note a. 
 
 t Thorfinn Sigurdsnn, b. 1008, d. 1064, was connected with the immediate 
 ancestors of Ari Marson. See Genealog. Tab. No. 1, Appendix. 
 
« 
 
 Ik 
 
 IliBT 
 
 18(i 
 
 MINOR NARKATIVES. 
 
 loif and Illugi : this is the family of Reykjaness. 
 Jorund hight a son of Ulf the squinter ; he married 
 Thorbjorg Knarrarbringa ; their daughter was 
 Thjodhild, who married Erik the Red ; their son 
 [was] Leif the Lucky of Greenland. Jorund 
 hight the son of Atli the Red ; he married Thordis, 
 daughter of Thorgeir Suda ; their daughter was 
 Otkatla, who married Thorgill Kollson, Jorund 
 was also father to Snorri. 
 
 It : I 
 
 if; 
 
 
 •I'i 
 •i- 
 
 'I ^^ 
 
 H< 
 
 I; >r 
 
 r 
 
 Mi 
 
MINOR NARIIATIVKS. 
 
 183 
 
 •:i 
 
 .- n 
 
 GEOGRAPHICAL FRAGMENT, 
 CORROBORATIVE OF THE PRECEDING. 
 
 D. I'uoM THE Manuscript Codex, 770, c. 8vo. 
 
 Now arc there, as is said, south from Greenland, 
 which is inhahitcd, deserts, uninhabited places, and 
 ice-bergs,* then the Skra^lings, then Markland, 
 then Vinland the Good ; next, and somewhat be- 
 hind,t lies Albania, which is White Man's Land ',% 
 thither was sailing, formerly, from Ireland ; there 
 Irishmen§ and Icelanders recognised Ari the son ot 
 Mar and Katla of Reykjaness, of whom' nothing 
 had been heard for a long time, and who had been 
 made a Chief there by the inhabitants. 
 
 * Probably Labrador, or Great Hclluland (Helluland it Mikla), .ee p. 
 
 88, note §. 
 
 t Nokkut til bakka. 
 X Hvitramannaland. 
 ^ Yrskir. 
 
 ^1- 
 
184 
 
 MINOR NAKKATIVKS. 
 
 VOYAGE OF BJORN ASBRANDSON 
 
 TO THK 
 
 I \ '] 
 
 1)^ 'k ^ 
 
 It" *■■ ' 
 
 i' ' 
 
 ■:i 
 
 WESTiSllN HiiMISiniEUE, AND PltOUABLE SETTLEMENT IN 
 
 GREAT IRELAND. 
 A.D. 90U. 
 
 The following remarkable narrative is taken 
 from the Eyrbyggja Saga, or early annals of that 
 district of Iceland lying around the promontory of 
 Snaefells on the western coast. It is clearly shewn 
 by Bishop Mliller* to have been written not later 
 than the beginning of the ItJth certury, and has been 
 already brough*^ before the favourable notice of the 
 British public by Sir Walter Scott.t With this 
 Saga the following MSS. have been carefully col- 
 lated : — 
 
 1 — 2. Liber Chartaceus, No. 448, 449, 4to. being 
 a copy of the best vellum codex in the Resenianian 
 Library. 
 
 3. Copy of parchment codex in the Guelpher- 
 
 * Sagabibliothek, I. p. 11)7. 
 
 t Abstract of Eyrbyggja Sagii. Miscell. Piose Works, Vol. V. 8vo. Edin. 
 and Lond. 1834, and Illustrations of Nortlicrn Antiquities, 4to. Edinb. 1814. 
 Tlie learned Thorkelin, Regius Professor of Antiquity, and keeper of the 
 Archives in the University of Copenhagen, publlslied an edition of this 
 history in 1787, executed at the cxpence of Suhm, the munificent patron of 
 Northern literature. See Eyrbyggja Saga, quam niandante et impenses fa- 
 clente Perlll. P. F. Suhm, versione lectionum varietate ac indice rcrum 
 auxit Grimr Johnson Thorkelin, Piof. Philos. Extraord. Ilafnite, 1787. 
 
MINO.l NAUKATIVES. 
 
 185 
 
 bytean Library, carefully executed by Arne Mag- 
 nussen himself. 
 
 4. Vellum fragment, No. 309, 4to. written in 
 the 14th century. 
 
 5. Two vellum fragments noted S and 4, under 
 No. 4156, 4to. V ritten about the beginning of the 
 15th centurv. 
 
 Besides sixteen paper MSS. viz.: — No. 158, 
 126, 125, 123, 124, 129, 130, 131, Fol.; 441, 442, 
 443, 444, 445, 446, 447, 4to. and 112, 8vo. 
 
 

 m 
 
 186 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 :i ■■ 
 
 I 
 
 VOYAGE OF BJORN ASBliANDSON 
 
 TO TUB 
 
 WESTERN HEMISPHERE & SETTLEMENT IN GREAT IRELAND. 
 
 A.D. 999. 
 
 15. BoRK the fat and Thordis Surs daughter 
 had a daughter that Thurid liight, and she was 
 married to Thorbjorn the fat, who lived at Froda ; 
 he was son of Orm the lean, who had taken and 
 cultivated the farm of Froda. Thurid, daughter of 
 Asbrand of Kamb in Breidavik had he formerly 
 married ; she was sister to Bjorn Breidvikinga- 
 happa, who is hereafter mentioned in the Saga, 
 and to Arnbji3rn the strong : her sons by Thorb- 
 jurn were Ketill the Champion, Gunnlaug and 
 Hallstein 
 
 22. Now shall something- be told about Snorri 
 Godi,* that he took up the process about the mur- 
 der of Thorbjorn his brother-in-law. He also took 
 his sister home to Helgafell, because there was a 
 report, that Bjorn, son of Asbrand from Kamb, 
 began to come there to inveigle her 
 
 * Godi, Priest of the temple and prefect of the province, from God 
 tlie Deity, being Bupposed to hold the office by divine appointment, see In- 
 troduc. p.vi. Snorri Godi occupies a conspicuous place in Icelandic history 
 from the end of the 10th to the beginning of the 11th century; his real name 
 was Thorgrim Thorgrimson, but being rather unmanageable when a child, 
 he obtained the cognomen of Snerrir, from the Icelandic word Snerrinn 
 pugnacious, which afterwards became Snorri. Muller. Sag. Bib. V. I. 
 He was born in 904, and died in 1031, and hence it follows that the events 
 recorded in this and the following narrative, where he is mentioned as an 
 active participator, must have occurred previous to the year 1030. Various 
 orthography has been followed by English writers with regard to the name, 
 some calling it Snorro and others Snorre, but the final i seems to accord 
 more with the Icelandic root. Sec Gtnealog. Tab. No. IV. App. 
 
 S». 
 
MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 187 
 
 29. Thorodd, h'jht a man from Medallfellstrand: 
 an honourable man ; he was a great merchant, and 
 owned a trading ship. Thorodd had made a trad- 
 ing voyage westwards to Ireland,* to Dublin. At 
 that time had Jarl Sigurd Lbdversson of the Ork- 
 neys,-)" sway to the Hebrides, and all the way west- 
 ward to Man : he imposed a tribute on the inha- 
 bitants of Man, and when they hdd made peace, the 
 Jarl left men behind him to collect the tribute ; it 
 was mostly paid in smelted silver ; but the Jarl 
 sailed away northwards to the Orkneys. But when 
 they who had waited for the tribute, were ready for 
 sailing, they put to sea with a south-west wind ; 
 but when they had sailed for a time the wind 
 changed to the south-east and east, and there arose 
 a great storm, and drove them northwards under 
 Ireland, and the ship broke there asunder upon an 
 uninhabited island. And when they had gotten 
 there, came, by chance, the Icelander Thorodd, on 
 a voyage from Dublin. The Jarl's men called out to 
 the merchantment to help them. Thorodd put out a 
 boat, and went into it himself, and when it came up, 
 the Jarl's men begged Thorodd to help them, and 
 
 * Kaupferd vestr til Iilands. Here we see the nature of the voyage dis- 
 tinctly stated, and Ireland spoken of as lying westwards from Iceland, 
 which evidently arose from its position with regard to Norway, the father- 
 land of the settlers ; hence also, Vestmannaeyjar (Westman's Islands) on 
 the south coast of Iceland, where some Irish captives took refuge after the 
 murder of their northern task-master. Sea Petersen in Annal. for Nord. 
 Oldk. 283G, Comp. p. 174, note. 
 
 t Tho Orkneys are called in northern language Orkneyjar, from Orka, a 
 kind 0/ seal, which is described in Speculum Regale, p. 17G-177. Sigurd 
 fell in battle in Ireland, 1013. Antiq. Amer. p. 218, note h. 
 
 t Kaupnienn, Conip. p. 160. 
 
 . ''3-. 
 
 '% 
 
Jrfl- 
 
 m 
 
 i 
 ..ifj. 
 
 I 
 
 f; . I 
 
 ,1 ' n 
 ■ H 
 
 ill if 
 
 
 ■"-"*'. 
 
 i ■ ■ ; 
 
 ,..,*;.'* , 
 
 ! 
 
 188 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 to take them home to Sigurd 
 
 offered him monev 
 Jarl in the Orkneys ; but Thorodd thought he 
 could not do that, because he was bound for Iceland ; 
 but they pressed him hard, for they thought it 
 concerned their goods and freedom, that they 
 should not be left in Ireland or the Hebrides, 
 where they before had waged war, and it ended so 
 that he sold them the ship's boat, and took therefore 
 a great part of the tribute ; they steered then with 
 the boat to the Orkneys ; but Thorodd sailed 
 without the boat to Iceland, and came to the south 
 of the land ; then steered he westwards, and sailed 
 into Breidafjord, and landed, with all on board, at 
 Dogurdarness, and went in autumn to winter with 
 Snorri Godi at Helgafell ; he was since then called 
 Thorodd the tribute-buyer. This happened a little 
 after the murder of Thorbjorn the fat. The same 
 winter was at Helgafell Thurid the sister of Snorri 
 Godi, whom Thorbjorn the fat had married. 
 Thorodd asked Snorri Godi to give him Thurid his 
 sister in marriage ; and because he was rich, and 
 Snorri knew him from a good side, and saw that 
 she required some one to manage her affairs, — with 
 all this together resolved Snorri Godi to give him 
 the woman, and their marriage was held there in 
 the winter at Helgafell. But in the following 
 spring Thorodd betook himself to Froda, and be- 
 came a good and upright yeoman.* But so soon as 
 Thurid came to Froda, began Bjorn Asbrandson to 
 visit there, and there was spread a general report 
 
 * Bondi. 
 
 
MINOR NARIIATIVES. 
 
 189 
 
 that he and Thurid had unlawful intercourse ; then 
 began Thorodd to complain about his visits, but 
 lid not object to them seriously. At that time 
 dwelled Thorer Vidlegg at Arnarhvol, and his sons 
 Orn and Val were grown up, and very promising 
 men ; they reproached Thorodd for submitting to 
 such disgrace as Bjorn put upon him, and oiFered 
 Thorodd tl oir assistance, if he would forbid the 
 visits of Bjorn. It happened one time that Bjorn 
 came to Froda, and he sat talking with Thurid. 
 Thorodd used always to sit within when Bjorn was 
 there, but now was he no where to be seen. Then 
 said Thurid: " Take care of thy walks, Bjorn, for 
 1 suspect that Thorodd thinks to put an end to thy 
 visits here, and it looks to me as if thev had fjone 
 out to fall upon thee by the way, and he thinks they 
 will not be met by equal force." " That can well 
 be," said Bjorn, and chaunted this stave : — 
 
 O ! Goddess of the arm- ring gold* 
 Let this bright day the longest hold 
 On euvth, for now I linger here 
 In my love's arms, but soon must fear 
 These joys will vanish, and her breath 
 Be raised to mourn my early death. 
 
 T'hereafter took Bjorn his arms, and went away, 
 intending to go home ; but when he had gotten up 
 the Digramula, sprang five men upon him ; this 
 was Thorodd and two of his servants, and the sons 
 of Thorer Vidlegg. They seized Bjorn, but he 
 defended himself well and manfully ; Thorer 's sons 
 
 * Jord, the earth, one of the many wives of Odin and mother of Thor. 
 "The son of earth 
 Is now arrived — 
 Why dost thou rage so, Thor!" 
 
 iEgirs Feast, Rhl. F<:dd. Pigott's translat. p. 2::4. 
 
wm 
 
 ■■Mi 
 
 i: I!., 
 
 1})0 
 
 MINOU NARUATIVES. 
 
 I> ' 
 
 pressed in hardest upon him, and wounded him, hut 
 he was the death of both of them. After that 
 Thorodd went away with his men, and was a little 
 wounded, but they not. Bjbrn went his way until 
 he came home, and went into the room ; the woman 
 of the house* told a maid servant to attend him ; 
 and when she came into the room with a light, then 
 saw she that IJjiirn A"as very bloody ; she went then 
 in, and told his father Asbrand that l}jorn was 
 come home bloody ; Asbrand went into the room, 
 and asked why Bjbrn was bloody; " or have you, 
 perhaps, fallen in with Thorodd ?" Bjbrn answered 
 that so it was. Asbrand then asked how the busi- 
 ness had ended. Bjbrn chaunted : — 
 
 Eatiicr far it is to fondle, 
 In tlio arms of female fair, 
 (Vidlegg's sons I both have slain) 
 Tlian with valiant men to wrestle, 
 Or tamely purchased tributet bear. 
 
 Then bound Asbrand his wounds, and he became 
 quite restored. Thorodd begged Snorri Godi to 
 manage the matter about Thorer's sons' murder, 
 and Snorri had it brought before the court of Thors- 
 ness ; but the sons of Thorlak of Eyra assisted 
 Breidvikinga in this affair, and the upshot was, that 
 Asbrand went security for his son Bjbrn, and under- 
 took to pay a fine for the murder. But Bjbrn was 
 banished for three years, and went away the same 
 summer. During the same summer 
 Froda was delivered of a male child, 
 
 Thurid of 
 which re- 
 
 • Husfreyja — Dan. ll&nsfru—Swed. Husfru — Gcr, — Ilaiisfrau — literally 
 tJie woman or lady of the house, and meaning, in this case, Bjorn's mother. 
 
 t In allusion to Thorodd's transaction with the crew of Sigurd. See ante 
 \i, 188, from which he obtained the surname of" Tribute-buyer." 
 
 . -.1 
 
MINOR NARRATIVE*. 
 
 101 
 
 I 
 
 ceivcd the name of Kjartan ; he grew up at Froda, 
 and was soon large and promising. 
 
 Now when Bjorn had crossed the sea [to Nor- 
 way], he bent his way southwards to Denmark, and 
 therefrom south to Jomsborg.* Then was Palna- 
 toki chief of the .Toms vikings. Bjorn joined their 
 band, and was named Champion.f He was in 
 Jomsborg when Styrbjorn the strong took the castle. 
 Bjorn was also with them in Sweden, when the 
 Joms vikings aided Styrbjorn ; he was also in the 
 battle of Fyrisvall, where Styrbjiirn fell,t and escaped 
 in the wood with other Jomsvikings. And so long 
 as Palnatoki lived,§ was Bjorn with him, and was 
 
 * Jomsborg (or Join's castle), called also Julin, was built by the Danish 
 King Harold filaatand, on one of the mouths of the Oder, on the coast of 
 Pomeranla. It was afterwards governed by Palnatoki, a powerful chief of 
 Fionia (Fynen), to whom Burislaus, King of the Wends, fearing his power, 
 gave the neighbouring territory, on condition that he would defend the mo- 
 narch's kingdom from foreign aggression. Palnatoki accepted the condi- 
 tions, and became chief of a community of pirates called Jomsvikbujr , who 
 were distinguished, even in those days of brutal valour, for extraordinary 
 personal bravery, and i-ontempt of death. He established the strictest laws, 
 and exacted the most rigid tests from those who sought to enter the society : 
 the rank of Kappl or champion given to Bjorn Asbraiidson, was, therefore, 
 the strongest evidence of his eminent qualities as a warrior. Antiq. Amer. 
 p. 227, note a. — Jomsvikinga Saga ; and for the particular locality of Joms- 
 borg, which is supposed to be the present WoUin, see De Danskes Toge, til 
 Venden of N. M. Petersen ap. Annaler for Nordisk Oldkyndighed, Kjbben- 
 havn, 1837. p. 235—238. t Kappi. 
 
 t Styrbjorn was the son of Olaf who reigned in Sweden jointly with Erik 
 the Victorious, but in consequence of aspiring to the throne and the murder 
 of a courtier named Aki, fell into disgrace, and retired, with sixty ships 
 given him by Erik, to Jomsborg, of which he became governor. Afterwards 
 he made an expedition to Sweden in conjunction with Ilarald Gormson, and 
 fell in battle against the King his uncle, in the plain of Fyrisvold near Upsala. 
 A.D. 984. See Antiq. Amer. p. 227,note,— Fornmanna Sogur, Vol. V, — l>attr 
 Styrbjarnar Svia kappa in Cod. Flat., and Jomsvikinga Saga, Miiller,Vol. 3. 
 
 § Palnatoki died A.D. 993. 
 
 . 
 
w 
 
 tl 
 
 
 192 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 ■t 
 
 looked upon as a distinguished man, and very bravo 
 in all times of trial. 
 
 40 The same summer* came the brothers 
 
 Bjorn and Arnbjorn out to Iceland, to llaunhaf- 
 narsos. Bjorn was afterwards called the Champion 
 of iireidavik.| Arnbjorn had brought much money 
 out with him, and imraediatelv, the same summer 
 that he came, bought land at Bakke in Raunhofn. 
 Arnbjorn made no display, and spoke little on most 
 occasions, but was, however, in all respects, a very 
 able man. Bjorn, his brother, was, on the other 
 hand, very pompous, when he came to the country, 
 and lived in great style, for he had accustomed him- 
 self to the court usages of foreign chiefs ; he was 
 much handsomer than Arnbjorn, and in no parti- 
 cular less able, but was much more skilled in martial 
 exercises, of which he had given proofs in foreign 
 lands. In the summer, just after they had arrived, 
 a great meeting of the people was held north of the 
 heath, under Haugabrct, near the mouth of the 
 Froda ; and thither rode all the merchants, in co- 
 loured garments \\ and when they had come to the 
 
 * About the year 990. Antiq. Amer. p. 'iiS. note (.. 
 
 t Urei(l\ikingakaj)pi. 
 
 t " A similar fancy for party-coloured tlrossps," says Moore. " cxistrd 
 amon;; the Celts of Gaul, and Diodorus describes the people as wearing 
 garments flowered with all varieties of colours — p^pw/ttnffi iravrooanoit; 
 Cnji'OKTiitvovr;. Lib. 5. The bracca3 or breeches was so called from being 
 plaitled, the word brae !«ignifyiiig in Celtic anything speckled or party-co- 
 loured." According to O'Brien the Hiberno-Celtic word is breac. In the 
 reiifn of the Irish monarch Acliy, a law was enacted regulating the number 
 of colours by which the garments of the different classes of society were to 
 be distinguished, and from these party-coloured dresses worn by the anticnt 
 Scots or Irisli, is derived the present national costume [still called hrekan,'] 
 of their descendants in North Britain. Hist. Ir. I. pp. 109, 110, — O'Brien, 
 Ir. Die. in voce breac, Lluyd. Arch. Brit. 
 
 iJ: 
 
MIKOU NAHRATIVF.S. 
 
 193 
 
 meeting, was there many people assembled. There 
 was Thurid, the lady* of Freda, and Bjorn went up, 
 and spoke to her, and no one objected to this, for it 
 was thought likely that their discourse would last 
 long, since they, for such a length of time, had not 
 seen each other. There arose that day a fight, and 
 one of the men from the northern mountains received 
 a deadly wound, and was carried down under a bush 
 on the bank of the river ; much blood flowed from 
 the wound, so that there was a pool of blood in the 
 bush. There was the boy Kjartan, son of Thurid 
 of Froda ; he had a small axe in his hand j he ran 
 to the bush, and dipped the axe in the blood. When 
 the men from the southern mountains rode south- 
 wards from the meeting, Thord Blig asked Bjorn 
 how the discourse had turned out betwixt him and 
 Thurid of Froda. Bjorn said that he was well con- 
 tented therewith. Then asked Thord, whether he 
 had that day seen the lad Kjartan, her and Thorodd's 
 united son. '* Him saw I," said Bjorn. "What do 
 you thirk of him?" quoth Thord, again. Then 
 chauntev Bjorn this stave : 
 
 " A stripling lo ! 
 With fearful eyes 
 And woman's image, 
 Downwards ran 
 To the wolfs lair ;— 
 The people say 
 The youth knows not 
 His Viking father." 
 
 . J 
 
 * Hiisfreyja. 
 O 
 
n 
 R'^'* 
 
 t 
 
 * '■'! 
 li 
 
 I 
 
 w « 
 
 , . 
 
 
 
 194 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 Thord said: "What will Thorodd say when he 
 hears of your boy ?" Then sung Bjorn : 
 
 '• Then will the noble lady, 
 When pressing to her breast 
 The imago of his fatlicr 
 In her fair arms to rest, 
 Admit Thorodd's conjecture, 
 For me she ever loved. 
 And ever shall I bear her 
 Affection deep and proved." 
 
 Thord said : *' It will be better for ye, not to have 
 much to do with each other, and that thou turn thv 
 thoughts from Thurid." "That is surely a good 
 counsel," replied Bjbm, " but far is that from my 
 intention, although it makes some difference when I 
 have to do with such a man as Snorri her brother." 
 "Thou wilt be sorry for thy doings," said Thord, 
 and therewith ended the talk between them. Bjorn 
 went home now to Kamb, and took upon himself 
 the management of the place, for his father was then 
 dead. In the winter he began his trips over the 
 heath, to visit Thurid ; and although Thorodd did 
 not like it, he yet saw that it was not easy to find a 
 remedy, and he thought over with himself, how 
 dearly it had cost him, when he sought to stop their 
 interrourse ; but he saw that Bjorn was now much 
 stronger than before. Thorodd bribed, in the 
 winter, Thorgrim Galdrakin to raise a tempest 
 against Bjorn, when he was crossing the heath. 
 Now it came to pass one day, that Bjorn came to 
 Froda, and in the evening, when he was going home, 
 was there thick weather, and some rain ; and he set 
 
m 
 
 M(N01l NARRATIVI'S, 
 
 19.^ 
 
 off very lato ; but when he had gotten u^i on the 
 heath, the weather became cold, and it snowed ; and 
 so dark that he saw not the way before him. After 
 that arose a drift of snow, with so much sleet, that 
 he could scarcely keep his legs ; his clothes were 
 now frozen, for he was before wet through, and he 
 strayed about, so that he knew not where to turn ; 
 hit, at night, upon the edge of a cave, went in, and 
 was there for the night, and had a cold lodging ; 
 then sung Bjorn : — 
 
 '' Fair one ! who dost brinp 
 Vestments to tlic weary,* 
 Little know'st thou where- 
 Hid in cavern dreary, 
 I now shelter seek ; 
 He that once on ocean 
 Boldly steered a bark, 
 Now lies without motion 
 In a cavern dark.'' 
 
 And again he chaunted : 
 
 " The swan's cold regiont I have iirossed 
 All eastwards with a goodly freight. 
 For woman's love, by tempest tost 
 And seeking danger in the fight : 
 Rut now no woman's couch I tiead, 
 A rncky cavern is my bed." 
 
 Bjorn remained three days in the cave, before the 
 weather moderated ; but on the fourth day came he 
 home from the heath to Kamb. He was much ex- 
 
 * To the women of the Northern family was more particularly entrusted 
 the duties of hospitality, among which was included that of bringing dry 
 garments to the traveller who had suffered from the tempestuousness of the 
 weather. Antiq. Amer. p. 236, note a. 
 
 \ Soana-fold, the region of swans, i.e. water, poet, the sea. Antiq. 
 Amer. p. 237, note a. 
 
 o2 
 

 
 
 y I 
 
 
 .» i '1 
 
 •J 1 
 
 !.^| i 
 
 lIlL' 
 
 190 
 
 ^IFNOll NARUATIVr-S. 
 
 Imustcd. Tho servants asked liim where he had 
 been during the tempest — Bjiirn sang : 
 
 " Well my deeds aro known 
 Under Styrlyiirn's biiiincr, 
 Steel-clad Erik slew 
 (Gallant men in battle ; 
 Now on mountain wild, 
 Met by magic sliower, 
 Ontlet could not find 
 From tho Wltcbrs powor."* 
 
 Bjijrn was now at home for tlie winter. In 
 spring his brother Arnbjorn fixed Jiis residence at 
 Bakka in Ilaunhofn, but IJjorn lived at Kamb, and 
 kept a splendid house 
 
 47. The same summer bade Thorodd the tribute- 
 buyer his brother-in-law Snorri Godi to a feast at 
 homo at Froda, and Snorri betook himself thither 
 with twenty men. And while Snorri was at the 
 feast, disclosed Thorodd to him, how he felt him- 
 self both disgraced and injured by the visits which 
 Bjorn Asbrandson made to Thurid his wife, but 
 sister to Snorri Godi : Thorodd said that Snorri 
 should remedy this bad business. Snorri was there 
 a few days, and Thorodd gave him costly presents 
 
 * These poetical effusions of Bjiirn may, perhaps, appear somewhat impro- 
 bable to British readers, but, as has been shewn in the Introduction, the 
 Northmen of this period, exhibited great readiness In a species of rude ver- 
 sification, the melody of which was chiefly formed on alliteration. " As late 
 as the time of Chaucer," says Sir Walter Scott, " it was considered as the 
 mark of a Northern man to ' affect the letter,' " And his parson thus apo- 
 logizes for not reciting a piece of poetry :^ 
 
 " But trusteth wel I am a Sothenie man, 
 I cannot geste rotn, rum, raf, by my letter, 
 And God wot, rime hold 1 but little better.*' 
 
 Abstract of Eyrbyggja Saga. 
 " Cette singuli^re manierc do s'exprimer etoit pourtantassez commune, 
 et peut marquer seule combien ces peuplcs faisoient de cas de la Poesio.'" — 
 Mallet. Introduc. a I'hist. de Daimcmarr, p. 247. 
 
MINOR NAIlllATIVKS. 
 
 197 
 
 vvlicn ho wont away. Siiorri (iotli rode from thcnco 
 over the hoath, and gave out tliat he was going to 
 the ship in the hay of Uaunhafn. This was in 
 summer, at the time of haymaking. ]Jut when they 
 came south on Kamb's heath, then said Snorri : 
 •' Now will wo ride from the heath down to Kamh, 
 and I will tell you," said he, " that I will visit Bjorn, 
 and take his life, if opportunity offers, but not attack 
 him in the house, for the buildings are strong here, 
 and IJjorn is strong and hardy, and wo have but 
 little force ; and it is well known, that men who 
 have come, even so, with great force, have, with 
 little success, attacked such valiant men, inside in 
 the house, as was the case with Geir Godi, and 
 Gissur the white, when they attacked Gunnar of 
 Lidarend, in his house, with eighty men, but he was 
 there alone, and nevertheless were some wounded, 
 and others killed ; and they had staid the attack, 
 had not Geir Godi, with his heedfulness, observed 
 that he was short of arms.* But forasmuch as," 
 continued he, *' Bjorn is now out, which may be ex- 
 pected, as it is good drying weather, so appoint I 
 thee, my kinsman Mar, to fetch Bjorn the first 
 wound J but consider well, that he is no man to trifle 
 with, and that, wherever he is, you may expect a 
 hard blow from a savage wolf, if he, at the onset, 
 receives not such a wound as will cause his death.*' 
 And now when they rode down from the moor to 
 the farm,t saw they that Bjorn was out in the 
 
 * Confer. Njalu, c. 77, 78. Landiiain. p, u, c.o. 
 t Damun, Ban, (Jaard. 
 
w 
 
 \, 
 
 I'l 
 
 
 lf 
 
 t¥ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 I 
 
 ' '! 
 
 
 ; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j' 
 
 
 
 1<)S 
 
 .MIN'>!! V.AHUATJViiS. 
 
 liomestead,* working at a sledge, t and there was 
 nobody with him, and no weapons had he except a 
 little axe, and a large knife, of a span's length from 
 the haft, which he used for boring 'he holes in the 
 sledge. Bjorn saw that Snorri Godi with his fol- 
 lowers rodo down from the moor, into the field, and 
 knew them immediately. Snorri Godi was in a 
 blue cloak, and rode in front. Bjorn made an im- 
 mediate resolve, and took the knife, and went 
 straight towards them ; when they came together, he 
 seized with the one hand, the arm of Snorri's cloak, 
 and with the other, held he the knife in such a 
 manner as was most easy for him to stab Snorri 
 through the breast, if he should think fit to do so. 
 Bjijrn greeted them, as they met, and Snorri greeted 
 him again ; but Mar dropped his hands, for it struck 
 him that Bjorn could soon hurt Snorri, if any injury 
 was done to him. Upon this Bjorn went with them 
 (m their way, and asked what news they had, but 
 held himself in the same position which he had 
 taken at the first. Then took up Bjorn the dis- 
 course in this manner : " It stands truly so, friend 
 Snorri, that I conceal not 1 have acted towards you, 
 in such wise, that you may well accuse me, and I 
 have been told, that you have a hostile intention to- 
 wards me. Now it seems to me best,'* continued he, 
 " that if you have any business with me, other than 
 passing by here to the high road, you should let me 
 
 m-w 
 
 •Tnnvelli. Dan. hjemme marken. 
 
 t Small wooden i.nsliod slcdgos arc used in Scandinavia for drawing in luiy 
 to the liaggart in .lie summer season. 
 
 
MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 199 
 
 know it ; but be that not the case, then would I that 
 you grant me peace, and I will then turn back, for 
 I go not in leading strings." Snorri answered: 
 ♦' Such a lucky grip took thou of me at our meet- 
 ing, that thou must have peace this time, how- 
 ever it may have been determined before ; but 
 this I beg of thee, that from henceforth, thou cease 
 to inveigle Thurid, for it will not end well between 
 us, if thou, in this respect, continue as thou hast 
 begun." Bjorn replied : " That only will I pro- 
 mise thee, which I can perform, but I see not, how 
 I can hold to this, so long as Thurid and I are in 
 the same district.'* " Thou art not so much bound 
 to this place," answered Snorri, "but that thou 
 couldest easily give up thy residence here." Bjorn 
 replied : " True is that which thou sayest, and 
 thus shall it be, since you have yourself come to me, 
 and as our meeting has thus turned out will I pro- 
 mise thee, that Thorodd and thou shalt have no 
 more trouble about my visits to Thuridd for the 
 next year." After this, they separated-, Snorri 
 Godi rode to the ship, and then home to Helgafell. 
 The day following rode Bjorn southwards to Raun- 
 hbfn to go to sea, and he got immediately, in the 
 summer, a place in a ship, and they were very soon 
 ready. They put to sea with a north-east wind, 
 which wind lasted long during the summer ; but of 
 this ship was nothing heard sinco this long time. 
 
200 
 
 i\l/N()ll NAURATIVKS. 
 
 The following narrative will shew that Bjorn was driven to 
 that part of the eastern coast of North America, where White 
 Man's Land, or Great Ireland was supposed by the North- 
 men to be situated, and where, thirty years afterwards, ( 10"29,) 
 Gudleif Gudlaugson, driven in the same direction by easterly 
 winds, recognised his countryman in a Chief, to whose position 
 and influence both he and his companions were indebted 
 for a safe return to their native land. This narrative is 
 contained in the same Saga from whence the preceding 
 has been derived ; but before introducing the second pe- 
 riod in the history of Bjorn Asbrandson to the notice of the 
 reader, a short sketch from the able pen of Bishop Miiller, 
 of the general characteristics of the Eyrhyggja Saga, its 
 high position among Icelandic MSS. its well authenticated 
 details, and its consequent claims to credibility as regards 
 all the leading incidents which it records, will serve to 
 place the two narratives in their proper light, and render 
 the whole more worthy of consideration in a historical 
 point of view : 
 
 " This Saga contains a number of occurrences and names 
 of persons that are also mentioned in other places. Tho- 
 rolf Mostrarskeg's death is fixed by the annals in 918; of 
 him and his son Thorstein iiuich is to be found iu ^e 
 Landnumabok, p. 92, seq. ; Thorgrim Thorstelnson's death 
 is related at length in Gisle Surson's Saga ; the I^andnama 
 mentions the most of Snorri's actions ; the Annals record 
 his birth in 964, and his death in 1031 .... Besides, many 
 of the persons named here are also mentioned in the Krist- 
 nisaga, and many are to be found in the Niala and Lax- 
 dajla Sagas." 
 
 "The author cites the testimony of Ari Frode, p. 16; 
 he remarks himself that Snorri appears in many other 
 Sagas, and expressly mentions p. 334, Laxdacla Saga, 
 and Ileidarviga Saga. In p. 336, certain circumstances 
 are stated to have thus happened " according to what most 
 
 ' ^% 
 
MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 201 
 
 people said;" in p. 174, we read "one sees still the mark 
 of the new barrow, which Arnkel raised over his father, 
 and where he made a fence across, so that no animal should 
 come there." In p. 195, it is stated : " at that time it was 
 the merchants' custom that they had no cook on board 
 ship, but that all the ship's company should take it in turn 
 to cook the victuals : there should also stand a covered can 
 with drink by the sail." These expressions prove that the 
 writer of this Saga lived some time after the events which 
 he here relates ; that already a part of the Saga was current, 
 and that from these statements, and other individual oral 
 relations, he put his work together." 
 
 " Again : verses are often introduced, as well by the 
 acting persons as other Skalds who sung of the events. 
 These must, therefore, on the whole, be considered credible, 
 and contain many, not unimportant characteristics of the 
 times. Traces of later decoration appear in the descrip- 
 tion of the hardihood of those who were wounded at the 
 battle of Alptefjord, p. 44, and of Thorgunna's witchcraft, 
 p. 50, seq. but it is only natural that somewhat more of 
 superstition should appear in this than in many other Sagas, 
 and the circumstance proves nothing against its antiquity. 
 The greater number of these embellishments are no more 
 than what we commonly find, where such superstitious 
 faith is entertained, and the additions are accordant with 
 the credulity of the times. The Eyrbyggja Saga is ex- 
 pressly quoted in the Landnamabok, p. 84. Besides, we 
 can determine the date of this with greater accuracy than 
 that of most other Sagas : it must have been vv^ritten before 
 1264, when Iceland became subject to Norway, because it 
 is stated, p. 11: "All should pay tribute to the temple, 
 and be liable for the journeys of the Chief, just as in the 
 present time, the Thingmen for their Chief:" hence it 
 follows, that the aristocratic form of society, which ceased 
 when the island became subject to Norway, nmst have ex- 
 
t ■ ; 
 
 
 'm'^ 
 
 
 1 1 '; 
 
 HI-' 
 
 
 20^ 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 isted at the period in question.* The Saga must also have 
 been written whilst Thord Sturleson and his mother yet 
 lived, for it says, p. 338 : " when the church which Snorri 
 Godi had built was removed, his bones were taken up, and 
 brought down to the place where the church now stands ; 
 there were present Gudny Bodvar's daughter, Thord and 
 Sighvat Sturleson's mother : and Thord Sturleson says, that 
 they were the bones of a middle sized man, and not large. 
 There were also taken up the bones of Bork the fat, 
 Snorri Godi's uncle : they were very large ; also was taken 
 up the wife of Thordis, Thorbjorn Surs' daughter, Snorri 
 Godi's mother. Gudny says that they were small women's 
 bones, and as black as if they were singed." This proves 
 that the writer of the Saga was present with Thord Sturleson, 
 and his mother. Gudny died in the year 1220 odd, and 
 the Saga must therefore have been written in the be- 
 ginning of the 1 3th century." 
 
 MUllers Sagabibliothek, 1 B. p. 195, seq. 
 
 * See Introduction, pp. v. vi. 
 
 M* 
 
VOYAGE OF GUDLEIF GUDLAUGSON 
 
 TO 
 
 GREAT IRELAND. 
 
 A.D. 1029. 
 
 Eyrbyggja Saga, Cap. 64. Vellum Fragment, No. 4466, in 4to. 
 
 Collated toith the before mentioned MSS. 
 
 64. Gudleif hight a man ; he was son of Gud- 
 laug the rich, of Straumfjord, and brother of Thor- 
 finn, from whom the Sturlungers are descended. 
 Gudleif was a great merchant,* he had a merchant 
 ship, but Thorolf Eyrar Loptson had another, that 
 time they fought against Gyrd, son of Sigvald Jarl; 
 then lost Gyrd his eye. It happened in the last 
 years of the reign of King Olaf the Saint, that Gud- 
 leif undertook a trading voyage to Dublin ;t but 
 when he sailed from the west, intended ho to sail to 
 Iceland ; he sailed then from the west of Ireland,! 
 and met with north-east winds, and was driven far 
 to the west, and south-west, in the sea, where no 
 land was to be seen. But it was already far gone 
 in the summer, and they made many prayers that 
 they might escape from the sea ; and it came to pass 
 chat they saw land. It was a great land, but they 
 knew not what land it was. Then took they the 
 resolve to sail to the land, for they were weary of 
 
 * Farmadr mikill. 
 
 t Some of tlie MSS. add "vestr," shewing that Ireland was spoken of as 
 lying westwards from Iceland. 
 
 t Probably Limerick, which was much frequented by the Nortlimea. 
 
 m 
 
I' 
 
 ft 
 
 
 ''iU 
 
 
 4„ ,'/ 
 
 1 '.', '. 
 
 1 ■■ 
 
 \ ^ ■ 
 
 
 m 
 
 LL 
 
 20i' 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 contending longer with the violence of the sea. 
 They found there a good harhour; and when they had 
 been a short time on shore, came people to them : 
 they knew none of the people, hut it rather appeared 
 to them that they spoke Irish* Soon came to them 
 so great a number that it made up many hundreds. 
 These men fell upon them and seized them all, 
 and bound them, and drove them up the country. 
 There were they brought before an assembly, to be 
 judged. They understood so much that some were 
 for killing them, but others would have them distri- 
 buted amongst the inhabitants, and made slaves. 
 And while this was going on, saw they, where rode 
 a great body of men, and a large banner was borne 
 in the midst. Then thought they that there must 
 be a chief in the troop ; but when it came near, 
 saw they that under the banner rode a large and 
 dignified man, who was much in years, and whose 
 hair was white. All present bowed down before 
 the man, and received him as well as they could. 
 Now observed they that all opinions and resolutions 
 concerning their business, were submitted to his 
 de'jision. Then ordered this man Gudleif and his 
 companions to be brought before him, and when 
 they had come before this man, spoke he to them in 
 
 • " En helzt totti f>eim, sem Peir inselti irsku." This is a very remark- 
 able passage, and affords the strongest grounds for believing that the coun- 
 try to which they were driven, had been previously colonized from Ireland. 
 The Northmen, from their intercourse with the Irish ports, might be sup- 
 posed to have had just sufficient knowledge of the language to detect its 
 sounds (here probably corrupted), and understand the general meaning of 
 the words. See infra. 
 
MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 205 
 
 the Nortliern tongue,* and asked them from what 
 country they came. They answered him, that the 
 most of them were Icelanders. The man asked 
 which of them were Icelanders ? Gudleif said that 
 he was an Icelander. He then saluted the old man, 
 and he received it well, and asked from what part 
 of Iceland ho came. Gudleif said that he was from 
 that distriett which hight Borgafjord. Then en- 
 (juired he from what part of Borgafjord ho came, 
 and Gudleif answered just as it was. Then asked 
 this man ahout almost every one of the principal 
 men in Borgafjord and Breidafjord ; and when they 
 talked thereon, enquired he minutely about every 
 thing, first of Snorri Godi, and his sister Thurid of 
 Froda, and most about Kjartan her son. The 
 people of the country now called out, on the other 
 side, that some decision should be made about the 
 seamen. After this went the great man away from 
 them, and named twelve of his men with himself, 
 and they sat a long time talking. Then went they 
 to the meeting of the people, and the old man said 
 to Gudleif: " I and the people of the country have 
 talked together about your business, and the people 
 have left the matter to me ; but I will now give ye 
 leave to depart whence ye will ; but although ye 
 may think that the summer is almost gone, yet 
 will I counsel ye to remove from hence, for here are 
 the people not to be trusted, and bad to deal with, 
 and they think besides that the laws have been 
 broken to their injury." Gudleif answered : *' What 
 
 * Norranu, see ante, p. 07, note. + Ilarmtl. 
 
 1 'i' 
 
'20() 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVF.S. 
 
 iiir 
 
 V ■■■ 
 
 '■•:l\' 
 
 f4 
 
 I (;■■ 
 
 shall we say, if fate permits us to return to our own 
 country, who has given us this freedom ?" He an- 
 swered : '• That can I not tell you, for I like not 
 that my relations and foster-hrothers should make 
 such a journey hereto, as ye would have made, if 
 ye had not had the benefit of my help ; but now is my 
 age so advanced, that I may expect every hour old age 
 to overpower me ; and even if I could live yet for a 
 time, there are here more powerful men than me, 
 who little peace would give to foreigners that might 
 come here, although they be not just here in the 
 neighbourhood where ye landed." Then caused he 
 their ship to be made ready for sea, and was there 
 with them, until a fair wind sprung up, which was 
 favourable to take them from the land. But before 
 they separated took this man a gold ring from his 
 hand, and gave it into the hands of Gudleif, and 
 therewith a good sword ; then said he to Gudleif : 
 " If the fates permit you to come to your own 
 country, then shall you take this sword to the 
 yeoman, Kjartan of Froda, but the ring to Thurid 
 his mother." Gudleif replied : *' What shall I say, 
 about it, as to who sends them these valuables ?" 
 He answered : " Say that he sends them who was a 
 better friend of the lady of Froda, than of her bro- 
 ther, Godi of HelgafeU ; but if any man therefore 
 thinks that he knows who has owned these articles, 
 then say these my words, that I forbid any one to 
 come to me, for it is the most dangerous expedition, 
 unless it happens as fortunately with others at the 
 landing place, as with you ; but here is the land 
 
 1/ *! 
 
 m 
 
MfNOR NAUnATlVKS. 
 
 G07 
 
 great, and bad as to harbours, and in all parts may 
 strangers expect hostility, when it does not turn out 
 as has been with you." After this, Gudleif and his 
 people put to sea, and they landed in Ireland late 
 in harvest, and were in Dublin for the winter. 
 But in the summer after, sailed they to Iceland, and 
 Gudleif delivered over there these valuables ; and 
 people held it for certain, that this man was Bjorn, 
 THE Champion of Breidavik, and no other account 
 to be relied on is there in confirmation of this, 
 except that which is now given here. 
 
 The reader will no doubt come to the same concl ision 
 drawn by the Icelanders respecting the identity of thj aged 
 chief, to whose generosity and friendly feeling Gudleif and 
 his companions were so much indebted, and unhesitatingly 
 pronounce him to have been none other than Bjoiin As- 
 
 BKANDSON, THE CHAMPION OF BllEIDAVIK, who, it will be 
 
 remembered, had set sail about thirty years before, with a 
 north-east wind, and had not since been heard of.* The 
 remarkable accordance of all the personal details, to which 
 the writer evidently attaches the principal importance, 
 with the historical events, which are only incidentally al- 
 luded to, enable is to determine dates and intervals of 
 time with a degree of accuracy that places the truth of the 
 narrative beyond all question, and gives a high degree of 
 interest to these two voyages. The mention of Sigurd Jarl 
 of the Orkneys, Palnatoki, Styrbjbrn the nephew of Erik 
 of Sweden, the battle of Fyrisvold, Snorri Godi, " the latter 
 purt of the reign of king Olaf the saint," gives a chrono- 
 logical character to the narratives, and enables us to fix 
 
 * See ante, p. 19!). 
 
it,: 
 
 if 
 
 jiiir 
 
 '? ft 
 
 Li ;;, til 
 
 n v.' 
 
 I;l :• 
 
 |w ■!' .1 
 
 
 ^208 
 
 MINOTl N.MUIATIVI.S. 
 
 with confidonco, nearly the exact period of tlie principal 
 events. Hence it upncars that Gudleif Cndlaugson, sailing 
 from the west of Ireland in the year 1020, with a n. e. 
 wind, is driven far to the south and south-west, where no 
 land was to be seen, and that after being exposed for 
 many days to the violence of the winds and waves, he at 
 length finds shelter upon a coast, where Bjlirn Asbrandson, 
 who had '('''t Iceland with n. e. winds thirty years before, 
 had become established as chief of the inhabitants of the 
 coinitry. He finds him, as might naturally have been ex- 
 pected, " stricken in years," and " his hair was white," for 
 Bjorn had left Iceland for Jomsborg in the prime of life, 
 had, after taking })art in the achievements of the Jomsvi- 
 kings up to the death of Palnatoki in 993, returned to and 
 resided in Iceland until 999, and now thirty winters had 
 passed over his head since his ultimate departure from his 
 native land. The locality of the newly discovered country 
 is next to be determined : Now if a line be drawn running 
 N. E. and s. w. the course of Bjorn Asbrandson, from the 
 western coast of Iceland, and another in the same direction 
 (the course of Gudleif Gudlaugson) from the west coast of 
 Ireland, they would intersect each other on the southern 
 shores of the United States, somewhere about Carolina or 
 Georgia. This position accords well with the description 
 of the locality of their country, given by the Skraelings to 
 Thorfinn Karlsefne, and which the Northmen believed to 
 be White Man's Land or G^ieat Ireland,* as also with 
 the geographical notices of the same land which have been 
 already adduced ;f and when to these evidences be added 
 the statements of Gudleif and his companions respecting 
 the language of the natives, " which appeared to them to he 
 Irish,'*X there is every reason to conclude that this was 
 the Hvitramannaland, Albania, or Irland ed mikla of the 
 Northmen. 
 
 * See ante, p. 103. t Ante, p. 183. X Ante, p. 204. 
 
 M 
 
MINOII N.ARUATIVKS. 
 
 ^iOD 
 
 The notices of the country contained in tliese two nar- 
 ratives are, doubtless, scanty, and merely incidental, the 
 object of the narrators being evidently to trace the romantic 
 and adventurous career of the Champion of I3reidav':l:, and 
 the perilous voyage of his countrymen, but this very cir- 
 cumstance is an argument in favour of the honesty of the 
 statement as regards the supposed Irish settlement; and 
 the simple and unpretending character of both narratives, 
 supported, as they are, by historical references, confirmatory 
 of the principal events, gives to these incidental allusions a 
 degree of importance to which they would not otherwise be 
 entitled. 
 
 Professor Rafn is of opinion that the White Man's Land, 
 or Great Ireland of the Northmen was the country situated 
 to the south of Chesapeake Bay, including North and 
 South Carolina, Georgia, and East Florida.* It is well 
 known that the Esquimaux Indians formerly inhabited 
 countries much further south than they do at present, and 
 a very remarkable tradition is stated to be still preserved 
 amongst the Shawanese Indians, who emigrated 87 years 
 ago, from West Florida to Ohio, that Florida was once 
 inhabited bi/ white men, who used iron instruments. -f A 
 German writer also mentions an old tradition of the an- 
 cestors of the Shawanese having come from beyond the 
 sea.\ 
 
 Various circumstances shew that Great Ireland was a 
 country, of the existence of which the Icelandic historians 
 had no doubt ; it is spoken of in the Saga of Thorfinn 
 Karlsefne as a country well known by name to the North- 
 men ; in the account of Ari Marson's voyage, and the geo- 
 
 • Antiq. Amer. p. 448. See Map, Plate 11. It might also have ex- 
 tended towards the Isthmus of America. See infra, p. '213, seq. 
 
 t Account of the present state of the Indian tribes inhabiting Ohio, in 
 ArchEologia Americana, I. p. 273-27G. ap. Ilafii. 
 
 \ Assals Nachrichtcn iiber die frnhcrcn Einwohncr von Nord America 
 und ihrc Dcnkmiiler, p. 87. ap. Rafn. in Antiq. Amrr. p. 448, note a. 
 
 V 
 
m 
 
 n 
 
 i 
 
 ';ilO 
 
 MINOR narhativks. 
 
 xn 
 
 
 ^'raphical frnpptnent, its position is pointocl out : — " west from 
 Ireland, near Vinland the good" — " next and sotnowhut 
 behind Vinland,"* and the following extract, taken from 
 the collection of JJjiirn Johnson, will shew that a Chart 
 had actually been made of this distant land : — 
 
 " Sir Erlenil Thordson had obtained from abroad the 
 geographical chart of that Albania, or land of the White 
 men, which is situated opposite Vinland the good, of which 
 mention has been before made in this little book, and 
 which the merchants formerly called III hernia Ma.tou or 
 Great Ireland, and lies, as has been said, to the west of 
 Ireland proper. This chart had held accurately all those 
 tracts of land, and the boundaries of Markland, Einfoeting- 
 jaland, and little Ilelluland, together wi Greenland, to 
 the west of it, where apparently begins ...^ good Terra 
 Florida."f This Sir:j: Erlcnd was priest of the parish of 
 Staden in Steingrimsfjord, on the west coast of Iceland, in 
 the year I568,§ but no further information has been obtained 
 respecting the chart, which probably contained the outlines 
 of all the countries known to the Northmen soon after their 
 discovery of the American continent. 
 
 From what cause could the name of Great Ireland 
 have arisen, but from the fact of the country having been 
 colonized by the Irish ? Coming from their own green 
 island to a vast continent possessing many of the fertile 
 qualities of their native soil, the appellation would have 
 
 * Sec ante, p. 183. 
 
 t Sim Erlentlr heitinn Imrdarson, liafdi yfirkomizt utanlamis landatiiblu 
 um I>ii Albania cdr Uvitramunnaland, scm liggr gagnvart Vinlandi biiiii 
 guda, ok udr cr umrcedt i ttessutn bseklingi, ok kauprociin fordiim ncfiia 
 Hyhernia Major cdi' Irlanil hid Mikla, ok liggr, scm adr grcinlr, vcstr fra 
 almcmiiligu Irlandi. Sii tabla liafdi haldit frodb'ga um Jessa alia landak- 
 lasa ok roetur, Marklands, Einfoetingja, ok litla HcIIulands sampt ok Groen- 
 land8 vestr I>angat, seiii scrdeilis til tok sii g<jda Terra Florida." Antiq. 
 Amer. p. 448, note b. 
 
 X Sir was formerly the English title for a priest, see Spenser. 
 
 $ Antiq. Amer. p. 449, note b. 
 
MIVOH NAUMATIVI'S. 
 
 '2l\ 
 
 been natural and appropriate ; and costume, colour, or pe- 
 culiar habits, might have readily given rise to the country 
 being denominated White Man's Land by the neighbouring 
 Esquimaux.* Nor does this conclusion involve any im- 
 probability : we have seen that the Irish visited and in- 
 habited Iceland towards the close of the 8th century, to 
 have accom;)lished which they must have traversed a stormy 
 ocean to the extent of about 800 miles ; that a hundred years 
 before the time of Dicuil, namely in the year 725, they 
 had been founa upon the Faroe islands ; that in the 10th 
 century, voyages between Iceland and Ireland were of or- 
 dinary occurrence ; and that in the beginning of the 11th 
 century, White Mian's Land or Great Ireland is men- 
 tioned, — not as a newly discovered country, — but as a 
 land long known by name to the Northmen. Neither the 
 Icelandic historians or navigators were, in the least degree, 
 interested in originating or giving currency to any fable re- 
 specting an Irish settlement on the southern shores of North 
 America, for they set up no claim to the discovery of that 
 part of the Western continent, their intercourse being 
 limited to the coasts north of Chesapeake Bay. The dis- 
 covery of Vinland and Great Ireland appear to have been 
 totally independent of each other : the latter is only inci- 
 ^ dentally alluded to by the Northern navigators ; with the 
 name they were familiar, but of the peculiar locality of the 
 country they were ignorant, nor was it until after the return 
 of Karlsefne from Vinland in 1011, and the information 
 which he obtained from the Skreelings or Esquimaux who 
 were captured during the voyage, that the Northmen be- 
 came convinced that White Man's Land or Great Ireland 
 was a part of the same vast continent, of which Helluland, 
 Markland, and Vinland formed portions. 
 
 The traces of Irish origin which have been observed among 
 some of the Indian tribes of North and Central America tend 
 also to strengthen the presumption that these countries had 
 
 *See infra, p. 215. 
 
fc^':i 
 
 y ]r :- 
 
 2 1^2 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 been colonized from Ireland at some remote period of time.* 
 llask, the eminent Danish philologist, leans to this opinion, 
 which he founds upon the early voyages of the Irish to Ice- 
 land and the similitude between the Hiberno-Celtic, and 
 American Indian dialects. " It is well known," he says, 
 " that Iceland was discoyereJ and partially inhabited by 
 the Irish before its discovery and occupation by the Scan- 
 dinavians; and when we find that the Icelanders, de- 
 scended from the Scandinavians, discovered North America, 
 it will appear less improbable that the Irish,who, at that pe- 
 riod, were more advanced in learning and civilization, should 
 have undertaken similar expeditions with success :"f the 
 name of Irland it Mikla he also considers to be a suf- 
 ficient indication of the Irish having emigrated thither 
 from their own country. 
 
 It seems to be generally admitted by historians and anti- 
 quaries that the main stream of colonization has flowed 
 from east to west, the Celts preceding the Teutonic and 
 Sarmatian races, by a long interval of time. Herodotus, 
 four centuries before the Christiaw era, places the Celts 
 beyond the pillars of Hercules, and upon the borders of the 
 most westerly region in Europe,;]; and Caesar in the first 
 century finds them in Gaul and Britain ; that their succes- 
 sors, the Goths, should have driven them to seek for regions 
 still further westward is therefore in full accordance with 
 the course of their former migrations, and the same noma- 
 dic principle which brought them from Asia to the British 
 isles, might have wafted them in later ages to the western 
 world. 
 
 The illustrious Leibnitz seems to have contemplated the 
 
 * In Indigenis Americtc Septemtrionalis reperiri qiiDBilam Hlbemicaj ori- 
 ginis vestigcia, plures ducti et expert! viii obscrvaverunt. Rafn in Antiq. 
 Amer. p. 449. 
 
 t Siinlede Afhundlinger, B. 1, p. 105. 
 
 I 01 Si KtXro'i thi t^o* 'MfaKXtjUov (TTii\(b)V onovptovai Si Kvvti(jiot(ri, n'i 
 tit-j^arot 1r^)bQ dvcifiiwv otVeofffi rwv tv rii EiipwTry KaToiKt]fiiv(ov. 
 
 Euterp. xxxiii. Mclpom. xlix. 
 
 '»*»' 
 
MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 QV3 
 
 possibility of such a remote Celtic settlement when he 
 wrote: — " And if there be an]/ island beyond Ireland, where 
 the Celtic language is in use, by the help thereof v/e should 
 be guided, as by a thread, to the knowledge of still more 
 antient things."* 
 
 The remarkable- narrative of Lionel Wafer who resided 
 for several months amongst the inhabitants of Uie Isthmus of 
 America, contains some remarkable passages bearing upon 
 this subject, and which, as the author had no preconceived 
 opinions on the affinity of languages, or favourite theory to 
 uphold, are deserving of notice : speaking of their lan- 
 guage, he says : — 
 
 " My knowledge of the Highland language made me the 
 more capable of learning the Darien Indians' language, 
 when I was among them, for there is some affinity ; not in 
 the signification of the words of each language, but in the 
 pronunciation, which I could easily imitate, both being 
 spoken pretty much in the throat, with frequent aspirates, 
 and much the same sharp or circumflex tang or cant."f 
 This writer, however, had evidently not paid much atten- 
 tion to the affinities of the two languages which he compares 
 and finds only to resemble in pronunciation, for many of 
 the words which he afterwards adduces as examples of the 
 Indian language, bear a marked similitude to those of the 
 Celtic, as may readily be seen by the following com- 
 parison : — 
 
 * " £t si ultra Hiberniam esset aliqua insula Celtici sermonis, ejus 
 filo in multo adhuc antiquiora duceremur." Leibnitzius, Collect. Etymol. 
 Vol. I. p. 163. 
 
 f A New Voyage and Description of the Isthmus of America, giving an 
 account of the author's abode there, the Indian inhabitants, their manners, 
 customs, language, &c. by Lionel Wafer, London, 1C99, p. 18G. This 
 author is one of Dr. Robertson's authorities, and described by that eminent 
 historian as " a traveller possessing more curiosity and intelligence than we 
 should have expected to find in an associate of Buccaneers." Plist. Anicr. 
 Vol. V. of Works, p. 294 : Wafer appears to have been surgeon in a privateer. 
 
11 . :, 
 
 1 : ■ 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 ' 'i' 
 
 h 
 
 
 1 ;. 
 
 i' 
 > 
 
 ^ :■ 
 
 
 
 ^14 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 Ajwerican-Indian. 
 
 TrtMfaA— Father 
 
 Celtic. 
 
 Namah — Mother. 
 Pootiah — Vv'oman 
 Neenah — Girl 
 iVlee"— the Moon 
 
 ^ecAaA (pron. Eetsha) — Ugly 
 
 PaeecAaA— Foh ! Ugly ! . 
 
 Eeehah Malooquah, an expresBion 
 
 of great dislike 
 Cotchah, sleep 
 Caupah (pron. Capa), hammock 
 
 Eetah, got . 
 Doolah, water 
 Copah, drink 
 Mamaumah, fine 
 
 Taduys (Welsh), Tad (Corn.) Tat 
 (Armoric) Dad or Daddy (vulg. 
 Irish) 
 
 Naing (Irish). 
 
 Bean (Ir.) jBwn (Armor.) 
 
 Neean (antieat 8cotch). 
 
 Neul, a star— light — neultaib njme, the 
 stars of heaven (Ir.). 
 
 Etseact — Death (Ir. ) — the ugliest of all 
 things. 
 
 Pah, prefixed to a word in Welsh aug- 
 ments its signification. 
 
 Malluighe or malluigte, cursed, ac- 
 cursed (Irish). 
 
 Codalta and Codaltac, sleepy (Ir.). 
 
 Cuba, a cloak, Caban, tent, cottage (Ir.) 
 Gaban, ib. (Welsh). 
 
 Ed, to take, handle (Irish). 
 
 Tuile, a flood (Ir.). 
 
 Ce6bae, drunkenness (Ir.) 
 
 Ma, ma, ha, would be nearly the sound 
 of the repetition of the word ba 
 which signifies good in Irish : the m 
 and b are also often used indiscrimi- 
 nately. See O'Brien — Remarks on 
 letter M. 
 
 Emoi, to name (Welsh), Ilenu, a 
 name (Armor.). 
 
 Wafer further says : " Their way of reckoning from score 
 to score is no more than what our old English way was, 
 but their saying, instead of thirty-one, thirty-two, &c. one 
 score and eleven, one score and twelve, &c. is much like 
 the Highlanders of Scotland and Ireland, reckoning eleven 
 and twenty, twelve and twenty, &c. ; so for fifty-three, the 
 Highlanders say thirteen and two score, as the Darien 
 Indians would two score and thirteen, only changing the 
 place. In my youth I was well acquainted with the High- 
 land or primitive Irish language, both as it is spoken in 
 the north of Ireland, 
 
 Eenah. to call 
 
 partic 
 
 upon 
 
MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 '215 
 
 Boyne, and about the town of Virgini upon Lough 
 Rammer in the Barony of Castle Raghen, in the County 
 of Cavan ; and also in the Highlands of Scotland, where I 
 
 have been up and down in several places I learned 
 
 a great deal of the Darien language in a month's conversa- 
 tion with them."* 
 
 Wafer's description of the dress of this tribe of American 
 Indians, presents also a remarkable coincidence with the short 
 notices of the inhabitants of White Man's Land, as given 
 to Karlsefne by the Esquimaux : — 
 
 " They have a sort of long cotton garment of their own, 
 some lohite, others of a rusty black, shaped like our carters' 
 frocks, hanging down to their heels, with a fringe of the same 
 of cotton, about a span long, and short, wide, open sleeves, 
 reaching but to the middle of the arms. These garments 
 they put on over their heads. . . . When they are thus as- 
 sembled, they will sometimes walk about the place, or plan- 
 tation, where they are, with these their robes on ; and I once 
 saw Lacenta (a chief) thus walking about, with two or three 
 hundred of these attending him, as if he was mustering them : 
 and I took notice that those in the black gowns walked before 
 him, a7id the white after him, each having their lances of the 
 same colour with their rohes\. . . . They were all in their 
 finest robes, which are lovj white (/owns, reaching to their 
 ancles, with fringes at the bottom, and in their hands they 
 had half pikes."+ 
 
 • Wafer's New Voyage and Description of the Isthmus of America, &c. 
 pp. 183, 184, 186. 
 
 t Confer. Saga of Thorfinn Karlsefne, p. 103. 
 
 t Wafer's Voyages, &c. pp. 37, 14'2. This author also makes mention of 
 white people in the Isthmus of America, similar to the Albinos o( Africa, 
 which are not, however, he says, a distinot race, but are occasionally the 
 progeny of copper-coloured parents (p. 137). Humboldt also mentions the 
 circumstance of fair children being born of dark coloured American Indians, 
 (Hd. Cab. Lib. x. p. 120,) shewing how little dependance is to be placed on 
 skin or complexion as indications of race. 
 
216 
 
 MINOR NAIIUATIVES. 
 
 ■i. 
 
 
 M'' 
 
 ■ ) 
 
 
 
 .(/'If' ;i 
 1^ ff..' 
 
 i; ' 
 
 The affinity between the American-Indian and Celtic 
 languages, and consequent probability of an European set- 
 tlement having been formed upon the shores of New Spain 
 before the arrival of the Spaniards, appears to have been en- 
 tertained by many writers of eminence in the 17th century.* 
 In the remarkable work entitled the " Turkish Spy," we 
 find the author positively affirming the similarity of the two 
 languages, and stating the tradition of an early European 
 settlement : 
 
 *' This prince (Charles II.) has several nations under his 
 dominions, and 'tis thought he scarce knows the just extent 
 of his territories in America. There is a region in that con- 
 tinent inhabited by a people whom they call Tuscorards and 
 Doegs. T/teir language is the same as is spoken by the 
 British or Welsh. . . Those Tuscorards and Doegs of Ame- 
 rica are thought to descend from them. . . Itis certain, that 
 when the Spaniards first conquered Mexico, they were sur- 
 prised to hear the inhabitants discourse of a strange people, 
 that formei-ly came thither in corraughs,\ who taught them 
 the knowledge of God, and of immortality, instructed them 
 also in virtue and morality, and prescribed holy rites and ce- 
 remonies of religion. 'Tis remarkable also, what an Indian 
 King said to a Spaniard, viz. : That in foregoing ages, a 
 strange people arrived there by sea, to whom his ancestors 
 gave hospitable entertainment ; in regard they found them 
 men of wit and courage, endued also with many other excel- 
 lencies : but he could give no account of their original or 
 name. . . . The British language is so prevalent here, that 
 the very towns, bridges, beasts, birds, rivers, hills, &c. are 
 
 • See Baumgarten, Allgcmcine Geschichte der Liinder und Volckcr von 
 Americu, P.i. c. i. p. 27. Pere Charleroi ap. Mallet. Introduc. al'histolrc do 
 Dannemarc, pp. 188, 189. 
 
 t This is a goud commciitury upon the sUiteinent of Canibrcnsis, who ilc- 
 scribes the curraghs as so little sea-worthy, that the tail of a salmon would 
 upset them !— See Topog. Ilibern. 
 
MINOll NARRATIVES. 
 
 217 
 
 calitid by British or Welsh names."* "Who can tell," truly 
 adds '^^he author, " the various transmigrations of mortals on 
 earth, or trace out the true originals of any people "? 
 
 The improbability of the Irish having, at any very remote 
 period of time, been in possession of vessels of sufficient power 
 and capacity to enable them to accomplish a voyage across 
 the Atlantic, may, perhaps, be urged as an objection to this 
 supposed early migration to the American coast ; but, with- 
 out resting upon their antient Spanish or Carthaginian 
 connexion, a very little enquiry will shew, that, at least in 
 the first centuries of the Christian era, they were amply 
 provided with the means of accomplishing a voyage to the 
 New World, which, from the western coast of Ireland, little 
 exceeds 1 600 miles.f 
 
 O'Halloran states, on the authority of the Psalter of Ca- 
 shel, said to be the oldest Irish MS., that Moghcorb, King 
 of Leath Mogha, or Munster, prepared a large fleet in the 
 year 296, and invaded Denmark ; and that in the following 
 century, (A. D. 367), Criomthan, who in the Psalter of Ca- 
 shel is styled Monarch of Ireland and Albany, and leader of 
 the Franks and Saxons, prepared a formidable fleet, and 
 raised a large body of troops, which were transported to 
 Scotland, for the purpose of acting in conjunction with the 
 Picts and Saxons, against the Roman wall, and devastating 
 
 * " Letters writ by aTurkish Spy, who lived five and forty years undisco- 
 vered in Paris, giving an impartial account to the Divan at Constantinople, 
 of the most remarkable transactions of Europe, &c. from the year 1673 to 
 the year 108'2; written originally in Arabic, 10th edition, London, 1734." — 
 Vol. 8, p. 159, seq. The real author of this work, which caused a great 
 sensation at the time, as well from the highly interesting character of its 
 contents, as from ths profound secrecy in which the name of the writer was 
 long involved, was John Paul Marana, a native of Italy. See D'lsraeli's 
 Curios. Lit. 
 
 t " Newfoundland is the nearest part of America to Europe ; the distance 
 from St. Joliri's, in Newfoundland, to Port Valentia, on the west coast of Ire- 
 land, being 1G5G miles." Hist, of Brit. Colonics, by Montgomery Martin, 
 Vol. III. p. 455, note. 
 
ft'i 
 
 m ■ 
 
 m 
 
 ■hf 
 
 
 218 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES, 
 
 the provinces of Britain.* In .'396, an expedition, upon a 
 most extensive and formidable scale, was undertaken by the 
 celebrated Niall of the Nine Hostages, one of the most dis- 
 tinguished princes of the Milesian race : " Observing," says 
 Moore, " that the Romans, after breaking up the line of en- 
 campment along the coast opposite to Ireland, had retired to 
 the eastern shore, and the northern wall, Niall perceived 
 that an apt opportunity was thus offered for a descent upon 
 the now unprotected territory. Instantly summoning, there- 
 fore, all the forces of the island, and embarking them on 
 board such ships as he could collect, he ranged, with his nu- 
 merous navy, along the whole coast of Lancashire," &c.+ It 
 was to this expedition that the poet Claudian, lauding the 
 achievement of his patron Stilicho, alluded, in the memora- 
 ble lines : — 
 
 Me quoque vicinis pereuntem gentibus, inquit, 
 Miinivit Stilico. Totam cum Scotus leniem 
 Movit et infesto spumavit reinige Thetys. 
 
 By him defended, when the neighbouring hosts 
 Of warlike nations spread along our coasts ; 
 When Scots t came thundering from the Irish shores, 
 And the wide ocean foamed from hostile oars. 
 
 De Laudab. Stil. Lib. 2. 
 
 •Vol. II. pp. 281,293. 
 
 t Hist. Ireland, Vol. I. p. 150. 
 
 i The Irish are supposed to have obtained the name of Scots or Scoti from 
 the Scotic or Scythic origin of the Spanish settlers under the sons of Milesius, 
 whose invasion Moore places " about a century or two '' before the Christian 
 era; other more enthusiastic national historians take us back to 800 years 
 before that period ; and O'Halloran fixes the landing on the 17th of May, 
 A. M. 2736, or 12G4 years before the birth of Christ. (Vol. II.p. 97.) The 
 name Scoti, he derives from Scota, the wife of Niulus, High Priest of Phce- 
 nius, the inventor of letters, and ancestor of Milesius, in proof of hich is 
 given the following quotation from an Irish poem of the 9th century, enti- 
 tled, Canam bunadhas na Nagaoidheal, or " Let us rehearse the origin of 
 Ihe Irish": — 
 
 " Phueni o Pliacnius adbearta ; bvigli s^un dochta 
 Oaoidheal a Guoidlieal glasghurta : Scuit 6 Scota." Or: — 
 
MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 219 
 
 This same Niall extended his enterprise to the coast of 
 Britanny, and ravaged the maritime districts of the north- 
 west of Gaul, during which expedition was captured the great 
 Christian apostle, St. Patrick. 
 
 " It is clear the Irish are called Phenians from Phcenius, Gathelians from 
 Gathelus (son of Niulus and Scota), and Scots from Scota." Vol. II. p. 66. 
 
 Mr. Wood puts aside all this high genealogy, and derives the word from 
 the Gothic Skut, applied to the Belgic colony in Ireland ; and thence after- 
 wards transferred generally to the Irish at large (Enquiry, p. 81) ; while 
 Camden, on the other hand, says, ** Sure it is that they came out of Spain 
 into Ireland, and part of them, departjng thence, came and added a third 
 nation unto the Britains and Picts in Brituine. . . . Neither can it be a mar- 
 vaile, that a number of them withdrew themselves into Ireland, out of the 
 north part of Spaine, which, as Strabo writes, is most barainc, and wherein 
 men live most miserably." (Britanniti, p. 06.) Moore shews, by a train of 
 reasoning which cannot well be overthrown, that whatever Belgic, Northern, 
 or Gaulish colonies may have been established in later years, tlie primitive 
 inhabitants of the country were most probably derived from Celtic Spain, 
 whose position, and early intercourse, by means of Phoenician and Car- 
 thaginian settlers on her western coast, naturally led to a colonization 
 which could so easily have been effected. The historical traditions of both 
 countries favour this assumption, and the fact of the Irish calling all 
 foreigners Gall, or Gaill, seems to be conclusive against their Gaulish or Bri- 
 tisli extraction." Scoti sumus, non Galli,"is their expression, says Ware; 
 who, in the face of this, advocates the British extraction of the earlier inha- 
 bitants! Let the Belgic, Gallic, Scythic, or Danaic settlements be placed when 
 and where they may, the great majority of the people of Ireland present, in 
 their features, habits and language, all the living characteristics of an essen- 
 tially Celtic population, — characteristics which time has not changed or con- 
 quest obliterated, — which more than 200 years constant intercourse with the 
 Northmen could not efface, — which GOO years connection with England has 
 not altered, and which even in the present day, are as distinctly visible as 
 her fertile vallies and verdant hills. That the term Scoti was the distinc- 
 tive appellation of the Irish, from an early period, down to the beginning 
 of the eleventh century, and was afterwards, through colonization from 
 Ireland, transferred to North Britain, is evident, from the application of the 
 name in the works of antient writers ; and the distinction between the Cale- 
 donian and Hibernian Scots, as well as the descent ofthe modern Scots from 
 the Irish, is clearly pointed out in the following lines of an old Latin poem, 
 called Palal-Albion, published in the reign of James I., and quoted by Sir 
 Jauicb Ware in his Antiquities of Ireland : — 
 

 
 . s 
 
 1 
 
 ; ■ 
 i 
 
 'I 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 R^i 
 
 220 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 Tiiat such expeditions could have been carried on by 
 means of the little fragile currachs, to which mode of trans- 
 port some writers would limit the sea expeditions of the 
 Irish at this period, seems scarcely credible and while 
 allowing full force to the fearless and enterprising spirit of 
 the gallant Scoti, and the " contempto pelagi," alluded to by 
 Eric of Auxerre, we must allow them some more rational 
 means for conveying a body of troops across the British and 
 Gallic channels than these frail barks.* 
 
 Not that the currachs were insufficient for individual 
 enterprise of a more peaceful character, and it seems 
 probable that the monks of the 8th century launched 
 themselves on the northern ocean in these simple hide- 
 covered skiffs, and thus eifected a passage to their island 
 retreats ; for we find St. Corniac committing himself to 
 the sea in a similar bark, and on one occasion he is said 
 
 At quoniam Arctoo Scotico Rex noster ab orbc 
 
 Ncc minus occiduis, pcrhibcnt, Scotua ortus Hibemis, 
 
 Qui Britonum parent eccptris. 
 
 Or, according to Harris's translation : — 
 
 But since our King from northern Scotia came, 
 Not less the Scots, if wc may credit fame, 
 Alilce submiss to Britain's throne, derive 
 Tlieir lineage from Hibernians western hive. 
 
 , .Iwte 
 
 
 The Abbe Macgeoghan (p. 144) fixes the first emigration to Scotland in 
 the third century, when they formed a settlement in Argyleshire, part of 
 which was known by the name of lerna, and the Hebrides were called JErin. 
 " Foreigners," says Wood, " denominated the Highlands Hibemia, and their 
 inhabitants Hiberni, as late as the eleventh century, and the Lowlanders 
 called them Irish ;" but after the destruction of the Picts, in the ninth cen- 
 tury, the name Scotia was transferred to North Britain. — See Enquiry con- 
 cerning the Prim. Inhab. of Ireland, p. 162. 
 
 * The currachs were probably used on such expeditions just as the 
 " scaphas longarum navium " were by Cassar, for landing the troops. See 
 De Bell. Gull. B. iv. c. 26. 
 
 [|%sj 
 
MINOR NARRATIVF.S. 
 
 221 
 
 to have been out of sight of land for fourteen days and 
 nights.* 
 
 IJut the remarkable passage in Tacitus, which has been 
 80 often cited by Iri>I. historians in proof of the early 
 maritime importance of their country, would lead to the 
 conclusion that at a period, anterior to that now under 
 consideration, the Irish were possessed of ships, or vessels of 
 no mean size or description. " Ireland," the Roman historian 
 says, "situated midway between Britain and Spain, and con- 
 venient also to the Gallic sea, connected a most powerful 
 portion of the empire by considerable mutual advantages, 
 the soil and climate, and the dispositions and habits of the 
 people do not differ much from those of Britain : the 
 apj)roaches and harbours are better known, by reason of 
 commerce and the merchants "j- " From this it appears," 
 
 * '• Nam cum ejus navis a terris per quntuordecem a3stei tcmporis dies 
 totidcmque noctes, plenis vclis austro flante vento, ad scptcntrionalis 
 plagam coeli dirccto excurrere cursu." Adamnan. De S. Columb, as quoted 
 by Moore, V. I. p. 191, Sir James Ware pives an extract from an MS. 
 copy of tlie life of St. Brendan, in wliicii tiiu Corrmjh is described to be u very 
 light barque ribbed and fenced with timbers, and covered with raw cow 
 hides, the joining of the skins being daubed with butter. Into such a vessel, 
 the writer adds, " they put materials for making two other boats, of otlier 
 skins, and provisions for forty days, and butter to dress or prepare tlie 
 skins for the covering of the boat, and other utensils necessary for human 
 life. They also fixed a tree in the midst of the banjue, and a sail, and other 
 things belonging to the steering of a boat." [Antiq. Ir. II. p. 178-9.] Here 
 long voyages seem to have been contemplated, and the same writer states 
 on the authority of a passage in Mai'ianus Scotus, an eminent Irisli anna- 
 list of the 11th century, that " three Scots (Irishmen) named Duflan, Mac- 
 beth, and Magulmumenus, coveting to lead a life of pilgrimage for tlie 
 Lord's sake, taking with them provisions sufficient for a week, fled privately 
 out of Ireland, and entering into a boat, made of two hides and a half, in a 
 miraculous manner, without sails or tackling, in seven days landed in Corn- 
 wall, and from thence made their way to king Alfred.'' Ware, V. II. p. 179. 
 t " Hibcrnia medio inter Britannium atque Ilispaniam sita, et Gallico 
 quoque mari opportuna, vaientissimam imnerii partem magnis invicem 
 
 usibus niiscuerit Solum coelumque, et ingenia cultusque hominum 
 
 baud multum a Britannia differunt, melius aditus portusque per com- 
 mercia et negotiatorcs coijniti." Vit. Agric. c. 24. 
 
2^22 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 \f' ■: 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 31 1 
 
 .J' 
 
 %f ■■ ?''■' 
 
 
 J| ?^ .| 
 
 
 ,'. ?f>ij. J' 
 
 ■' 
 
 -.*; ^ a^ 
 
 
 :■'* . ■■ 
 
 ' ■ 
 
 If ^ 
 
 ' 
 
 u ■■ 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 says Mooro, "that though scarce heard of till within a 
 short period by the Romans, and almost as strange to the 
 Greeks, this sequestered island was yet in possession of 
 channels of intercourse distinct from either ; and that whilst 
 the Britons, shut out from the continent by their Roman 
 masters, saw themselves deprived of all that profitable 
 intercourse which they had long maintained with the 
 Veneti and other people of Gaul, Ireland still continued 
 to cultivate her old relations with Spain, and saw her barks 
 venturing on their accustomed course, between the Celtic 
 Cape, and the Sacred Promontory,* as they had done for 
 centuries bt fore." 
 
 That Ireland must have been included amongst the Cassite- 
 rides which are known to have been viflted by the Phoeni- 
 cians, before the Gallic invasion of Britain, seems to be 
 admitted by all unprejudiced writers upon this subject,f and 
 
 * Cape St. Vincent and Carnsore Point. The distance from Corunna to 
 Cape Clear direct, is about GOO miles, but the greater part of the voyape 
 might be performed within sight of land, by taking a circuitous course. 
 
 t " We may therefore admit, without much chance oi' error, that the 
 Cassiterides visited by the Phoenicians, were the British islands, though 
 the Romans understood by the name the islands of Seilly, with perhaps, 
 part of the coast of Cornwall." Sharon Turner, Hist. Anglo-Saxons, 
 vol. i. p. 55. Pliny says : " Plumbum ex Cassiteride insula primus appor- 
 tavit Midacritus." [Hist. Nat. vii. p. 67.] and lead, it is well known, can 
 be reckoned amongst the mineral productions of Ireland : hence Donatiis, 
 writing in the fifth century, thus enumerates the characteristics of the 
 country : — 
 
 Finibus occiduis, describitur optima tellus 
 
 Nomine et antiquis, Scotia scripta libris. 
 
 Insula dives opum Gemmarmn, vestis, et Auri : 
 
 Commoda corporibus Acre, Solip, Solo. 
 
 Melle fluit pulchris, et lacteis Scotia campis 
 
 Vostibus, atque armis, frugibus, arte, viris. 
 
 Ursorum rabies nulla est ibi ; sseva leonunt 
 
 Semina, nee unquam Scotica terra tulit. 
 
 Nulla venena nocent, nee serpens serplt 'n herbft, 
 
 Nee conquesta canit, garrula rana lacu ; 
 
 In qua Scotorum gentes, habitare merentar : 
 
 Inclyta gens hominum, Militc, Pace, Fide ! 
 
MINOR NAURATIVKS. 
 
 'Z'23 
 
 that the mystery, in which these wily traders sought to con- 
 ceal their commercial monopoly, has led to the obscurity in 
 which the records of their voyages is involved. That the 
 nautical knowledge and equipments of the Celtic popu- 
 lation of Spain and Ireland must have received considerable 
 advancement from this connection, is a natural consequence. 
 Inhabiting the maritime regions of the Spanish peninsula, 
 they were necessarily brought into immediate contact with 
 the Carthaginian merchants, who had formed settlements 
 on the same coast, and from whom they probably obtained 
 not only their knowledge of navigation, but of those religious 
 rites and ceremonies which were afterwards developed in 
 the form of Druidism. 
 
 That the latter was not of British origin seems obvious. 
 Caesar's description of its observances is only reconcileable 
 with his account of Britain, on the assumi)tion that the 
 chief seat of the Druids was in Ireland, for while he de- 
 scribes the Gauls as deriving their knowledge of Druidism 
 from the British,* he represents the latter as inferior in 
 civilization to the Gauls. Even in the time of Tacitus 
 
 Wliicli is tliiis spiritedly translatcrt by O'llalloian :— 
 Far westward lies an isle of antiont fame, 
 l?y nature blessed, and Scotia is lier name, 
 Enroll'd in books : exliaustless is her store, 
 Of veiny silver, and of golden ore. 
 Her fruitful soil for ever teems with wealth, 
 With gems her waters, and her air with healtli ; 
 Iler verdant fields with milk and honey flow, 
 Her woolly fleeces vie with virgin snow. 
 Her waving furrows float with bearded corn ; 
 And arms and arts her envied sons adorn ! 
 No savage bear, with lawless fury roves, 
 Nor fiercer lion through her peaceful groves ; 
 No poison there infects, no scaly snake 
 Creeps through the grass, nor frog annoys the lake ; 
 An island worthy of its pious race. 
 In war triumphant, and unmutch'd in peace ! 
 
 * Comment. B. vi.c. xii. 
 
^ir 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 224 
 
 MINOR NAnRATIVRS. 
 
 the Britons are represented as ferocifP,* a state of bar- 
 barism obviously incompatible with the creation of a high 
 wrought mysterious superstition, implying considerable in- 
 tellectual advancement and scientific knowledge : a super- 
 stition, be it remembered, which is known to have existed 
 amongst the Phoenicians and Carthaginians. 
 
 The Roman knowledge of the British isles was extremely 
 limited and imperfect ; before the time of Tacitus they 
 were ignorant of the insular position of Britain, f and the 
 acquaintance of Agricola with Ireland was principally 
 derived from the doubtful information of a faithless Irish 
 chief, who sought the Roman camp to betray his country.^ 
 Ireland also, according to Ptolemy, was formerly called 
 Little Britain, therefore when Caesar speaks of the Gauls 
 repairing to Britain in order to become instructed in the 
 mysteries of Druidism,§ the term may have been intended 
 as a general expression for the British isles. || 
 
 1 
 
 ii; 
 
 ■ r. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i" f 
 
 
 * " Plus tamcn feroclte Britanni jjroDfcrunt." Vit. Agric. c. II. 
 
 i " Ilanc Oram novissimi miiris tunc primuiu Roniana clusaiscircumvcctn, 
 insulam esse Britanniam adfirn.avit." Vit. Agric. c. 10. 
 
 t '* Agricola expulsum seditione domestica unum ox rcgulis gentis ox- 
 cppcrat, lie specie amicitioa in occasioncin retinebat. Ssape ex eo audivi,'' 
 &c. ib. c. 24. 
 
 ^ Comment. B. vi. c. xii. 
 
 II It should be recollected also that Ctesur merely mentions the origin of 
 th.? Druids as traditionary ; *' Disciplinam existimatur reperta esse in 
 Britannia," &«. Ibid. Sharon Turner would appear to lean to the opinion 
 of Druidism having originated with the Phoenicians or Carthaginians: 
 " If this system," he observes, " was the creature of a more civilized 
 people, none of the colonizers of Britain are so likely to have been its 
 parents as the Phoenicians or Carthaginians; the fact so explicitly asserted 
 by Ca'sar, that the Druidical system began in Britain, and was thence 
 introduced into Gaul, increases our tendency to refer it to those nations. 
 The state of Britain was inferior in civilization to that of Gnul, and there- 
 fore it seems more reasonable to refer the intellectual parts of Druidism to 
 the foreign visitors who are knoton to have cultivated such subjects, than 
 to su, pose them to have originated from the rude unassisted natives," 
 Hist. Anglo-Saxons, v. i. p. 7G. 
 
 I 
 
 \ 
 
MINOU NARHATIVI S. 
 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 i 
 
 'llie Druids C'wsar tells us, are concerned in divine mat- 
 tors, superintend public and private sacrifices, interpret 
 religious rites, determine controversies, inheritance, boun- 
 daries of land, rewards and punishments ... " They are 
 said to learn by heart a great number of verses, for which 
 reason some continue in the discipline twenty years." — 
 " Thei/ use written characters." — " Much besides they dis- 
 course, and deliver to youth, upon the stars, and their 
 motion, on the magnitude of the world and the earth, on 
 the nature of things, on the influence and power of the 
 immortal Gods."* 
 
 This particular class, combining the double office of 
 judge and priest, although common in the time of Coesar 
 to the British isles, would naturally be found most enlight- 
 ened in that part of the three kingdoms, whose direct com- 
 munication with Spain, from a remote period, brought it 
 into more immediate contact with the Phoenician navi- 
 gators ; and the appellations of " Sacred Isle," and " Sa- 
 cred Promontory," in the works of Ptolemyf and Avienus,:^ 
 lead us involuntarily to the conclusion, that, hundreds of 
 years before the Roman invasion of Britain, Ireland was 
 the depository of those Phoenician superstitions, which after- 
 wards became adopted throughout the British Isles under 
 the form of Druidisra. 
 
 * Comment. B. vi. c. xiii. 
 
 T Hieron vel Sacrum Piomoii. (Carnsore Point) See Ptol. Geog. 
 i Ast hinc iluobus in sacrum, sic hisulain 
 Dixere prisci, solibus cureus rati est -. 
 II BBC inter unilas roultum cespiteni jacit, 
 Eamque Iat6 gens Hibernoriim colit. 
 
 Orce MaritiintE. 
 This alludes to a period so far back as the moat flourishing epoch of 
 Carthage, when Himilno, following the crfiirse of the Phoenician voyagers 
 along the coast of Spain, extended his explorations to the Scilly isles, and is 
 placed by some writers at 1000 years before the Christian era. " Of all 
 these known and acknowledged features of the antient Celtic worship, of 
 that superstition which spread wherever the first races of men dispersed 
 
'2'2i^ 
 
 MfNOU NAUUATIVES. 
 
 
 't ■ 
 
 
 ■'■.. ;■ J 
 
 I '^1 
 
 The root of the word Druid is to be found with litth; 
 variation in the Hiborno-Celtic huiguage of the present 
 <Uiy, Druoj signifying a Druid, magician or wise man, and 
 Oy//ow/wr//<orDraoide-achta, magic or the Druidical form 
 of worshi}) ;* the golden ornaments in the shape of a half 
 moon, which have been frequently found in the Irish bogs, 
 are supposed to have been connected with these supersti- 
 tions, of which lunar worshij) formed a part,f and add to 
 the numerous testimonies in proof of its great antiquity. 
 
 themsclvos, there roinaiii, to tliis day, undoubted traces and testinionio'*, 
 not only in the ti'iiditions and records of Ireland, but iu those spcakinj;- 
 monuments of antiquity which aie still scattered over her hills and 
 pliiins " Moore, I. p. 10. I cannot, however, concur in the opinion of those 
 antiquaries who coufiider that any induction relative to the Druidical 
 form of worship, can be drawn from the so called Leachts, Cromleachs, or 
 Pillar Stones, which are to be met with in so many parts of Ireland. 
 Similar monuments have been found in Scandinavia and Germany, wiicro it 
 is not pretended that Druidisrn obtained, and I have had ojjportunities of 
 personally examining several rude stone structures both in Sweden and 
 Norway, which bear a marked resemblance; to those found in Ireland and 
 jmrts of Uritain. Tlie Opfer Stein of Germany and Ofi'er Sten of Scan- 
 diiuivia is the Cromlech of ilie British isles, and the litiufa Stcn the upright 
 or pillar stone, the former answering tlie double purpose of altar and 
 grave, and the latter being commemorative or monumentfil. Such remains 
 aie to be found in all piirts of Europe and Asia, and are probably coeval 
 with the first races of m^-ukind. Tin- first act of Noah after leaving the 
 ark, was " to build an nUar and offer burnt offerings to the Lord." (Gen 
 viii, 20.), and Jacob sets up a pitln->\ and a heap of stones in testimony of 
 the covenant between him and Laban. Gen. xxxi. 44, seq. 
 
 * See O'Brien in voce JJrdoj. i'he original Irish word for Bruid, according 
 to Toland, is Drni, having the nominative plural Dniidhe, which became 
 afterwards corrupted into Draoithe. Sec Toland's Hist, of Druidisrn, p. 65, 
 The following comparison of Scripture passages will shew the application of 
 the term iu Hiberno-Celtic : — " Anois Draoithe na Hegiptc, dor innedur- 
 sanfosaran modhgceaduale wirt>i(//'o<(;/it'«c/(^<t///t." Kxod. vii. 11. [See two 
 first books of Pentateuch from original Irisli MSS. by T. Connellan, Lond. 
 1820.]— " And the Wirt[7i«Vws of Egypt, they also did in like manner willi 
 their enchantments." — English version. " Feuch Tangadar Draoithe o naird 
 shoir go Hierusalera." Matt ii. 1. — [Irish Bible by William Bhedel, Lab. 
 1827.]— " Behold there came wise inen from the East to JeruBalem," — 
 English version. t Moore, p. 22. 
 
 I 
 
 ,■> I- 
 
 
MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 007 
 
 But the high state of perfection, if it may be so called, 
 in which the Druidical form of worship existed in Ireland, 
 and tlie superior acquirements of her Pagan priesthood to 
 those of the l?ritish, is best evinced by the vestiges of the 
 Ogham or occult character in which their mysteries were 
 recorded, and which presents a mai'ked resemblance to the 
 secret mode of writing, known to have been used for similar 
 purposes by the hierarchies of the East.* 
 
 The following is the Ogham alphabet, as given by Sir 
 James Ware in the second volume of his Antiquities of 
 Ireland: — f 
 
 K 
 
 M^^'^^imfiiiim ^ 
 
 nriiiiiiniiii 
 
 cu o. u. 
 
 en. oi 
 
 ao 
 
 lll-||l1 III MIIII)CQ-ci. r - ^ 
 
 * Moore, p. 53. — "The word Ogmbis," says Tolland, "is pure Celtic." 
 .... the word O/jum, Ogam, or Oymn, is one of the most authentic wonU 
 
 of the Irish languaire From signifying the 8pc?v?/ qfj/'ri^j/;^, it came 
 
 to signify secret writing. . . . There are several MS. treatises extant, d,^- 
 scribing and teacliing the various methods." [Hist, of Druids, pp. 83, 84.] 
 Sir James Ware says — " I have, in my custody, an antientparclimeiu Ixink 
 filled with such characters." [Vol. II. p. H).] It is doubtless to this secret 
 writing that Tacitus refers, when he says of the Germans : " l-iteraruni 
 secreta viripariter ac fcmiiia; ignorant," [De. Mor. Ger. c. 10.] thus agree- 
 ing with Caesar's statement that they had neither Druids nor sacrifices : — 
 " Nam aequo Druidcs habent qui rebus divinis pruesint, noque sacrifieiis 
 student.''~De Bell. Gall. Lib. VI. c. x.\i. 
 
 t Several inscriptions upon stone, written in this occult character,— than 
 which nothing more simple and primitive can be well imagined, — have been 
 discovered in the Province of Munster, by the Rev. Matthew Horgan, 
 R. C. Rector of Blarney, in the County of Cork, assisted by the r.ealou« 
 Irish antiquaries Abraham Abell and John Windele of that city. Great 
 incredulity was for some time expressed on the subject of the Oghini in- 
 
 Q 2 
 
228 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 m 
 
 A 
 
 "I, 
 
 n 1.1 
 
 It may therefore be presumed without much stretch of 
 credulity that the same communication with the Pha>nician 
 settlers on the coast of Spain which transmitted these 
 eastern superstitions to the Irish shore, may have also 
 brought with it some knowledge of navigation, and the 
 construction of ships ; and therefore, that we are not driven 
 to the hide-covered Currach for a means of transporting 
 the Celtic settlers to the American coast. 
 
 Or if the theory of those be adopted, who would bring 
 the first colonists of Ireland from Htlgic, or Celtic Gaul, 
 the description of that people by Caesar will furnish equal 
 evidence of maritime knowledge at a period sufficiently 
 early to transport an expedition to America in the first 
 centuries of the Christian era. The Veneti, inhabiting 
 that district of Armoric Gaul, now known by the name 
 of Vannes, are stated to have had vessels of considerable 
 bulk and {)ower, and admirably adapted as well for coasting 
 voyages, as a stormy sea. The hull was of oak, the beams 
 a foot in breadth, and fastened with iron, the bottom flat, 
 the sails of leather, and what to nautical men may, perhaps, 
 appear somewhat wonderful in those early days, the an- 
 chors were secured by means of chain cables.* 
 
 scriptiniis, many persons maintuinini; that they were natural furrows in the 
 stone, however the question inis heen coniplettly set at rest by the testi- 
 mony of two unquestionahle witnesses, Dr. Brown and the Rev. Mr. Younaf, 
 in tlie 8th Vol. of the Transactions of the Royal Irish Academy. See 
 Moore's Hist. Ireland, Vol. 1. p. .51), note, where Dr. Brown, at first a sceptic 
 on the sulyect, is shewn to liave acknowledged his error. 
 
 • " Numque Ipsorum naves ad huiic inodum factSB, arrnatceque erant : 
 Ciirinoe alicpianto pluniores qinim nostrarum navium, quo facilius vada, ac 
 det'cssum a;stus exoipere possent : prorte udinodum ercctaj, atqun item 
 puppes ad niaunituiliiiein Huetnuni, teuipi'stiitumqiie acconimodativ : naves 
 totiB factaj ex rohore, iid quamvis vim et contumeliam perfercndam : 
 transtra ppdiilihiis in hititudinern trabibns coiidxa elavis ferreis digiti 
 poUicis crassitudine : anc/iora:, pro i\miU\ia ferreis catenis revincto) : pellcs 
 pro velis, alutaeque tenuitur confeetui, sive propler lini inopiain, atque ejus 
 usus inscientiam, sive, eo quod est inuiris verisiniile, qund tantas tempe.statcs 
 oceani, tantosque impetus ventoram suslintri, «c tanta onera navium regi 
 
MINOR NAPtRATIVES. 
 
 2^9 
 
 Looking therefore, either to the Phccniciaii, Carthagineian, 
 Iberian, Belgic, Gallic, or Scythic intercourse of an early 
 period, — to the more continuous Scandinavian occupation of 
 later years,— or to the primitive mode of transport of the 
 simple skifF, it is evident that ample nautical means were 
 not wanting in Ireland to transfer any part of her pv)pulation 
 i "(Vi^i' to the <¥ «ii tur n shores of America long before the period 
 when (iiJEAT Ireland became known to the INorthmen. 
 
 The absence of any notice of such a migration in Irish 
 Ainials,— if such be the case, — is no argument against the 
 probability of its existence. The most brilliant period of 
 Irish History remains unsupported by Irish manuscripts. 
 Of that enlightened age when pupils from all parts of Eu- 
 rope sought learning from Irish seminaries and Irish eccle- 
 siastics, when Columbkill dispensed the light of Christianity 
 to the Picts, Columbanus to the French, Gallus to the 
 Swiss, and the brothers Ultan and Foilan to the Belgians, 
 — when Virgilius, the Apostle of Carinthia, astounded the 
 German bishops with his superior knowledge of cosmo- 
 graphy and science* — not one authentic tcritten record 
 now remains.! 
 
 Invasion from without, and internal dissension from 
 within, have swept away all written testimonies of a time, 
 when the intellectual and religious eminence of Ireland 
 
 vplis, non satia commode arbitrubuiitiir."— CiBsar fie Bell. Gull. Lib. III. 
 c. xiii. The Irish technical expression of, " an cnbia do clicanjj(al dfalne 
 an ancoire," — " to bend the cable to the anchor's ring," — is also presump- 
 tive evidence of a respectable description of craft. 
 
 * Virgilius or Fenrgal {Fear, vir) was accused of heresy before Pope Boni- 
 face, in the 8th century, for maintaining the spheiicity of the earth, and the 
 existence of Antijiodes, contrary to the opinion of the times, wliich gave 
 the globe a plane surface, and united the heavens to the earth beyond 
 India. See AVore's Writers of Ireland, B. T. p 50. 
 
 t This point is ably handled by Mr. Moore, who shews that the argu- 
 ments against antient Irish history, founded upon the non-oxistenee of any 
 authentic M8S, prior to the JJth century (Psalter of Cashd,) a, plies with 
 mucli greater force to the comparatively modern jicriods alicve mentio'.ied, 
 the records of which are never questioned. lli»t. Ir. Vol I. p. 308. 
 
<«., 
 
 '230 
 
 MINOR NAIUIATIVES. 
 
 ■i ■ 
 
 III 
 
 tittrjtcted the attention and adinirution of neighbouring 
 nations, and obtained for her the just distinctions of '* Sacred 
 Island" and " School of the West" : it cannot therefore, be a 
 matter of surprise that the records of earlier history should 
 have been lost amid the ravages of such general devastation.* 
 IJut further examination of Icelandic Annals may pos- 
 sibly throw more light upon this interesting question, and 
 tend to unravel the mystery in which the original in- 
 habitants of America are involved. Lord Kingsborough's 
 splendid publicationf in 1829 first brought to the notice of 
 the British public the striking similitude between Mexican 
 and Egyptian monuments; the ruins of Palcnque, Guate- 
 mala and Yucatan, the former rivalling the pyramids of 
 Egypt or the ruins of Palmyra,| were only known to a few 
 
 * O'Halloran charges the English Government with a wholesale destruc- 
 tion of Irish MSS. previous to the reign of James I. : — 
 
 " VViiat the false piety and mistaken zeal of the early Christians left un- 
 tinished, the Danes continued, and the Saxon and Norman mvaders com- 
 pleted ... In Ireland, until the accession of James I, it was a part of state 
 policy to destroy or carry off all the manuscripts that could be discovereil. 
 " What the president Carew," says the author of the Anulect (p. 555) " did 
 in one province (Munster), Henry Sidney and his predecessors did all over 
 the kingdom, being charged to collect all the manuscripts they could, that 
 tliey might effectually destroy every vestige of antiquity and letters 
 throughout the kingdom ! The learned Archdeacon Lynch, with many 
 others, give too many melancholy instances of the kind." Hist. Ireland, 
 V. I, p. 94. " Many of these precious remains," says Moore, " were, as the 
 author of Cambrensis Eversus tells us, actually torn up by boys for covers of 
 books, and by tailors for measures. It was till the time of James I., says 
 Mr. Webb, an object of government to discover and destroy every literary 
 remain of the Irish, in order the more fully to eradicate from their minda 
 every trace of their antient independence." Moore's Hist, of Ireland, V. I. 
 p. 309, note. 
 
 t " Mexican Antiquities," a work upon which this lamented nobleman 
 expended (atleast) £00,000. and the best years of his life, but the circulation 
 ofwliich, from the snic.'i I number of copies printed, and the inaccessible price 
 (£150.) to the uiiijoriiy of the reading' public, was iipoossarily very limited. 
 
 { The following sli)rt sketch of these remains, abridged I'rom tlie costly 
 voliuue of M. Uaradere de St. Priest, appearetl in the N. American Keview 
 for last October, and may, perhap.-*, be acceptable to the antiquarian 
 reader : — 
 
MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 231 
 
 
 hunters until the end of the 18th century, and modern 
 travellers are still engaged in bringing the hidden wonders 
 of this and other regions of the vast American continent 
 to the knowledge of the literary world.* 
 
 " Upon an eminence, towards the middle of the site of the city, riMOs a 
 mass of buildings of a jiyromidal form, with a base presenting a pnrallolo- 
 giiiiii, consisting of three different structures, receding in succession, and 
 rising upon each other. This base has a circuit of 1080 feet and an eleva- 
 tion ofOO feet It is built of stone, laid in a mortar of lime and sand. In 
 flic middle of the front, which faces the east, there is a large stone s.'air- 
 i-ase, which conducts to the principal entrance of the temple. This edihc^- 
 ;s -240 feet long by 140 feet wide, and 3(3 feet high, which, added to the 
 lieight of tlie base, gives a total elevation of 96 feet. The walls are 4 feet 
 thick, and constructed of stones of large dimensions. The doorways are 
 uneqinil in their size j nothing indicates that they were ever closed, and the 
 siime observation applies to all the other buildings. The windows are of 
 various forms, and generally very small. The arches are 20 feet high, and 
 form a iruncated angle at the top, terminated by large stones, placed trans- 
 versely. The roofs are of flag stones, well joined and very thick. The 
 whole edifiiuc is covered, externally and internally, with a stucco containing 
 oxyde of iron ; it is crowned by a large frieze, set in two double cornices, 
 of a s(|Uiire form. Between the doors, and upon all the pillars, forming a 
 corridor around the edifice, are encrusted 80 bas reliefs in stucco, repre- 
 sentintr personages 7 feet high ; and hieroglyphics, whose careful execution 
 aimounces that tlie plastic art had made great progress among the btuldcrs 
 of these works. Their exterior view offers a magnificence to which the 
 interior corresponds ; immense halls, ornamented with bas reliefs in granite, 
 in which the figures are 12 feet high, sculptured hieroglyphics, courts, sub- 
 terraneous passages, ornamentcl also with sculpture, a round tower, with 
 four stages, whose staircase is supported by a vault, — such is a sketch of 
 the principal characteristics, wlii^h this temple offers. . . Other structures of 
 the same character are found upon the same plateau : the whole number of 
 ruins hitlierto discovered, is eighteen .... The fiat roofs of the palace were 
 overgrown with enormous trees ; Mr. Wddeck cut down one which measured 
 I) feet 3 inclies in diameter. By counting tlie concenUic layers, which 
 botanists suppose murk the annual growth of trees, he found they were 
 1009, and hence deduces the length of the period that has elapsed since 
 the edifice was abandoned to the domain of the forest." 
 
 * Dr. Lund has lately communicated to the Society of Northern Anti- 
 quaries, the remarkable discovery made by hirn in the interior of Brazil, of 
 human bones in connection with th/se of extinct races of animals. Both 
 were in a complete fossil state; the formation of the human skull is stated to 
 be extraordinary, the forehead forming a considerable angle with the face. 
 
w^ 
 
 232 
 
 MINOR NARRATIVES. 
 
 n*!-; 
 
 
 The argument founded upon the absence of Irish records 
 might as reasonably be applied to these later publications of 
 the north ; and why, may it as well be asked, was the discovery 
 of America by the Northmen in the 10th century, not satis- 
 factorily established until the nineteenth ? - The name of 
 V'inland was, doubtless, known to Torfaeus; and Worm- 
 skiold, Malte Brun and others, following the erroneous 
 calculation which he had made of its locality, f?xed it in 
 a latitude with which the physical features of the country 
 did not correspond :* hence the whole statement in the 
 Sagas was long looked upon as fictitious ; but the more 
 accurate recent investigations of Danish archaeologists have 
 set the question at rest, and the discovery of America 
 BY THE Northmen has assumed its proper position in the 
 history of the tenth century. 
 
 The existence of a Celtic or Irish settlement upon the 
 southeastern shores of North America, does not preclude 
 the co-existence of other races upon the western and 
 northern shores. A colony from western Ireland may have 
 been planted on the east, while tribes from eastern Asia 
 had settled on the west ; and both have driven before them 
 the less civilized, or more feeble Scythic wanderers, who 
 may have entered at the north : all emanating, — but by 
 distinct and separate channels, — from the one great centre, 
 which peopled the >vide spread sphere, and thus multiplying, 
 in every region and every clime, the living evidences of 
 those sacred records which offer peace and immortality to 
 man. 
 
 1 
 
 ■4 ^ 
 
 !8i 
 
 Mi^ 
 
 and thus differing from tho skulls of all known races of men, but at the same 
 time presenting a siniil>iiide to the human figures on Mexican monuments : 
 a hemispherical stont', with a smooth surface, which had apparently been 
 usod for rubbing, was found in connection with these bones. Berlingske 
 Tidetidu, Kiobetihavn, Feb. 1-2, 1841. 
 
 * TorfiiMis, in coiiscvjiu'iicc "fan crronedus intoi-pretation of the |)assage, 
 |ip ()4, (ir>, ill tlie Sagii ol' Erik tlie Red, relating to the length of the day, 
 whii:ii lie tot k to be eight hours instead of nine, fixed the latitude of Vin- 
 iuud at 41)", being that of Newfoundland. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 ft 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 : ')' I' 
 
 
 IS ■■■;* 
 
 
 wp. 
 
 O <3> 
 
 
 COMPLETE DIAL 
 
 09 
 
 THE ANCIENT NORTHMEN, 
 
 ACCOKDINQ TO THE 
 
 PROJECTION AND EXPOSITION 
 
 OF 
 
 :.A\ 
 
 1 
 
 ':\ 
 
 ■44 
 
 \ '^■ 
 
 "■ ;. ' 
 
 i ' 
 
 I, 
 
 ir 
 
 PROFESSOR FINN MAGNUSEN, 
 
 VlCli PKliSlDENT OK THE IKtYAL SOCIKTY OF NORTHERN ANTK^U AU I ES. 
 
'A 
 "P. 
 
 K 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 W 
 
 M 
 
 K 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 <1 
 
 W 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 cu 
 
 en 
 & 
 
 O 
 
 
 fc5 
 & 
 en 
 
 33 
 O 
 
 ;?; 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 V5 
 
 CO 
 
 in 
 O 
 
 S 
 
 
 .in HM HM -W -IM -« -l« "*•_ 
 
 
 = Q 
 
 a 
 
 b 
 O 
 
 « 
 
 to 
 
 CD 
 
 H 
 H 
 
 Pi 
 
 o 
 is 
 
 a 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 
 R 
 
 ->! 
 
 N 
 U 
 
 S 
 
 ^ « 
 
 o to 
 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 to 
 
 'A 
 < 
 
 c " 
 
 tp^a 
 
 •I 
 
 O bt' 
 
 •S. 
 
 S 
 
 3 ~ 
 
 Q - V 
 
 8 . aj 
 
 eg cu eg M y OIj -i r2 *■ ■' . -i^ p: ni 
 
 D^ ■*-■ f -S" 
 
 M :o 
 
 
 a 
 
 ifl 
 
 be*. 
 
 
 « t *2 ^ ow^ fc« _:5 ** TT ^ -_ — 
 
 ca 5 tf -s 
 
 >3 M w 
 
 
 
 a Q '^ w >. 
 
 II I 
 
 o 
 
 iii||| 
 
 C . lO 
 
 o , 1. , a 
 
 a 1= -a 
 
 to '^ ' § 
 
 u c . tt^ "a 
 a a ,: bf =S "^ o u 
 
 _ , ^ = a 
 
 :^aa«aK a * ."-' 
 
 apt) 
 
 <1 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 3 O 
 
 -a « 
 
 3 .moo 
 
 5 ^ ^ . a 
 
 ^ o -a 
 
 a o 
 
 t3tot>>£to» 
 3 ^ 
 
 S s' 
 
 ^ • 
 
 o a 
 
 w w • w 
 
 H 
 
 Ed 
 H 
 
 O 
 
 n 
 
 Hi 
 
 & 
 H 
 
 ■< 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 W W^«5 oj^lj ^^5^ 1^;^ 
 
 «(N«i'<l<0«Cr'«050>--is»«T|tiOO 
 
 "^ I"" b. L> 
 
 •-I i-H r^ "^ 
 
^236 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 n 
 
 I M 
 
 m 
 
 EXPLANATION OF THE TEUMS. 
 
 1*1' 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 I f •■,■7 
 
 
 H' 
 
 \ . Halga signifies halvgaaen, half gone, and is used hero with 
 reference to the position of tlie sun : but is otherwise employed 
 with reference to the time and hour. 
 
 2. See 18 Here the morning is understood to commence. 
 
 3. Midmorning, also called rism&l, or rising time, now ob- 
 solete. 
 
 4. Still used by the peasantry of Iceland to signify the par- 
 ticular time of the day, See Olafsen, I. p. 40 ; Troil, p. 90 ; 
 Henderson, I. 187.* 
 
 5. Forenoon meal time. 
 
 6. In most parts of Iceland the peasantry still place this day- 
 mark in the same position. See Olafsen, Troil, and Henderson, 
 as above. 
 
 7. Highest day. This very anticnt term is still used by the 
 peasantry of the West of Iceland instead of hudegi, which is 
 now, incorrectly, considered to refer to 12 o'clock. Sec Biiirn 
 Haldorson s Atli, p. 47. 
 
 8. Now called midmunda. Undarn occurs in old northern 
 MSS. both to signify afternoon, as also a meal or convivial party 
 held at that time : See Rafn's Krakumal or Lodbrokarkvida, 
 pp. 2, 29, 96-97. The Moeso-Gothic word undaurn is used in a 
 similar sense, as also the Alemannic (old High German) untorn, 
 and Anglo-Saxon undern : also in the old English of Chaucer, 
 although the word was occasionally used in Anglo-Saxon for a 
 particular part of the forenoon. See infra 9, and 24 . 
 
 !|| 
 
 iff 
 Iff 
 
 • " About 8 o'clock," he never mentions half hours. Confer nntc, p. C4, 
 65, and note. Stadr sigiiiiies bounds or limits, hence " dugmalastud,'' the 
 beginning of dugmal, and " eyktarstad " the e»d of ej kt. S^ee il>i(l. and 
 Dial. 
 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 237 
 
 ob- 
 
 9. This stuutl formed the latter half of the Eikt undarn, (Non 
 I'llr Eykt)or 3 o'clock p. M,, and it is remarkable that the Anglo- 
 Saxons called this time heah undern (See 8). On the other hand, 
 the Roman Catholic clergy in England, called it non, from the 
 Mass Nona of the horee canouicee, which took place at the same 
 time of the day, whence the old Saxon non, old high German 
 niion, and Scandinavian non. See 25. 
 
 10 This word signifies the Rykt's place, termination, or close. 
 See ante pp. C)A, 65 and note. It was also called aptan or 
 aptansmdl, as the evening was here considered to commence. 
 See infra 20, 27. 
 
 11. The middle of the evening, now called in Iceland midaptan. 
 See infra 27. 
 
 12. Still similarly placed in most parts of Iceland. See Olafsen, 
 Troil, and Henderson, as above. 
 
 13. Evening meal time. 
 
 14. Bed time. 
 
 15. Midnight, 
 
 l(>. This word corresponds to the Mceso Gothic uthvo, the 
 Alemannic uohta, ouht^ ocht, uht, uchtenstond, the Belgic and 
 Frisiac ^icht, and the Anglo-Saxon uht, uhtentid. See Rafn'a 
 Kriikumal or Lodbrokarkvida, pp. 12, 124, and infra 32, 33. 
 
 17. The middle of the otta, called also kana-otta, or the cock 
 otta, or kana-yalan, cock crowing. See infra 33. 
 
 18. Sunrise-time, still called aahitsmaal, ox summer refresh- 
 ment time, in Iceland and the Farce islands. 
 
 19. Midmorning, called in modern Danish, midmorgen. Swed. 
 midmoryon. 
 
 20. The fore-breakfast, corresponding to the Frisian vordard. 
 This stund is still called in particular districts of Norway /ro- 
 kostbeel, (see infra 21.) corresponding expressions to the antient 
 dagmal are also found in the dialects of the peasantry of Den- 
 mark and Sweden in the present day. 
 
 2 1 . Called also dayuur. The antient dagurdr, dagverdr has 
 undergone great alterations in the later dialects, particularly in 
 Norway ; otherwise in Swedish it is still dagvard, in Danish 
 
ir:H^ 
 
 f 
 
 '2SS 
 
 Al'lT.NDlX. 
 
 "■nlv 
 
 m 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ifarre, i/ni'er, dnri'r, doner, nn<l in Frisiiic ihituji'i'il, ddiinnl, 
 (Innet'd, ilard, &c. Soc siipm ."). 
 
 22. To this there are several oorrespoiidiiifj; terms in old Nor- 
 thern langungea, see Huprn 6, 7, Jviul int'ni 2.'i. In rertnin dis- 
 t ricts of Norway, this portion of time was also called hulfynrtPt 
 HI midduff, or half gone to noon. 
 
 2.'}. Otherwise hoiaaug, corresponding to tin- old Northern 
 term. See 22. 
 
 24. Called also ondol, ondohnxtal. Traces of the antient int- 
 durn (ondarn) particularly as applied to noon or afternoon-meal- 
 time, midday sleep, &c are to he found in the peasant dialects 
 of Sweden, Denmark, Germany, the Netherlands, and Great 
 Uritain. 
 
 25. See supra 9. This corresponds with the liritish shep- 
 herd's hiyh noon as applied to '^ o'clock i'. m. See Brand's 
 I'op. Antiq. by Sir II. Ellis, I. p. 4r»7-4GO. The Bavarian non, 
 and Westphalian nonet &<-'• »•"? still in nse ; on the other hand, 
 the English noon, and the Dutch noeu now signify 12 o'clock. 
 We have otherwise good grounds for believing that down to the 
 year 1700, the peasantry of Denmark called this stund ogt. See 
 infra 20. It would appear that several expressions amongst the 
 Germans having reference to holy evcS; and which are still in 
 nse amongst the peasantry, are related to the term eyht or niht 
 of the Scandinavians, such as aeckt in Suabia, uckt in Dit- 
 niarsh, &c. 
 
 20. Also ogterdags beel, ogteheel. These and several other 
 words, vhich are of great importance in fixing the time of the 
 day by which the latitude of Vinland has been determined ( See 
 ante pp. 04, 05, note), are to be found collected from the dialects 
 of the Danish and Norwegian peasantry in the large Danish 
 Dictionary, 4 Vol. sec. 3, p. 17, let. 0. 
 
 27. The Anglo-Saxons called this time of the day ofer-non, as 
 the Norwegians, for similar etymological reasons, call it etterokt. 
 To these are several corresponding terms in Denmark and 
 Sweden. 
 
 28. Amoij2;st the Scandinavians the later part of the evening 
 
Arri'Nuix. 
 
 ^2.'3«) 
 
 was considered to conuncjicc hero, niid was callt'd AreA/, kvohl, 
 A S, rnjhl: tliis term is «till used in tlii' modem diaUets. 
 
 2). See supra 13. 
 
 ;{0. Denotes the taking off, expiration, or end of the day. 
 
 ;n. Literally the liighcst night. In some British authors wc 
 find the expression *' noon ol' the night." 
 
 .")2. IStill nsed in the modern Danish and Swedish dialects. 
 
 33. Sec supra 17. 
 
 N.n.— An obliging communication from Professor Rafn, when 
 this sheet was in the press, has led to a slight Jihange in the 
 projection of the Dial, as given by Professor Finn Magnuscn, 
 and whicli, although involving no point of importance, has been 
 adojjted for the sake of simplifying the illustration. Confer. 
 Finn IVIagnusen '* on the Antient Scandinavians' division of the 
 times of the Day." Mem. de la Soc. des Antiq. du Nord. 
 Copenh. 1S3S. 
 
n^ 
 
 ■■■' / ';v 
 
 ifl '; ■ 
 
 :•?:*.;;■■ " 
 
 I. ,.'.'■ ■ 
 
 ■■■%':? : 
 
 
 ii.r 
 
 GENEALOGICAL TABLES. 
 
 ii •■ ■ ■ 
 
 f ■■ ^ ' 
 
 ! 
 
 
 1 « 
 
 
 1 '' 
 
 'Sr J- 
 
 1 
 
 li ■"^. 1 i 
 
 » 1 
 
 -if' J 
 
 
 ^ , 
 
 I) 
 
a 
 e 
 
 < 
 
 « 
 c 
 
 H 
 I 
 
 a 
 
 -5 — 2-|-^ 
 
 
 to 
 
 I « 
 
 
 1 
 
 , , 
 
 "' 
 
 tL^ 
 
 
 
 
 ■■^■^ 
 
 
 
 
 I- a 
 
 
 
 
 ^ "^ 
 
 
 H =t; 
 
 
 1 rt 
 
 
 
 1 Sf' 
 
 
 tu.s 
 
 
 I- t. 
 
 
 :0^ 
 
 
 ?:5 
 
 
 c E 
 
 
 J= s 
 
 
 H C 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 . — ", 
 
 I. - 
 
 - 2 
 
 '/J 
 
 '5 
 > 
 
 PC 
 
 PS 
 
 Q 
 
 O 
 I 
 
 Si 
 
 3:^ 
 
 :0 
 in 
 
 
 ;0 
 
 c 
 
 I 
 
 ■ S' 
 c 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 HH 
 
 ' 1 -O 
 
 S Uj 
 
 o 
 
< 
 
 H 
 
 <! 
 
 <—* 
 O 
 O 
 
 :^. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 C3 
 
 Q 
 
 CS 
 
 C 
 C o) 
 
 
 O 
 
 5 
 
 c 
 
 CO 
 
 
 •i 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 S3 
 
 > 
 
 ca • 
 
 o 
 
 n - 
 
 (ft " 
 
 = cs ~ 
 
 St 5; a 
 
 a c. — ^ 
 
 so o 
 
 "^ S — 
 
 fcc 
 
 a 
 < 
 
 o . 
 
 ^ B^ 
 
 
 -1^ 
 
 n= 
 
 2 
 c 
 
 
 »■-*- r*1 
 
 ffl' 
 
 c 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 = a 
 
 ■V c 
 
 c 
 
 c; 
 
 
 c 
 
 ffi 
 
 33 
 
 _ 
 
 q= 
 
 PS ^ 
 
 < a 
 
 q 
 
 -.0 
 
 t<i 
 
 2 
 
 fct. 
 
 c3 
 
 ■3 
 3 
 
 ^- 
 
 o 
 ^ I 
 
 S v.. 
 
 " o ^ it c 
 
 -a: GO 
 
 ^ 2 
 
 o 
 
 -3 
 u 
 o 
 to 
 
 (A C 
 
 := o 
 fee. 2 
 
 •a 
 
 s 
 
 P3 
 
 0) c 
 
 CO 
 
 * l-H 
 
 Q -> 
 -fa . 
 
 bL 
 
 rc 
 
 - o 
 
 c 
 
 W 
 
 s 
 
 .2 
 
 — (—4 
 
 "3 
 
 2 
 H 
 
 o s o ?c O (., 
 
 *^ '^ — •> *S ( 
 
 -as o' I 
 
 
 
 — i;_ t 2 
 ca 
 
 '3 
 
 "13 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 CO 
 
 -'= I. 
 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 WS 
 
 
 
 y. c 
 
 M Mw 
 
 * X 
 
 o ~ 
 a o 
 
 .a 
 
 c5? 
 
 '.Ci 
 
 
SE 
 
 tt 
 
 ■^ — fi. 
 
 so K ; 
 
 C 
 
 
 o 
 
 fn 
 
 ^ O 
 
 •o 
 
 < " 
 
 OS 
 
 I 
 
 h 
 
 r> 
 
 bL 
 
 ^<; 
 
 w 
 
 M 
 
 to 
 
 O 
 
 w 
 
 ra 
 
 If*. '^ 
 
 3S 
 
 
 I 
 
 -= M^ 
 
 ■o ^ 
 
 H S 
 
 =^ 
 
 W^ 
 
 
 52 
 
 M ■ 
 
 w^s 
 
 bfi 
 
 O 
 
 -S c 
 
 (/) 
 
 ;o i; 
 
 -< -s 
 
 
 &-e- 
 
 /-" :0 
 
 
 .t t s 
 
 o r 
 
 ,o 
 
 ^ 'S' 
 
 — SD c 
 
It ' '■ ^" 
 
 ^" 
 
 rs -a 
 
 
 _ — i 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cs t; 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 •s 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 l2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M ''i 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 5— 
 
 
 
 '/, 
 
 'tb 
 
 5. — 
 
 sl 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 '2 
 
 Cl 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 — 
 
 ri 
 
 
 C 
 
 i 
 
 ■40 
 
 o 
 
 7. 
 
 [— 
 
 _ - 
 
 t 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 I 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 12 
 
 
 < 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - o 
 
 
 t: 
 
 
 15- 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 /J 
 
 -*- 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 .1 
 
 u 
 
 4 
 
 "S 
 
 
 
 5S 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 - c 
 
 
 _ J - 
 
 3 
 
 •3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S-l 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 He; 
 
 C' 
 
 c 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .M 
 
 fc 
 
 
 uis: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 Q, 
 
 
 D 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Im 
 
 X 
 
 
 •< 
 
 
 Si 
 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 jr^ 
 
 
 
 1 , \ 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 — 
 
 M 
 
 rr. 
 
 O 
 
 T— 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 
 
 o 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ■>- 
 
 
 K 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 •i 
 
 "S 
 
 
 tfi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iP P5 
 
 I 3-: 
 
 I H . 
 
 I ?-« 
 
 : o o 
 
 3 a — 
 
 en ^ a >- 
 
 •>^. 
 
 K ;2 c/^ 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 t* 
 
 s 
 
 u 3 
 
 = bp 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 .if 
 '5 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5^, 
 
 — ' 
 
 c ^— ~~ 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 :" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt V 
 
 S 
 
 H S 
 
 r~ 
 
 ""rt 
 
 
 ,j^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -A » 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i -s 
 
 
 I-- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 3 
 
 
 V tf 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H — g 
 
 
 r— a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a be 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■■S 55 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 v 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 »— t 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 -5 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 52 '■*-* 
 
 „s 
 
 
 ' 
 
 O 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 =3 . 
 
 
 S 1 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 ^1 
 
 - 
 
 1- 
 
 S5 
 
 < 
 
 .6 
 
 
 5" 
 
 I4 
 
 5 
 
 
 a! 
 
 c 
 
 e_ 
 
 -^ — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1*4 _ 
 
 ca 
 
 > 
 
 S 
 
 cd — . 
 
 id 
 
 
 3 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 i' 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 
 _ 
 
 1-3 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 :0 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 .5 1 
 "" ^ S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 3 
 .a 
 
 
 c 
 
 -53 
 
 - 5 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 r 
 
 \ 
 1 
 
 A 
 J} 
 
 -93 
 
 
 DS 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 S s 
 
 
 
 
 is 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 93 
 
 
 
 
 
 ;0 
 
 
 
 US 
 
 1 
 
 V. 
 
 3 « 
 
 
 
 
 ii5 
 
 1— < 
 
 
 O 
 
 d 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Si 
 
 a « ^ 
 'lit 
 
 
 
 in 
 — <u 
 
 Si 
 
 •C 
 
 b 
 33 
 
 
 >< 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 '3 s 
 
 •« 
 3 
 
 a _ 
 
 To 
 
 — ij - 
 
 
 •3 
 
 
 
 ♦3 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 ""•5 
 
 % " 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 s 
 ;5 
 
 I- 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 _e 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 : * 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 '>S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 en 
 
 r 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 
 ■a 
 
 
 i2 1 
 
 r/3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •a 
 
 
 S 
 
 ■71 .^j 
 
 ^ 
 
 "a 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -J 
 
 CIS 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 :0 — 
 
 iff 
 
 s 
 1 
 
 "5 
 
 ■e 
 
 
 1 
 
 **- 
 
 3 
 
 1 -J 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' u. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 •S 
 
 (, 
 
 ■d 
 
 ■ -^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 »i; 
 
 
 u 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «i 
 
 'Zi 
 
 tn 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1* 
 
 im 
 
 'u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £w 
 
 he 
 
 u. 
 
 
 
 
 
u 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 ■3 
 3 ■" 
 
 a 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 -B 
 
 
 
 -n 
 
 3 
 
 H- 
 
 
 
 
 7^ 
 
 bl) 
 
 
 
 4-J 
 
 ^ 
 
 <u 
 
 
 ;4 
 
 
 -i5 
 
 
 i— ■1-' SB 
 
 L" t^ > 
 
 a p 
 
 33 J: 
 
 r a 
 
 :0 
 
 eg 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 "3 
 
 to 
 
 B 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 ['^ 
 
 it 
 
 -3 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 
 a 
 o a o 
 
 
 J ^ 
 
 O 
 
 2 
 
 (A 
 
 - <u 
 
 » 
 
 « 
 
 •a) 
 
 a 
 
 I— < 
 
 b 
 (25 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 cc 
 
 O 
 
 i-=i 
 
 •3 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 B 
 ! 
 
 2 
 
 > 
 
 bD 
 
 a 
 
 O ■= -t- 
 
 3 
 
 !-3 c^ 
 
 22 
 
 I o . 
 
 o K -* 
 
 PS « 
 
 - o 
 
 |-_bp — 
 
 H 
 
 S3 
 
 .£3 
 
 a 
 
 tD 
 
 as 
 
 e 
 ■ rt 
 
 -2 
 
 ■3 S 
 
 E- 
 
 c - 
 
 rs -a 
 £ 
 
 = "5 
 
 5 
 
 OcS 
 
 < en 
 
 hJ - 
 
 
 u 
 
 B.-; 
 
 He. 
 
 ui^;i 
 
 D 
 
 «| 
 
 r c 
 
 
 o 
 
 :0 
 X 
 
 o 
 oi H 
 
 s I 
 
 f' 
 
 3 
 
 LI ^ 
 
 = o 
 
 eft *<-* 
 
 - 1. — +j - 
 
 .2 rt 
 •5 iL 
 
 L H 
 
 c ^ ■ 
 
 5 c/j 
 
 m 
 
 . 0) 
 
 he 
 

 CQ?-' 
 
 3n 
 
 bf?! 
 
 
 Im 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 '/; 
 
 to 
 
 Z — 
 
 
 2 
 
 Tl; 
 
 
 
 
 ri" 
 
 t- 
 
 ■5; 
 
 6 
 
 J 
 
 la 
 _ g t 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 C« 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 ._ 
 
 
 c 
 
 I 
 
 *x 
 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - O 
 
 
 t- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 1 
 
 b 
 
 _ 
 
 0; 
 
 
 »;? 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 'Ji 
 
 
 •«! « 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 'E 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 - tc- 
 
 > 
 
 •a 
 
 -■ c 
 
 
 a.-; 
 
 5 
 
 ■a 
 
 
 
 
 
 ».._ 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 He. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 X 
 
 
 •< 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 r 
 
 M 
 
 4^ 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 f^ 
 
 to -T 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 -M 
 
 -»- 
 
 ^ « 
 
 
 
 
 «« 
 
 % 
 
 ■« 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bo p5 
 
 2o 
 
 03 
 
 e4 
 
 s 
 
 cS O . 
 eft !», cc ■- 
 
 i 5^ 
 
 is 
 

 B 
 
 a 
 
 
 L. 
 
 
 'C 
 
 :0 
 
 .S -u 
 
 u 
 
 •15 
 
 "3 S 
 
 3 
 
 — -t- 
 
 
 C 
 
 -^ bli 
 
 O. 
 
 X 
 
 «— — 
 
 r^JS 1 •- 
 
 "5 K 
 
 _6Jj 
 
 be «- 
 
 •■ OJ — .2. 
 
 •^ _ « . 
 ;2 > 
 
 ^ 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 c 
 H 
 
 - o ■ 
 
 2 J. w 
 
 2 V 
 
 S5 
 
 < ?5 
 
 ►J « 
 
 o " 
 
 -— h1 
 
 fc TO 
 
 §2 
 
 « -a 
 
 n 
 
 ^g*. 5 2 .^ Is 
 ^2oq 2 := J. 
 
 
 "'S^ 
 
 03 
 
 fr- £ 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 2 
 "3 
 
 so 
 
 c 
 
 . t-l 
 
 o 
 
 B 
 
rl 
 
 «,i; 
 
 1 
 
 ;; c3 
 
 li . ' 
 
 k! 
 
 :t 
 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 (A 
 
 !^ 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 O C5 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 C -3 
 
 "3 „*» ^ 
 
 o s 
 
 ti «" 
 
 
 to 
 to 
 
 o 
 
 \* 
 
 n 
 u 
 
 ^3 
 
 B 
 
 s 
 
 « 
 
 a: 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 Ik. 
 O 
 
 I 
 
 C3 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 .a 
 
 Of 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^.3 
 
 
 
 u; 
 
 "3 
 
 e 
 o 
 
 
 3 
 
 fco 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 ■•3 a 
 
 ^3 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 'fe' 
 
 a 
 
 :0 
 
 
 •5' 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 s 
 
 ti 
 
 
 ■< 
 
 - tj - 
 US 
 
 .•« J 
 
 C8 
 
 f J ;- 
 
'& 
 
 '5 
 
 o 
 
 .._ ifc- 
 
 B 
 
 a 
 
 »5 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 en 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 s^. 
 
 
 VT^ 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 P3 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 ^H 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 ►-< 
 
 
 P3 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 k; 
 
 
 en 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 >* 
 
 •a 
 
 O 
 
 -e.a 
 
 O 
 
 ■?&'^ 
 
 
 •21 
 
 S5 
 
 K 
 
 W 
 
 e^ 
 
 o 
 
 C 
 
 H 3'-=? 
 
 -* = i' 
 
 r' 
 I 
 
 u 
 - o 
 
 
 02 
 
 " 3 
 
 r5 
 
 t/5 
 
 •a 
 
 3- 
 
 tc 
 
 i= 
 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 :5 
 
 C3 
 O 
 
 s 
 .a 
 '3 
 
 03 
 
 o 
 
 01 
 
 13 
 
 •B 
 . O 
 
 w 
 
 C5 
 
 -•3 a 
 
 a 
 y, 
 
 « 
 
 o 
 H 
 
 :0 
 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 
 <• ^"^-^ 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 ■it IM |2.2 
 
 I- u 
 
 UUU 
 
 1.8 
 
 6" 
 
 ii 
 
 1.25 i 1.4 lllll 1.6 
 
 PhotDgraphic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STRICT 
 
 WiBSTER.N.Y. 14S80 
 
 (716)872-4503 
 
 v*> 
 
 4- 
 

 J 
 
 i 
 
 c^ 
 

 Q 
 in 
 
 < 
 
 « 
 
 O 
 h 
 O 
 
 (a. 
 O 
 
 33 
 
 M 
 Q 
 < 
 
 O 
 
 !» 
 O 
 
 »-] 
 
 Q 
 to 
 O 
 
 Q 
 
 O 
 
 h 
 O 
 
 J- 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 ■«! 
 U 
 
 c 
 
 .S CO 
 
 - — -S to 
 
 :0 
 
 B3 
 
 ^7 
 
 bo 
 
 s 
 
 "53 
 
 > 
 
 I 
 
 >s . 
 
 ( — 
 
 I *» 
 
 k g 
 
 c ~ 
 
 «l 
 
 £ a 
 
 O 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 a. 
 
 a. 
 
 ■f = 
 
 — A ■ 
 
 
 I 
 
 :0 
 
 ? bo 
 fe be 
 
 3 
 
 [ a-s 
 
 i <S S? Si 
 
 «' 
 
 c 
 
 
 O 
 
 bi> 
 
 ■ 5 
 
 c 
 
 -2 
 
 a 
 
 '-I- 
 I o 
 
 be 
 
 bo 
 
 B 
 
 9u 
 
 O 
 
 a. J CL 
 ■3 » o 
 
 - = — « X 
 
 OS 
 
 fc. . 
 
 00 
 
 
 rw 
 
 <U 05 
 
 
 := 2 ■'2 To '" 
 _ -*■ Ci4 - £. — ■£ 
 
 fit* — 2 .« 
 2 -ECO J3 "C 
 
 M 
 
 o 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 To 
 
 V ^ 
 ''■^ H 
 
 a 
 .2 
 
 1 
 
 c 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 ^1 
 
 _ o . 
 H 
 
 
 bt 
 
 "9:0 
 
 a 
 
 en 
 
 ►J 
 
 H S 
 
 s 
 
 be 
 
 t5 
 
 o o 
 5 O 
 
 •S-0. 
 I- «K 
 
 Is 
 
 a: 
 
 ' as So 
 
 t«.5 ^ 
 
 1. . 
 I 
 
 a 
 O 
 
 bt 
 
 tp g 
 S :o 
 
 oa 
 
 !>- 
 
 _2 b»j 
 
 
 . § 9) 
 
 -'^—-%—^—Z O 
 
 
 It 
 
 3 -? 
 
 ?fe. 
 
 so 
 
 1"^ 
 
 :0 " 
 
 n 
 
 as 
 
 O ^ 
 
 
 o w 
 - *j — ^c 
 
 ea o 
 
 u 
 
 r- bO 
 
 a 
 c 
 
 e 
 
 bi) 
 
 3 
 
 "3 
 
 3 
 
 C5 
 
 O 
 
 (faC/J 
 
 c 
 
 bt 
 3 
 _«! 
 
 -•a 
 
 3 
 
 C 
 
 o • 
 
 I. "E ? 
 
 h 
 O 
 Si 
 
 f H 5 
 
 3 
 
 m 
 
 H 
 
 ea — 
 <» 
 
so j; 
 
 » — o 
 o JS 
 5 H 
 
 VII.— DESCENDANTS OF ARI MAR80N, 
 Brought dotim to the Present Inline. 
 
 A HI Marson — V — Thorgerd Alfs daughter 
 
 Tliorgils 
 
 I 
 Ari 
 
 I 
 Einar 
 
 of Reykholum 
 
 r J 
 
 Hallbera-v-Thorgeir Hallasoii 
 
 Ingibjorg^Sturla Thordarson 
 H t 11^3 
 8teinunn>/-J6n Brandsoii 
 I of Reykholum 
 Ingimund 
 
 I 
 Ari 
 
 I 
 Gudmund 
 
 t> 
 
 5 « 2R 
 
 Ari 
 
 I 
 
 Gudmund 
 riki 
 
 r 
 
 Andres v-Thorbjdrg Olaf's daughter 
 
 Gudmund — ., — Jard Prud, Thorleif 's daughtc? 
 
 of Felli I — I of Reykholum 
 
 Thorlelf of>^Ingibjorg, Jon's daughter 
 Skogi 1 1636 I of Skalmarnesmula 
 
 Jon of GufHdal->^8igrid, Gudmund's daughter 
 
 Offidalis, 15fi4 | 
 
 I ' 
 
 Thoriief of-y-Hallbjorg Bjom's daughter 
 Skalmarnes- 
 
 mula 
 
 Einar-s^Gudrun, Thorlak's daughter 
 
 Thorolf-;-Thorkatla, Finn's daughter 
 t 1649 I ofFlatey 
 
 Ingibjorg^z-Nicholas Gudmundson 
 tl7b6 I Priest 1 1708 
 
 G^drun-^.^Sigurd Sigurdson, Governor 
 f 1731 of Bardastrand 
 
 Ragnhild, 1725 — y — Olaf Gunlaugson 
 M768 I ofSvefneyjum 
 
 Eggart Olafson 
 Poet, Phyxcn. Sf Antiquary 
 b. 1726. d. 1768. 
 
 Magnus Olafson 
 
 Last Lagrnan of Iceland 
 b. 1730. d. 1800. 
 
 — Ragnheidir 
 Finn's daughter 
 cf. Tab. IX. 
 
 Finn Maoni'^sson, 
 Vice-President, R.S. N./ . 
 6.1781. 
 
 Jon Olafsort 
 
 or 
 
 John Olafson 
 
 of Hypnoness, 
 
 Philologist and 
 
 Antiquary, 
 b. 1731, (^. 1811. 
 
HB 
 
 VIII.— DESCENDANTS OF THORFINN KARLSEFNE AND GUDHID, 
 
 To the Present Tinui. 
 
 1007 
 TlIOnPINNKARLrtEFNE -^ GUDRID, TtlOKlJARNAH'd DADOHTEIl 
 
 Snorri Thorfiiinsson -s^liigveld, UlfliefUu's daughter 
 
 Sfcinuiin — 
 
 -Einar Ketillsson 
 
 Thorstcin Ranglatr 
 
 I 
 
 Kotill — 
 
 tins 
 
 -Alfheid, Thorloif's (lauj^hter 
 
 Thovlak — ■ — Giidlanii, Kyjulf's daughter 
 Priest tl240 
 
 Kctill- 
 
 -Halldora, Thorvald's daughter, 
 
 Priest atul I Sister of Count GiKSur,Jirst Vieeroy nf 
 Laijnum t 1'273 Iceland 
 
 Valgerd — s,, — Narfl Snorrason 
 I of Kolbeinst'mlum 
 
 [ 1 ■ t 1284 
 
 Thorliik — , — Helga, Nicholas' daughter 
 Lagmun, 1290 t 1303 | 
 
 Kctill of Kolbcin8ti')dum, 
 Viceroy, 1214 +1342 
 
 I 
 Vigfiis <if KolV>cinst6diini, 
 1390 
 
 I 
 
 Erlend - 
 
 Narfl of Kolboinstodum 
 
 I 
 
 of Kulbeinst'iklum 
 
 Erlend- 
 
 Govemor of liangardul 
 
 -Hallbora, Sijlmunrtar's daugh' -r 
 Gudrid, Thorvard's daughter 
 
 Vigfiis, ^, G'ldrun, Pal's daughter 
 
 X«<7)..an,1513-l.J19 
 
 t 1523 
 
 Gudrid- 
 
 -Sieinund Erikson 
 
 Gudrun — ■,, — Ami Gislason 
 Sivniund's of Lidarend 
 daughter 
 
 See Tab. J\. 
 
 J nil 
 
 Giidlaug 
 
 I 
 Gisli, Governor 
 
 I 
 Giulmund t lfl05 
 
 I 
 Salviir 
 
 I 
 
 Markiis s/ Oudriin 
 
 I Sister of celebr. TorfauH 
 
 I 
 
 r 
 
 Gudrid — -/ — Hans Willumsen Londeman, 
 
 I Dane, Govr. Amen 
 
 Edward Londeman of Rosenkrone, 
 Assesior, Chief Court, Denm. §• Norway, b. 1C30. d. 1749. 
 
 ._ J 
 
 rhristian of Hoff — ^r — Maria Miirgareta Londeman, 
 
 i. 1714. d. 1762. 
 
 Hans Edward Ilenrv of IlofT, 
 h. 1738. d. 1779. 
 
 I 
 Christian Ilcnry of lloflT-Riiscnkronp, 
 
 Baron of Rosendal, in Norway, b. 1768. 
 
 Marcus Gerhard, 
 
 Count of Rosenkrone, 
 
 Diinish AvibaMudor 
 
 in Saxony, §c. 
 
 6.1738. </.'l8il. 
 
3 
 a 
 p 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 < 
 
 'A 
 
 b 
 U 
 ai 
 _) 
 
 < 
 
 s? 
 
 •-* 
 
 b 
 
 EC M 
 
 »- . 
 
 O M 
 
 ^ "^ 
 
 ^ H 
 H 
 
 S5 
 
 <1 
 Q 
 
 ;?; 
 w 
 o 
 
 » 
 
 w 
 
 05 
 
 O 
 S5 
 
 o 
 
 >—( 
 
 H 
 U 
 
 H 
 
 >!; 
 
 o 
 
 >) 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 -3 
 
 a 
 O 
 
 e 
 .c 
 
 a 
 
 4> 
 
 3,- 
 
 !« 
 
 
 2 a. ^ 
 
 
 - o ■ 
 
 O 
 
 -a 
 
 ■13 
 
 s _: 
 
 a, o^i>. 
 
 ^^ ■ 
 
 .- Is, 
 
 
 
 =5 
 
 
 
 to 
 s 
 ca 
 -3 
 
 ■a 
 
 a 
 s 
 
 S 
 8 
 
 c" 
 
 •3 
 
 d 
 
 -^ 
 
 - o - 
 
 1-1 '^ 
 
 r" 
 
 a 
 
 
 Si 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 C3 
 
 
 '« 
 
 I- so 
 
 c ~ .a 
 
 o o - 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 a" 
 pa 
 
 n 
 
 .2 
 'S 
 
 O 
 
 Si 
 
 H 
 
 13 
 '3 .* 
 
 ,_ ^ i-c 
 3 h «> 
 
 t» ^ . 
 
 a 'i'» 
 ;a S^ 
 
 .a '■'5 
 
 a"? 
 
 C 
 
 ft? 
 
 o 
 
 a. 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 pq 
 
 L! 
 
 a 
 
 ® V - 
 
 a ***» 
 .a a, o 
 o «:« 
 
 aPq^ 
 
 00 
 r-t CD 
 
 ■SOSo 
 
 > 
 
 
 to ^ 
 
 •«-3 
 
 13 
 3 
 
 CD 
 
 ,a 
 to 
 
 ■ a 
 
 
 a ^'is 
 
 a ^ ~* 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 •a 
 
 --3- 
 P3 
 
 -"C - 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 75 to 
 -> 2- 
 
 is 
 
 -"5 2 
 
 00 > 
 
 •S ^■ 
 
 c 
 
 
 6^^ 
 
 
 
 'S'- 
 
 (A ^ f^ 
 
 ' 3 ? . 
 -S S" 
 
 N u 
 
li' ^i 
 
 fs^i 
 
 I. w 
 
 
 i» li 
 
 
 
 
 ■'I ifi 
 
 . il r 
 
INDEX. 
 
 A. 
 
 Althing, xviii. 
 Alderton Point, 73. 
 Albunia, 183, 210. 
 America, isthmus of, 'ilA. 
 Aiit;lo-8axoi)s, 133. 
 
 ASBRANDSON BjbllN, 184. 
 
 B. 
 
 Barrow's Straits, 129. 
 Betle the Venerable, 173. 
 Booths, Leif 8, 63. 
 Brage, viii, 
 
 Breidavik, see Asbrandsun. 
 Bremen, Adam of, 68. 
 Buzzard's Bay, 03. 
 
 C. 
 
 Cabot, ISO- 
 Canoes, 71. 
 CsBsar, 212, 223. 
 Cassiterides, 222. 
 Celtic, 214. 
 Columbus, 54. 
 Connecticut, 53. 
 Cowl, 89. 
 Currachs, 220. 
 
 D. 
 Danes, 180. 
 Dagr and Dsegr, 91. 
 Dlcuil, 176. 
 DiGHTON Rock, 120. 
 Drinking Hall, xxiii. 
 Druids, 223. 
 Duneyjar, 149. 
 
 E. 
 Edda, X. 
 
 Egede, Hans, 159.— Paul, 164. 
 England, 154. 
 
 Erik the Red, Saga of, 47. 
 Erikson, Ieif, 59.— Thorvald, 
 
 70. — TH0R8TB1K, 74. 
 
 Eystribygd, 137, 156. 
 
 F. 
 
 Flatobogen, xxxvii. 45. 
 Frbydiu, 99, 106. 
 
 Furdustiands, 89. 
 Fyrisvold, 191. 
 
 Gardar, 48, 126. 
 Qarments, coloured, 192. 
 Gellerson Thorkell, 181. 
 GoDi, Snorri, 186. 
 Graah, 138, 146, 152. 
 Greipar, 126. 
 Greenland, 49, 146. 
 Grimolfson, Bjakni, 89, 103. 
 gudlauoson, gudleif, 203. 
 GuDRiD, 74, 86, 105, 111. 
 Gunnbjarnaskar, 48. 
 
 ir. 
 
 Heimskringla, viii. 79. 
 Helluland, 60, 88, 113, llii. 
 Hehjulfson, Bjarni, 50. 
 Herredsthing, iii. 
 Hestething, xvii. 
 Hoftollr, M. 
 Holmgan, vi. 
 Holibut, I J. 
 H«pe, 63, 65, 94. 
 Hus8snotrutr6, 110,113. 
 
 I. 
 
 Igaliko, 142. 
 
 Igikeit, 144. 
 
 Ireland, Great, 103, 179, 204, 
 209,211. 
 
 Ireland, intercourse of, with Ice- 
 land, 131, 133. — Primitive inha- 
 bitants of, 219.— Mines of, 174, 
 222.— Reputation of, in the 8th 
 century, 134. 
 
 Irish, 174, 176 Ships of, 217. 
 
 Jomsvikings, 191. 
 
 K. 
 
 Karlsefne, Thorfinn, Saga of, 
 
 82.— Posterity of, 105. 
 Kakortok, 139." 
 Kingiktorsoak, 124 
 Kjalarness, 74, 94. 
 KroBsaness, 73. 
 KroksfjardBrheidi, 126. 
 

 ,1 
 
 
 11- 
 
 Ml 
 
 ■| 
 
 INDEX 
 
 132, 
 
 Landntimabok, xi. 
 
 Lancaster's Sound, 129. 
 
 Landa Kulf, 150. 
 
 Long Island, 53. 
 
 Mf gnusson, Arnas, xxiv. xliii. 
 
 Magnuscn, Finn, 47, 05, 122, 
 
 152. 
 Maple, bird's eye, 110. 
 Marsok, Ari,179, 183. 
 Markland, G1, 8H, 113, 188, 
 Merchants, Icelandic, 130. 
 Miiller, Bishop, ii. 184, 200. 
 
 N. 
 Nadodd, 48. 
 Nantucket, 62. 
 Newfoundland. '3,60, 150. 
 Nordrasetur. 
 Nova Scotia, 53, 61. 
 
 O. 
 
 Ogham alphabet, 227. 
 Olaf, king of Norway, 78, 79. 
 
 Palnatoki, 191. 
 
 Parry, Sir W. E. 129, 130. 
 
 Fapas, Irish, 174, 175, 176. 
 
 Pocasset River, 63. 
 
 Point Alderton, 73. 
 
 Polar Seas, 136. 
 
 Pope Nicholas V. 152. 
 
 Porridge, 97. 
 
 RafNjTheLimbhick merchant, 
 180. 
 
 Rhode Island, 53. — Historical So- 
 ciety, 120. 
 
 Rimbegla, 101,131. 
 
 Hune, ix. 
 
 Runic inscription, 125, 143. 
 
 Runolfson, Bishop Thorlak, 105, 112. 
 
 8. 
 
 Sagas, viii. x. xix. 
 
 Stitirical songs, xvi. 
 
 .Scott, Sir Walter, 78, 184, 196. 
 
 Scoti, Irish, 218. 
 
 Sliips, IriBh, 217. 
 
 Sigurdson, Jarl, 181. 
 
 Skra)ling8, 72, 96. 
 
 Skalds, X. xii. 
 
 Snohri Karlsbfneson, 92, 105. 
 
 Speculum Regale, 132. 
 
 Stikklestad, x. 
 
 Sturleson, Snorri, xxxv. 
 
 Sturlungers, xxxix. 
 
 Tacitus, testimony of, 221. 
 Thor,92, 189. 
 Thohstbin Erikson, 74. 
 Thurstein the black, 76. 
 Thorbrandson, Snorri, 84. 
 Thorvaldson, Bertel, 93. 
 Thorvard, 87. 
 Thurid of Froda, 186. 
 Turner, Sharon, 135, 224. 
 Tyrker, 67. 
 
 Uniped, 101. 
 
 U. 
 
 V. 
 
 Vestribygd, 151. 
 
 Vines, 69, 90. 
 
 Vinland, 68, 113, 116, 188. 
 
 W. 
 
 Walchendorf, 157. 
 Wellington Channel, 129. 
 Westmen, 174, 187. 
 White Man's Land, 103, 179, 208, 
 216. 
 
 Yule, feast of, xxv. 86. 
 
 yiffii 
 
 y 
 
 ii- 
 
 
 THE END. 
 
 O. NORMAN, TRINTBH, MAIDEN LANE, COVBNT OARDBN. 
 
196. 
 
 02, 105. 
 
 ,84. 
 
 58. 
 
 ,179,208, 
 
 BN.